Home

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

1. Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X xX xX X X X X X X X X X X 10b X xX xX X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X YCbCr A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X x xX X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBRtA 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 52 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2K x 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 53 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 54 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2xHD 720 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 55 SDI7 module HD SDI 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X x xX X xX X X X X X X X X Table 3 56 SDI7 module HD SDI 1280 x 720 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 5
2. STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 0 APH TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 ns VIDEO GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels Y ON Pb ON Pr ON TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 Black Generator module BG7 Black Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the BG7 Black Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module BG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 11 BG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 23 7TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module BG7 module product description The BG7 Black Generator module is a multiformat black generator with the following features Four outputs for
3. C Y TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE Aw ENTER BARS LINEAR FLATFLD MULTBRST SWEEP ENABLE a Ee fe o COC or Q 0 Monitor PULSE J TIMING so omer J ll v FORMAT Co int ExT TIME g 3036 023 Figure 3 114 Front panel test signal buttons The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is in generator mode Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signals in the signal set Description COLOR BAR 100 Color Bars Eight full height bars of white yellow cyan green magenta red 75 Color Bars 100 White blue and black This pattern is available with three variations at 75 Color Bars 75 White 100 value for all bars at 75 value for colors and 100 for white and at 75 value for all bars 100 Color Bars Over Red These variations on color bars are available only in the 625 50i 75 Color Bars Over Red format of the SD output mode They consist of the 75 or 100 color bars signal on the top half of the raster and a matching 75 or 100 red field on the lower half SMPTE EG1 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE EG 1 1990 This pattern includes 75 color bars reverse blue bars I and Q sections black white and pluge sections Note that this pattern is only available for YCbCr f
4. 0 cceeeeee eee nee eee eee eee eteeeeeeneeaees 3 192 Figure 3 92 HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu 0 cccceeee cence eee eeeeeene eens 3 195 Figure 3 93 HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu Continued e cece een ee eee 3 196 Figure 3 94 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame 0 0 ec ceccece eee e eee eee eteeeeeeaeenees 3 200 Figure 3 95 HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu e cece eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 3 201 Figure 3 96 HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 00 cece ence ee eee ene eneeeneeaees 3 202 Figure 3 97 Front panel test signal buttons 00 ccc cece cece cence eee eee cnet ene e en eeneeeaeennees 3 211 Figure 3 98 HDLG7 module main menu sce cce eee ne eee eee ene ence ne eee eee eeeeteeneeeaeenes 3 216 Figure 3 99 HDLG7 module LINK OFFSET submenu ecceeeeee eee eee ene eneeeeeeaees 3 219 Figure 3 100 HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 219 Figure 3 101 Front panel test signal buttons c ccc cc cence eee e nee e eee ene e nee en ee eneeeeennees 3 224 Figure 3 102 HDVG7 module main menu e sce ce cece eee ee ene ence eee e eee eeeeteeneeeneenees 3 226 Figure 3 103 HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE subment eccec eee eneeeeeeeeeaees 3 228 Figure 3 104 HDVG7 module OVERLAY submentu cee ceeceeeeeceee eee ee
5. Figure 3 110 HDVG7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 to 1 2 frame in 1 line steps Horizontal See page 3 130 GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock 13 5 ns steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 237 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu 3 238 Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the module outputs This menu is only available when a GPS7 module is also installed in the instrument NOTE To display the TIMECODE submenu the HDVG7 module hardware must be version 2 0 or above Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the main menu HDVG7 x TIMECODE SOURCE ID U rogram lime Time of Day Bee A V HDVG7 x TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 V 1970 198 lt q gt Set the offset Figure 3 111 HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the timecode
6. J Front Panel J452 Figure 2 4 Location of J452 on the AG7 module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 7 Operating basics AGL7 module connectors The AGL7 Analog Genlock module is equipped with six BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 5 Oo FEN BLACK3 BLACK 2 Figure 2 5 AGL7 module connectors E REF Input loopthrough connectors for an external reference signal which can be NTSC PAL black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signals The signal input requires proper external termination CW Internally terminated input connector for CW Continuous Wave signals 1 3 58 4 43 5 and 10 MHz You can configure the CW connector to output a 48 kHz word clock signal See page 2 8 Changing the Input Output configuration BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst signal NOTE You cannot output HDTV trilevel sync signals from the BLACK 1 connector BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal E BLACK 3 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal Alarm output You can configure the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 connector to output an alarm When an alarm condition is detected the output signal from the selected connector turns off for about 60 ms The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable See page 2 49 How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interfac
7. 0 cecceceeeeeneeneeeeeeeeaeeaeeas 2 47 Figure 2 31 Example transfer exe window after the network upgrade is complete 2 60 Figure 2 32 Example FTP view of the instrument file structure ceceeceeeeee ence ee eeaeees 2 66 Figure 2 33 Example FTP error message when flash memory is full 0 c ecceeeeee teeta ees 2 66 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual v Table of Contents vi Figure 3 1 AG7 module main MeNu 0 cece cence cee ce eee ee eee eee ence ne eee eee eneeneeeeeeene ea 3 3 Figure 3 2 AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Figure 3 3 AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu ccce cece neces eee ene eneeneeeaeeaene es 3 6 Figure 3 4 AGL7 module main menu 0 cece cece nee ce eee ee eee ene eden ee eee eee eneeneeeaeeaene ea 3 9 Figure 3 5 AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu 0 cceccecee cence eceeeeeee eee eneeneeeaeeeens 3 10 Figure 3 6 AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu 0 cece cece cence eee cnet eee ene ene e ene ene e ea 3 12 Figure 3 7 AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu ccc eee ee ence ecee cee neeneeee eae eneeneenaeeeens 3 13 Figure 3 8 AGL7 module TIMING submenu 0 cc ccce cece eee e ee ee nee nee enn e nee en ne ene ees 3 14 Figure 3 9 Front panel test signal buttons 0 c cee ce eee ec cece n ence eee eee eee eae enenneenaeenens 3 19
8. 3 24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 module Use this menu to edit text that is overlaid on the signal for the SIGNAL and ID TEXT submenu BARS outputs and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following table shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the main menu or SELECT OUTPUT submenu A Enable ATG x ID TEXT 7 Blink Fast Status Enable Ds Blink Slow Disable ATG x ID TEXT X Position 0 0 APH ATG x ID TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH ATG x ID TEXT EDIT Set the horizontal position Set the vertical position A lt gt gt Edttext V ENTER ATG JD TEXT SAVE Save the text to the signal file Figure 3 13 ATG7 module ID TEXT submenu Status Sets the blinking mode of the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Enable Turns on the blinking function of the overlay Blink Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Blink Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals Disable Turns off the blinking function of the overlay X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of a
9. 6 cece cece ruissas ee nen TEED eden dete EEEE EEE a 3 36 AVG7 module factory default settings 0 0 00 ccc eee cece cece neser resres rrr eee ene enaeenaeeeaes 3 47 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module 0 ccc cece cece cee ee eee eens enaeeneenaes 3 48 AWVG7 module product description 00 ccc cece cece cece ee een ee ee eens nee eea eens eneenaeenaes 3 48 How to operate the AWVG7 module ccc cece cece een eee nent ene ne eet n eee ene ees 3 49 To select an output signal on the AWVG7 module ccc cece cece cece nee ee eee ee eens eneeenee es 3 50 AWVG7 module main Menu 6 cece ce eee e eee een ene e eden denne eee eee teen eeneene eee eeeeneed 3 52 AWVG7 module factory default settings 6 cece cece eee ene e ce eee eee eee eneeneeee eee eeeeneed 3 62 BG Black Generator Modules icisccicdictiviariscnuees elds Sanita N aa a aaia 3 63 BG7 module product description 00 ccc ccc cece eee eee een ene nen ent nee ene nee es 3 63 How to operate the BG7 module ccc ccc cence eee ene nen ene nnn En ene EEE ed 3 64 BG mod le main Men syacauiianccvayvctuvennardavsieuseneseeeseanteseguinnsesaayeaeeenteneeaensebaes 3 65 BG7 module factory default settings 0c ccc cece ccc e cece eee cent enn e nee ene nee ee enna ees 3 74 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module 0 ccc cece eee eee ee eee eee n ene nee eee nee ene nee ed 3 75 DVG7 module pro
10. 0 0 cece ccc ec ee ee ee eee eee eee tees eee enee es 3 95 Table 3 19 Figures of merit for signal quality 0 cece cece cence eee eee e nee eeaeeneeeeaeenee eas 3 104 Table 3 20 Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 input signals cecceeceeneeeeeeeaeeenees 3 118 Table 3 21 GPS7 module output signal formats 00 ccc cece cence ence cnet eee e ene eeneeeaeennees 3 121 Table 3 22 Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals cecceeceeeeee eee eneeeeees 3 122 Table 3 23 GPS7 module LTC output signal formats 0 cece cece cence ence ence ene eennennees 3 143 Table 3 24 GPS7 module factory default settings 2 1 0 0 0 cece ce ccc ence eee cnet eens cnet ene eeaeennees 3 147 Table 3 25 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G level A 1920 x 1080 c ccc cena eee 3 153 Table 3 26 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level A 1280 x 720 cece cece cena anes 3 153 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Table 3 27 Table 3 28 Table 3 29 Table 3 30 Table 3 31 Table 3 32 Table 3 33 Table 3 34 Table 3 35 Table 3 36 Table 3 37 Table 3 38 Table 3 39 Table 3 40 Table 3 41 Table 3 42 Table 3 43 Table 3 44 Table 3 45 Table 3 46 Table 3 47 Table 3 48 Table 3 49 Table 3 50 Table 3 51 Table 3 52 Table 3 53 Table 3 54 Table 3 55 Table 3 56 Table 3 57 Table 3 58 Table 3 59 Table 3 60 Table 3 61
11. Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down V arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5
12. 00 ccc eceeeeues 3 124 GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu cc ccc cece cence ene e cena ee eeeaeenenes 3 125 GPS7 module VITC submenu 0 ccc ccc ccc eee eee ee ene teense een aeeeenes 3 127 GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu c cc ccc ccc eee c cece eee cease eenaeenenes 3 128 GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu ccc cece ccc cence eens cena eeeenes 3 130 GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu ccc cece eee eeeenaeeeenes 3 133 GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu 0c c cece cece cence een eenenes 3 134 GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu 00 0 c ccc c ence eens eeeeaeeeenes 3 136 GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu ccc ccc ccc ence cence eens eens enenes 3 137 GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu c ccc cece cence ee enaeeeeeaeeeeues 3 138 GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu c ccc cece een eee enaeeeeeaeeeenes 3 139 GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu 00cc cece cence eenaeeeeeneeeeues 3 140 GPS7 module LTC submenu c ccc ccc cece cece eee ence ene e ene eeeeae teens 3 142 GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu 0 ccc cece cece enn eee eeae eens enenes 3 144 GPS7 module GPI submenu 00 c cece ccc cece eee eee ene eee seen ee eenes 3 144 GPS7 module GPO submenu c cece cece eee eee cence nee e ease eee A ia 3 145 GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 00
13. 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Press Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set the display CIRCLE submenu position of the circle Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu Disable Enable HDVG x OVERLAY CIRCLE Seana X Position 0 0 APH et the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position HDVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 107 HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X Position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps
14. arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 99 0 in 0 1 steps Press the ENTER button confirm the selection Font Size Sets the font size of the text The size is is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the font size You can set the value from 1 0 to 100 0 in 0 1 steps Press the ENTER button confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 291 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 292 SDI7 module CIRCLE submenu Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set the display position of the circle Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY menu SDI7 x x OVERLAY CIRCLE 1 gt Disable Status Disable x Enable SDI7 x x OVERLAY CIRCLE X Position 0 0 APW lt gt Set the horizontal position SDI x x OVERLAY CIRCLE lt _ gt Set the vertical position Y Position 0 0 APH q D p SDI7 x x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 90 0 APH 1 gt Set the diameter of the circle 1970 331 A Z Figure 3 128 SDI7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confir
15. 2 BNC T connectors m 3 1 meter BNC cables Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Run the GPS7 module diagnostics a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A or down arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the menu Take note of any errors or warnings 6 Load the factory preset a Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears b Press ENTER to select Preset c Ifneeded use the up A or down arrow button to select Recall d Press the left lt 4 arrow button until Factory Preset appears e Press the ENTER button to load the preset 7 When loading is complete press the BACK button to exit the Factory Default menu DC antenna output power voltage ee Ss SENS i Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter Connect the BNC T to the adapter Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 5 6 7 8 9 Getting started Set the antenna power to 3 3 V Press the
16. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Move the BNC cable from the BLACK2 connector to the BARS connector Press the BACK button twice to return to the main menu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BARS Press the ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu appears Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select NTSC or PAL Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu appears Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 100 Color Bars Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Set the waveform monitor to view the color bars signal Check that the appropriate color bars signal appears Use the following procedure to check that the AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is functional Required equipment Waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 5 Getting started Press the front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 main menu shown below appears AVG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars D a e p Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to se
17. NOTE The character after the module name represents the output connector of the module For example B1 represents the BLACK 1 connector When the TG8000 is genlocked using either an AGL7 or GPS7 module the text GL appears at the end of the line for the frame reset that is being used by the genlock function The following figure indicates that the TG8000 is genlocked using the AGL7 module and that FRAME RESET 1 is being used by the genlock function As shown in the following figure for FRAME RESET 3 no module name is displayed when a frame reset signal is not being used by any of the installed modules Select FRAME RESET STATUS in the main menu TG8000 FRAME RESET STATUS FR 1 GL 2 997 Hz AGL7 1 B1 B2 lt 1 gt Select a module to be displayed lt gt Select a module to be displayed TG8000 FRAME RESET STATUS FR 3 AIE E elect a module to be displaye 3 000Hz iis Figure 2 20 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu For each of the frame reset signals if two or more modules are using the same frame reset signal use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select which modules are displayed TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics FRAME RESET 1 Displays the module s and output s using the 2 997 Hz frame reset signal FRAME RESET 2 Displays the module s and output s using the 6 250 Hz frame reset signal FRAME RESET 3 Displays the module s and
18. Select Link A or Link B lt gt Select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 1 Progressive formats only 2 Interlaced formats only 3 3G B and DL formats only 4 2xHD formats only Figure 3 136 SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu Continued TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Output Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Disable Continuous and Single Packet Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Parity Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Automatic and Manual parity Automatic parity is an 8 bit mode while Manual parity allows 10 bits Ifa 10 bit word is entered while in manual parity and the module is later set to automatic parity the correct 8 bits will be sent The entire 10 bit word is in system memory though so if the module is then reset to manual parity the entire 10 bit word entered by the user will be transmitted DID Press the ENTER button to edit the Data ID word You can set the Data ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data ID and exit Data ID editing SDID Press the ENTER button to edit the Secondary ID word You can set the Secon
19. b Press the ENTER button c Use the up A or down arrow button to select FORMAT d Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC e Press the ENTER button 6 Check that the WFM8300 shows NTSC as the reference input 7 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 60i in the Select Format menu 8 Press the ENTER button 9 Check that the WFM8300 shows a 1080 60i signal on the reference input 10 Disconnect the Black signal from the module and the WFM8300 11 Connect the Black 2 signal from the module to the reference input of the WFM8300 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 29 Getting started 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Set Black 2 to a 1080 50i signal on the GPS7 module a Press the BACK button to exit the Black 1 submenu b Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Black 2 c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 50i e Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM8300 shows a 1080 50i signal on the reference input Use the left lt 4 arrow button to select PAL Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 arrow button to select Black Burst Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM8300 shows PAL on the reference input Press the BACK button to exit the PAL submenu Press the BACK button again to exit the Se
20. 6 Enter the Diagnostics menu and check for fine status This indicates the GPS is operating at the maximum stability a Use the up A or down arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS b Press the ENTER button c Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select TUNE and check that the instrument shows Fine on the right side of the display 7 Press the BACK button to exit the Diagnostics menu 1 28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Black output and frame pulse 1 Connect an SDI signal like one from a DVG7 or HDVG7 module to the SDI A input of a WFM8300 and select that input as the active input on the waveform monitor 2 Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the GPS7 module to the reference input of the WFM8300 Terminate the loop through on the monitor with a 75 Q terminator 3 Press the EXT REF button on the WFM8300 4 Set the HD trilevel sync rate to Integer on the GPS7 module a Use the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT b Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Integer 60 50 30 25 24 e Press the ENTER button f Press the BACK button to exit the HD Tri level Sync Rate submenu 5 Set Black 1 to NTSC on the GPS7 module a Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black 1
21. Amplitude Use this menu to set the audio amplitude from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in steps of 1 dBFS Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the amplitude and then press the ENTER button to confirm it m Audio Click Use this menu to set the audio click rate to one click every one two three or four seconds or turn the click off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the click rate and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Origin Use this menu to set a channel origin ID of up to four ASCII characters Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the ID Press the ENTER button to confirm the Channel Origin ID Sampling Use this menu to set the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group s Audio Control Packet ACP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Frame Frame without Frame Number and Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection 3 296 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING subme
22. Go Internal Frequency Switches automatically to the internal reference and blinks the EXT REF indicator m Stay Current Frequency Maintains the current state FRAME RESET CW Selects the frame reset signal frequency to be used when a CW signal is applied to the CW connector Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the frequency and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following frequencies 6 250 Hz PAL and 50 Hz Group Uses the Frame Reset 2 signal with a frequency of 6 250 Hz m 2 997 Hz NTSC 59 94 23 98 Group Uses the Frame Reset 1 signal with a frequency of 2 997 Hz 3 000 Hz 60 and 24 Hz Group Uses the Frame Reset 3 signal with a frequency of 3 000 Hz Keep Composite Timing Keeps the synchronization shock small by using the previous NTSC or PAL timing whenever possible even if you change the genlock source to CW while the instrument is genlocked to a NTSC or PAL black burst signal The frame frequency is the same as the NTSC or PAL frequency that was previously used Use a 5 MHz 10 MHz 3 58 MHz for NTSC or 4 43 MHz for PAL signal as a CW signal source TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 11 AGL7 Analog Genlock module AGL7 module Use this submenu to set the signal format and the timing offset for the output OUTPUT submenu _ Selected in the SELECT OUTPUT menu item Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items Th
23. Pluge and Luma Reference Shallow Ramp NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite Pluge and Luma Reference CCIR 17 CCIR 18 TIMING Press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu which allows you to set the timing offset for the selected black signal output See page 3 69 BG7 module TIMING submenu TIMECODE Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu which allows you to set timecode parameters for the selected BLACK output See page 3 71 BG7 module TIMECODE submenu GPS7 module only NOTE The TIMECODE menu item is available only when a GPS7 module is installed and only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output The BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 Black Generator module BG7 module Use this submenu to select whether an integer or non integer clock will be used HD TRI LEVEL SYNC for the HD tri level sync rate for the BLACK outputs Use the left lt 4 or right RATE submenu P arrow button to select Integer 60 50 30 25 24 or Non Integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The clock rate selected here affects which signal formats are available for the BLACK outputs The following figure shows the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu Select the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE output in the main menu BLACK 1 4 HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE Non Integ
24. REF IN connector as the timing reference NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID Uses the NTSC black burst with 10 Field ID signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference PAL Burst Uses the PAL black burst signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference HD Tri Level Sync Uses the HDTV trilevel signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference CW Uses the 1 3 58 4 43 5 or 10 MHz continuous wave signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference GENLOCK TIMING Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal reference signal Press the ENTER button to access the GENLOCK TIMING submenu shown below NOTE GENLOCK TIMING is only available when the REFERENCE SOURCE is set to NTSC Burst NTSC Burst with 10 FieldID PAL BURST HD TRI LEVEL SYNC or CW GPS7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC BURST Vertical 0 Line s Select the GENLOCK TIMING menu in the REFERENCE menu A Vertical x Line s 1 Horizontal Coarse X Xxxx us J Horizontal Fine x xx nsec 1970 247 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 117 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 118 Use the up A or down Y arrow button to select a timing parameter and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the parameter The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal fo
25. Refer to BG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and submenu items See page 3 65 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 Black Generator module BG7 module main menu Use the BG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Select an output to format Set the HD trilevel sync rate for all of the BLACK outputs m Set the format of the selected output Select the test signal for the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs Option CB only m Set the timing offset for the selected output Set timecode parameters for the selected output when a GPS7 module is installed The BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed The following figure shows the BG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button BLACK 1 ENTER BLACK 2 To BLACK submenu BG x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 3 BACK BLACK 4 BLACK 1 ENTER HD TRI LEVEL ENTER To HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE SYNC RATE BACK submenu 3036 087 Figure 3 35 BG7 module main menu SELECT OUTPUT Selects which BLACK output to configure for signal format timing and timecode parameters or selects the HD trilevel sync rate for the four BLACK outputs Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the output you want to configure BLACK 1 BLACK 2 BLACK 3 BLACK 4 or HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu
26. TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Use this menu to schedule alarm times relative to program time Using the GPI connector this feature can be used to drive a light or similar indicator of alarm occurrences at a specific time in a program Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ALARM TIME submenu Select ALARM TIME menu in the main menu GPS7 x TIME SETUP ALARM ENABLE OFF GPS7 x TIME SETUP ALARM SETUP A Alarm Time 00 00 00 lt gt Edittime V BACK ON ID of 3036 036 Figure 3 69 GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the Alarm Time function SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Alarm Time schedule to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 139 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu 3 140 Use this menu to set delays for warn
27. arrow buttons simultaneously AG7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the AG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 1 AG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings CHANNEL 1 to CHANNEL 8 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF RESOLUTION 20 bits AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Free Run AUDIO TIMING Delay or Advance 0 0 msec 3 6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock module AGL7 Analog Genlock module This section describes the module specific functions of the AGL7 Analog Genlock module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module AGL7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 8 AGL7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 16 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module AGL7 module product description The AGL7 Analog Genlock module provides genlock function for the mainframe and installed modules It is equipped with two re
28. c cee ce eee e cee e eee nee ne eee ne ene e eee enee ens 1 8 Table 1 4 AC line power requirements nnn cece cece eee eee ene nee eee e nee cent tne e ene ene eens 1 9 Table 2 1 States of the INT and EXT reference indicators c cece cece cence ence ene eenneeneeenas 2 3 Table 2 2 States of the TIME timecode LED indicator 0 c ccc cece cence cence eens eeeeees 2 4 Table 2 3 States of the FAULT LED indicator 00 c cece eee ce ence nee ence teense neeneeeaeeaeneees 2 5 Table 2 4 GPS7 module LTC GPI connector pin assignments ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee es 2 14 Table 2 5 Pin assignments of the mainframe GPI connector cceceeeeeee eee eneeeeeeeeeeees 2 49 Table 2 6 Signal level combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe GPI 2 49 Table 2 7 External inspection check list 0 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece ccc ence eee eee en nen ee ene ene eee e ene e ea 2 67 Table 3 1 AG7 module factory default settings ccc ccc cece cence eee cent eens ene eneeenaeenee ens 3 6 Table 3 2 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals 00 ce ccc eee e ence eee eee enee es 3 15 Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals ceccecce cece ence eee eenee es 3 15 Table 3 4 AGL7 module factory default settings 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee cence eee ee ne eeeeeneeenee es 3 16 Table 3 5 ATG7 module signal sets a
29. color patches 3 Use FTP to locate and copy the desired signal set file s from the DVD to the SDI7 SIGNAL directory on your TG8000 generator Instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 NOTE If you load the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml enhanced signal sets on your TG8000 generator you can delete the Flat Fields xml file from the SDI7 SIGNAL directory since it contains a duplicate copy of a subset of the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml patterns 4 After you load the new signal set file s on the TG8000 generator you must either reboot the TG8000 or perform the following SCPI command before the new signals will be available OUTPut 1 2 SYNThesizer SIGNal BUILd This command rebuilds the XML signal library and will detect any newly added signals To reinstall the factory default signal sets To reinstall the factory default signal sets perform the previous procedure to install the signal set files from the following directory on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD Test Signals gt SDI7 Signal Library gt Standard Signal Set After you reinstall the standard signal sets delete the enhanced signal set file s from the SDI7 SIGNAL directory and then reboot the instrument TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To install custom picture To in
30. lt 4 or right gt arrow button to Enable or Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The SMPTE 352M payload identifier is a required element for a compliant 3 Gb s signal stream The payload identifier is optional for SD and HD formats TRIGGER OUTPUT Allows you to select a line rate frame rate the module system clock or a pixel clock as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope You can also select which SDI7 channel to use as the trigger source See page 3 309 SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu SECONDARY OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following signals for the secondary bottom BNC connector Test Pattern Black Black No Audio Black Mute Audio Test Pattern No Audio or Test Pattern Mute Audio Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When set to any of the Test Pattern selections for channel 1 the Signal 1A and Signal 1B connectors will output the same test signal The same is true for the channel 2 connectors when Test Pattern is set as the Secondary Output selection for channel 2 When set to any of the Black selections for channel 1 the Signal 1B black signal is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 1A output The same is true for the channel 2 connectors when Black is set as the Secondary Output selection for channel 2 DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to
31. 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 37 Getting started Generator function 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 main menu shown below appears HDLG x STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the 1080 59 94p format and then press the ENTER button Press the COLOR BAR button to select SMPTE RP219 Color Bars and then press the BACK button to return to the main menu Connect the upper LINK A connector to the INPUT A connector on the HDTV waveform monitor using a 75 Q BNC cable Connect the upper LINK B connector to the INPUT B connector on the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK A connector to the lower LINK A connector Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK B connector to the lower LINK B connector Repeat steps 10 thro
32. 3036 094b Figure 2 22 UTILITY submenu Continued TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 29 Operating basics VERSION INFO H W Displays the hardware version of the mainframe CPU the FPGA Frame and the Front Panel board FP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the module for which you want to display the hardware version VERSION INFO F W Displays the firmware version number of the mainframe and the date and time of the firmware build The date and time are in the format lt month date time year gt OPTIONS This menu item is available only if an SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe Displays the status of whether Option 3G is enabled or not SDI7 slot number None is displayed if Option 3G is not enabled SDI7 slot number 3G is displayed if Option 3G is enabled If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to display the option status of another SDI7 module To view the module ID and to enable Option 3G select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OPTIONS submenu See page 2 34 OPTIONS submenu SDI7 module only SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Assigns signal sets to the front panel test signal buttons and assigns a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the OTHER test signal button Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN
33. 50 Hz 500Hz 1600Hz 5000Hz 16000 Hz AG7 x CHANNEL 1 100Hz 600Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz Frequency 1000 Hz 150Hz 750Hz 2400Hz 8000Hz 200Hz 800Hz 3000Hz 9 600Hz 250Hz 41000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz AG7 x CHANNEL 1 Amplitude 20 0 dB 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS OFF AGT x CHANNEL 1 bre Audio Click OFF Doge 4sec Figure 3 2 AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu 3 4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AG7 Audio Generator module Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency for the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude for the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value You can set the value from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps Audio click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 se
34. A sample structure mode for 3G formats k 3 Only available in 2xHD output mode Figure 3 120 SDI7 module main menu 3 276 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module W From previous page W A V BACK BACK A V SDI7 x x SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD u Enable d ENTER SDI7 x TRIGGER OUTPUT To TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu m System Clock d A V 7 SDI7 x x SECONDARY OUTPUT To SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu e ENTER SDI7 x x DIAGNOSTICS To DIAGNOSTICS submenu ee BACK A y 4 ENTER SDI7 x x CALIBRATION To CALIBRATION submenu BACK J 3036 056 4 Only available in factory mode Figure 3 121 SDI7 module main menu Continued TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 277 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure See page 3 281 SDI7 module STATUS menu OUTPUT MODE Which output modes are available depend on whether Option 3G is enabled or not When Option 3G is not enabled only the SD and HD output modes are available Selects the mapping format of the output signal to Level A direct image format mapping Level B SMPTE 372M dual link mapping as described by SMPTE 425 SD or HD SDI Within Level A and Level B there are also selections for 1920 x 1080 2K x 1080 and 1280 x 720 Level A only formats Also f
35. Modifying a Zone Plate Signal 3 263 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 283 Operating procedure 3 245 OUTPUT MODE submenu 3 281 OVERLAY submenu 3 285 Product description 3 244 Rear panel connectors 2 18 SECONDARY OUTPUT signal selection 3 280 Select sample structure and depth Option 3G only 3 252 Select the output mode 3 251 Select the signal format 3 252 Select the test signal 3 253 Selecting a Zone Plate Signal 3 263 Selecting an output signal 3 249 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index SIGNAL 1A connector 2 18 SIGNAL 1B connector 2 18 SIGNAL 2A connector 2 18 SIGNAL 2B connector 2 18 TIMECODE submenu 3 298 TIMING submenu 3 297 TRIG OUT connector 2 19 TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu 3 309 Using Zone Plate signals 3 274 VIDEO submenu 3 300 Zone Plate Control parameters 3 265 Zone Plate Dependent parameters 3 267 Zone Plate Signals 3 262 SEQUENCE submenu 2 25 Service manual xx Setting Ethernet parameters 2 47 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu 2 36 Signal quality Figures Of Merit FOM 3 104 Standard accessories 1 3 T Test signal buttons 2 2 TG700 module compatibility 1 3 TG800UP PW upgrade 1 5 TIME timecode LED indicator 2 4 Time flow block diagram 3 105 TIME OF DAY submenu GPS7 module 3 130 using Internal mode 3 132 Timecode As related to time flow 3 105 U Upgrades firmware 1 5 hardware 1 5 Index 5 Index USB drive Zone Plate Signals backup
36. Modulated 5 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field NTSC format only 10 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave Black Burst Black Burst with Field Ref MULTIBURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep Chroma Frequency Response MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window Safe Area Monitor Setup PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X OTHER Other FCC Composite FCC Multiburst NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite Matrix 1 SNG Color Bars PAL format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated 10 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave Black Burst Black Burst with No Field Ref Field Square Wave MULTIBURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window Safe Area Monitor Setup Matrix PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar
37. Sin X X OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 UK ITS 1 UK ITS 2 UK 1 Line ITS ITS Matrix 1 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 module main menu Use the ATG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks m Set the text overlay on the SIGNAL output m Set the timing offset on the SIGNAL output m Set the APL settings on the SIGNAL output Set the output parameters for the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 and BARS outputs using the SELECT OUTPUT submenu See page 3 23 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the ATG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button ATG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars ATG7 x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 ATG7 x ID TEXT ATG7 x TIMING ATG7 x APL Figure 3 10 ATG7 module main menu 3036 013 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 21 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module 3 22 STATUS Displays the current video standard and the selected signal for the SIGNAL output SELECT OUTPUT Selects the output whose parameters will be set Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BARS Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the SELECT OUTPUT submenu See page 3 120 ID TEXT Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal
38. TER for menu y GPS7 x BLACK 2 BLA NO Black 2 1 These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to non integer 2 These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to integer 1080 59 94 1080 23 98sf 1080 29 97p 1080 23 98p 720 59 94p YES output only 1080 60i 1080 50i 1080 24sf 1080 30p 1080 25p 1080 24p 720 60p 720 50p 3036 083 3 The CW 10 MHz format selection appears only when the BLACK 3 output is selected When CW 10 MHz is the x selected output format the other menu selections are not available 4 These menu items are available only for non HD formats Figure 3 57 GPS7 module BLACK submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module INPUT OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button configure the BLACK 1 connector as an INPUT or an OUTPUT if allowed This connector is forced to be an input if the TIMING REFERENCE SOURCE is set to a Genlock signal or if VITC is the TIME OF DAY reference NOTE Ifa reference signal is connected to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector you should configure this connector as an input so that the GPS7 module does not output a video signal if the Reference Source is changed to GPS or internal This might occur when using the GPS7 module in a dual configuration where the module is being switched between being a slave via genlo
39. Table 3 8 AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set TIMING SDI OTHER Other FCC Composite FCC Multiburst Matrix 1 NTSC Combination NTC7 Composite SNG Color Bars PAL 1 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multiplus SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 75 Red Field PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TIMING SDI OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 UK ITS 1 UK ITS 2 PAL 2 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Modulated 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Ramp Shallow Ramp Ramp Modulated Pedestal FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Monitor Setup Matrix 100 Red Field 75 Red Field White Window Safe Area
40. The Kg parameter is the initial phase of the pattern it cannot create a pattern by itself To see the effects of this adjustment first set the Kx coefficient to approximately 0 75 and set a waveform monitor to view the line waveform Then adjust Kg The sine wave will begin on each line at the selected point in the cycle Note that 0 25 cycle corresponds to a phase of 90 degrees or 2 2 radians recall that the sine of 90 is 1 0 and the sine of 90 is 1 0 When Kg 0 25 3 174 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Ky parameter Display name KXT T Ch H Freq Units c aph per second c aph s The Kxr T Ch H Freq parameter controls the change in horizontal sine frequency over time Setting Kxr to 1 0 for example causes the horizontal frequency to increase by one c aph each second If Kx is 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal will flip by 180 the sine wave will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC when the cycle will begin again Ky parameter Display name KYT V Ch V Freq Units c aph per second c aph s The Kyr V Ch V Freq parameter controls the change in vertical sine frequency over time Setting Kyr to 1 0 for example cau
41. These patterns are color independent so they will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces Since the range of valid levels is not evenly divisible by 5 or 10 steps the first and last bars slightly exceed the valid range but are still well within legal limits For example the valid range for 10 bit YCbCr formats is from 64 940 for the Y channel 876 steps and from 64 960 for the Cb Cr channels 896 steps Therefore the level of the first bar is 62 and the level of the last bar is 942 962 which results in equal step sizes across the pattern The Valid Ramp is a matrix of three different ramps designed to test the video component channels for YCbCr and for gamut range testing in all color spaces These three ramps are also available as individual patterns that span the picture width First the Y Valid Ramp spans from black to white across the valid range of the luminance Y channel Next the B Y Valid Ramp spans from yellow to cyan across the valid range of the Cb color difference channel Last the R Y Valid Ramp spans from cyan to red across the valid range of the Cr color difference channel 3 Channel Ramp Wide ramp from the lower valid value to the upper valid value for all three channels This pattern is color independent so it will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level black and at the valid level Limit Ramp
42. Up to 32 channels of 24 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz AV Timing mode Timing adjustment anywhere in the frame for the output The clock resolution is 6 75 ns 1 148 5 MHz for fast progressive signals 50p 59 94p and 60p Clock resolution for other signals is 13 5 ns Timecode generator with ATC LTC or ATC VITC Full remote control using Ethernet interface SMPTE 352M payload identifier User defined ancillary data packet TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 151 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module How to operate the HD3G7 module 3 152 After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display a After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu appears as shown below HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 ai Select the frame rate using the FOR
43. Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 line to 1 line in one clock steps 18 5 ns for NTSC or PAL 13 5 ns for HDTV Table 3 15 Timing adjustment ranges for BG7 output signals Format name Vertical line settings Horizontal time settings ps NTSC NTSC J 525 63 5556 PAL 1250 64 0000 1080 60i 562 29 6296 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 1080 50i 562 35 5556 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 1080 30p 562 29 6296 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 1080 25p 562 35 5556 1080 24p 562 37 0370 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 720 60p 375 22 2222 720 59 94p 375 22 2444 720 50p 375 26 6667 3 70 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 Black Generator module BG7 module Use this submenu to set timecode parameters for the selected output This menu is TIMECODE submenu present only if GPS7 module is installed GPS7 module only NOTE To display the TIMECODE submenu the BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed This submenu is available only when NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL is the selected signal format This submenu is not available when the selected signal format is HD SYNC Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMEC
44. Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 57 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 3 58 Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on the display Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Disable Status Enable Enable AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE y X Position 0 0 APH Set the horizontal position AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 32 AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position
45. Use the up A or down V arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu If desired use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the parameter NOTE Press the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to reset any parameter to its default value If you adjust any one of the dependent parameters individually the pattern control parameter will become invalid and you will see this message 1970 248 The zone plate dependent parameters are discussed here in the order in which they appear below the pattern control parameter when using the down arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu The Custom 1 and Custom 2 signal selections do not have pattern control parameters and start with the Zone Plate Amplitude Parameter Display name ZP Amplitude Units mV Use this parameter to adjust the zone plate signal amplitude from 0 0 mV to 798 0 mV in 0 5 mV increments The default value is 700 mV TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 267 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Kx parameter 3 268 Display name KX H Freq Units cycles active picture height c aph Kx denotes the initial constant horizontal frequency of the pattern To see the effects of changing this coefficient set a waveform monitor to view the video lines Note that the units are cycles per active picture height The number of cycles in a line will depend on the width
46. When the HDLG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 97 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Test signal buttons eAMaM TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL voou S enter ears near Fuarrio muterst sweer emae 9 0 monrtor purse TIMING so omer Y form CF w Ce CMe Figure 3 97 Front panel test signal buttons You can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 211 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module 3 212 The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to output HD test signals The table also lists the native YCbCr or RGB test signals that c
47. arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices PROGRAM TIME Uses the program time counter as the timecode m TIME OF DAY Uses the time of day as determined by the GPS7 module This selection is available only if a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument Press ENTER to apply initial time Press the Enter button to apply the initial time Initial time is set in the next menu item This selection is available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed it controls this function Initial Time Use this menu selection to set the Initial Time Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adjust the time Press the ENTER button to confirm the time This selection is available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed it controls this function Offset Use this menu selection to set a Timecode Offset for the HD3G7 module outputs This is an offset from the timecode input from a GPS7 module Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right P arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adjust the offset Press the ENTER button to confirm the offset This selection is available only when a GPS7 modul
48. ccc cc ccc ce cence cece eeeeeaeeeenes 3 146 Front panel test signal buttons 0 0 cece cece ene ence eee ence eee ene e eee e een neta es 3 158 Optical zone plates enlarged 0 ccc cece cee eee sesers eee e eee eee ees 3 165 A Keny ZONE plates ee cuiri e e e ERE EEA era aden see haces aoa Ae 3 171 A Klony zone plateserien eredue p n E a pa ae G 3 172 A Ky only zone plateren re eee Rene a A E T AAE T R T a 3 173 AS Ky only Zone plateserien a E aul a TA OES 3 174 HD3G7 module mainmenu rie e ccc cece cece cece AAAA A KUE AAE EAA ECEN 3 179 vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 83 HD3G7 module main menu Continued sssssssssressssssrerressssrsrerresssssree 3 180 Figure 3 84 HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene es 3 183 Figure 3 85 HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu 0 0 ccc cece eee ee eee eeeeeeeeenees 3 184 Figure 3 86 HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ceceee eee eneeneeeeeeaees 3 185 Figure 3 87 HD3G7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu ceceeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 186 Figure 3 88 HD3G7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 0 20 eeeee eee eeeeneeeeeeaees 3 187 Figure 3 89 HD3G7 module TIMING submenu c cece cece ence eee eee eee eeeeneeeaeenees 3 189 Figure 3 90 HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu ccceeceece eee eceee eee eeeeeeeeneenees 3 190 Figure 3 91 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu
49. source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined by the time of day menu selection See page 3 130 Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the HDVG7 module OFFSET Use this menu item to set a time offset for the HDVG7 module outputs from the timecode input from the GPS7 module You can enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 from the selected time source hours minutes seconds video frames Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component Y Pb or Pr on or off VIDEO submenu individually and to turn the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu HOVGT TN VIDEO lt D oF HONG _ VIDEO lt gt ON ON G oF HDVG7 Ss VI
50. the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel s of the four output channels TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 module TIMING submenu DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu DVG7 x TIMING Vertcal 0 Line s 1 gt Set the vertical timing DVG7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 sec 1 gt Set the horizontal timing 1970 191 Figure 3 50 DVG7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value within 1 2 frame for 525 270 and 625 270 formats Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock 37 0 ns for 525 270 and 625 270 formats steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 91 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module VIDEO sub
51. the fan fault alarm will retrigger if the fan fault condition still exists and the front panel buttons will be disabled again In this case you should disconnect the AC power source and contact Tektronix to obtain repair service TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 21 Operating basics Mainframe menus Main menu When you power on the TG8000 and the initializing process for all of the installed module is completed the top menu item of the mainframe main menu appears on the LCD display The mainframe main menu allows you to access submenus to set the various system settings The following figure shows the mainframe main menu Press the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the available menu selections in the main menu Power on the TG8000 mainframe V A V A V To PRESET submenu To SEQUENCE submenu To FRAME RESET STATUS submenu To UTILITY submenu 3036 003 Figure 2 17 Mainframe main menu 2 22 PRESET Recalls instrument settings saved as a preset or saves the current instrument settings as a preset When you select this menu item and then press the ENTER button you access the PRESET submenu See page 2 23 SEQUENCE Selects and executes a sequence program loaded into the TG8000 Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the SEQUENCE submenu See page 2 25 FRAME RESET STATUS Displays the status of the frame reset signals
52. x TIMING AWVG7 x VIDEO V Figure 3 27 AWVG7 module main menu MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 53 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 54 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 59 VIDEO Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signal when a GBR signal is being output and enables or disables the signal output from CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 61 AWVG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up down MOVING PICTURE left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll the submenu menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Samp
53. 1 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only E BLACK 2 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only NOTE The SIGNAL I and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal and the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module is equipped with four BNC connectors and one 15 pin D sub connector as described below See Figure 2 12 27 POWER O T P i ANTENNA LTC GPI BLACK 3 10MHz BLACK 2 BLACK 1 REF IN 1970 180 Figure 2 12 GPS7 module connectors TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics ANTENNA Input connector for a GPS antenna The antenna input must meet specific requirements See page 3 102 GPS antenna requirements You can use the GPS7 module menu to enable this connector to provide 3 3 V or 5 V DC power to the antenna When the connector is configured to provide power to the antenna the rear panel POWER indicator lights as follows Blinks green to indicate an open circuit This occurs if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted A shorted antenna will not damage the GPS7 module If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but will still pass through the RF signal which will allow the GPS to funct
54. 10 Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears 11 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector 12 Check that the signal appears as expected GPS7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and check Timecode module is functional NOTE Depending on which other modules are present and what formats they generate you may get a clock conflict message If this occurs press the ENTER button to accept the change and continue the test This may happen at multiple steps in one or several of the functional tests Required equipment GPS antenna feed with good signal level SDI video signal source can be external or a DVG7 or HDVG7 module in either a reference instrument or the mainframe under test m NTSC black source can be a second TG8000 or TG700 mainframe with a BG7 or GPS7 module WFM8300 or equivalent with Option CPS Voltmeter m LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable Tektronix part number 012 1717 XX m Female XLR connector three wires and one 9 pin DSUB male header with solder cups assembled as described in the LTC Output test TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 25 Getting started 1 26 m BNC to banana plug adapter m 2 75 Q coaxial terminators Tektronix part number 011 0163 XX
55. 10 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal 11 Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bars signal in step 7 check that the color bars signal appears BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs 12 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL connector and then connect it to the BLACK 1 connector 13 Press the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT from the main menu 14 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 1 15 Press the front panel ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears ATG x BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC 16 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC or PAL 17 Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu shown below appears ATG7 x BLACK 1 SELECT SIGNAL Black Burst TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 19 Getting started AVG7 module functional 1 20 check 18 19 20 21 22 23 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black Burst Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2 connector Press the front panel BACK button twice to return to the main menu Repeat steps 14 through 20 to check the BLACK 2 output BARS output
56. 1080 and 2K 1556 formats 2K GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits NOTE When the 1080 50p 1080 59 94p or 1080 60p format is selected the HDLG7 module forces the sampling structure to 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits and no other sampling structure is allowed Selecting Projector Test Pattern while the format is 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 will limit the sampling structure depth to 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits If the current output format is 1080 23 98sF 1080 24sF 1080 23 98p 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 29 97p 1080 30p 1080 50i 1080 59 94i or 1080 60i you may select 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits as the sampling structure However the output signals produced on Link A and Link B are not dual link signals The HDLG7 module will produce two single link outputs with incoming ancillary and embedded audio being placed on Link A and none on Link B ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Sets the alpha channel signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Use Y G Channel 0 Flat Field 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field or 100 Flat Field The alpha channel data are used only with the following sampling structures 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits and 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits LINK OFFSET Sets the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link A output Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to
57. 141 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to configure the LTC outputs Use the up A or down arrow LTC submenu button to change the menu items The following figure shows the LTC submenu Select SELECT LTC in the main menu Output if allowed REF IN and lt D Input LTC 1 only 23 98fps 24fps lt 1 gt 25tps 30fps 30fps drop frame Disable lt gt Time of Day Program Time 1 gt Edit offset BACK V To LTC TIMING submenu GPS7 x LTC x OUTPUT LE Edit level Level 5 0 Volt lt gt VEL Vv 3036 038 Figure 3 71 GPS7 module LTC submenu INPUT OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the function of LTC1 to INPUT or OUTPUT if allowed When LTC is selected as the time of day reference LTC1 is forced to be an input NOTE This selection is not available on earlier GPS7 modules that do not have the REF IN input connector 3 142 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module TYPE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the following LTC output signal formats Table 3 23 GPS7 module LTC output signal formats Format Rate Delay range 23 98 24 fps at 23 98 Hz rate 20 85 ms 24 24 fps at 24 Hz rate 20 83 ms 25 25 fps at 25 Hz rate 20 00 ms 30 30 fps at 30 Hz rate 16 67 ms 30 DF 30 fps drop frame
58. 240 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module FORMAT Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select from the signal formats in the following table Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock will occur Table 3 46 HDVG7 module output signal formats Non integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 Integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 1080 59 94i 1080 60i 1080 23 98sf 1080 50i 1080 29 97p 1080 24sf 1080 23 98p 1080 30p 1035 59 94i 1080 25p 720 59 94p 1080 24p 720 29 97p 1035 60i 720 23 98p 720 60p 720 50p 720 30p 720 25p 720 24p 1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting non integer or integer which is set using the HD Rate selection in the HDVG7 module main menu See page 3 225 HDVG7 module main menu SIGNAL Selects the serial digital black signal to output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Black serial digital black 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field and 100 Flat Field Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital black signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any
59. 6 8 of SMPTE SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 Window White square centered on a black background This pattern can be used as an alternative to a full field white pattern when it is desirable for the average picture level APL to approximate normal program content Production Aperture Includes single pixel wide lines at the extreme edges of the active video area marking the complete production aperture Vertical lines are implemented as single sample pulses with no edge filtering so this pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal Clean Aperture Grid pattern per SMPTE RP 187 1995 The clean aperture is marked by the outer markers with overscan markers at approximate 2 5 increments The center 4 3 section of a 16 9 image has an additional set of aperture and overscan markers Each line on the grid is implemented with two horizontal lines or a double width pulse centered on two samples because the actual aperture boundary and the center of the image each lie midway between lines and samples Convergence Grid pattern of equal size squares with a dot at the center of each square Each line and dot is implemented as a single horizontal line or single sample pulse This pattern is used to verify convergence of RGB channels and no color fringing should be visible on the white lines and dots when the channels are aligned TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 257 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator modu
60. A shorted antenna will not damage the GPS7 module If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but still pass through the RF signal which would allow the GPS to function Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the nominal range POSITION Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Fixed or Mobile The Fixed and Mobile settings define how the GPS receiver calculates the time and position information In fixed mode an averaged position is stored in flash memory and only the time is calculated each second This provides greater stability of the time information and allows operation with fewer satellites This mode is well suited to broadcast type installations where the antenna and mainframe do not move Mobile mode recalculates both the position and time each second This allows for compensation of velocity and acceleration so the frequency and timing information stay correct while moving at the expense of some stability This mode is required if the antenna and mainframe are moving For applications where the position changes occasionally but where the antenna and unit are not moving then either mode may be applicable Mobile mode may boot up faster since it does not need to average 60 fixes to establish a fixed location However fixed mode can run with fewer satellites once the position is stored ACQUIRE POSITION Press the ENTER button to erase the saved positio
61. AES EBU audio pairs of serial digital audio outputs with 24 or 20 bits resolution m Adjustable frequencies amplitudes and audio clicks in every channel E Silence and 48 kHz clock word clock outputs Full remote control using Ethernet interface The module also supports the following audio frequencies Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4800 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 4000 Hz 5000 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1200 Hz 6000 Hz 20000 Hz 400 Hz 1500 Hz 1600 Hz TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 1 AG7 Audio Generator module How to operate the AG7 module 3 2 After the AG7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display ag After the initialization process the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AG7 module main menu appears as shown below AG7 x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Channel 1 5 Use the front pan
62. Active Frequency 1000 Amplitude 20 dBFS Audio Click OFF Channel Origin A1 1 through A4 4 Sampling Frame TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us Relative To Serial 0H TIMECODE Source Program Time 30 Drop Frame Enable ATC LTC OFF ATC VITC OFF TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 205 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 206 Table 3 39 HD3G7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings VIDEO Y ON Cb ON Cr ON Edge Filter Enable AV Timing Mode OFF ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable Parity Automatic DID 0x101 SDID 0x200 DC 0x101 UDW 0x200 CS 0x200 Auto Calculate CS Enable Line 9 Field 1 Line 9 Field 2 Line 9 Start Sample 1928 Video Channel Luma Link Location Link A Stream Location HS Stream 1 SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable TRIGGER OUTPUT System Clock SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module HDLG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 16 HDLG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
63. CIRCLE submenu 3 42 Factory default settings 3 47 Functional checks 1 20 ID TEXT submenu 3 40 LOGO submenu 3 39 Main menu 3 36 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 37 Operating procedure 3 30 OVERLAY submenu 3 37 3 38 Product description 3 29 Rear panel connectors 2 10 TIMING submenu 3 37 3 43 VIDEO submenu 3 37 3 44 AWVG7 CH 1 connector 2 11 CH 2 connector 2 11 CH 3 connector 2 11 CIRCLE submenu 3 58 Factory default settings 3 62 Functional checks 1 22 ID TEXT submenu 3 56 LOGO submenu 3 55 Main menu 3 52 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 53 Operating procedure 3 49 OVERLAY submenu 3 53 3 54 Product description 3 48 Rear panel connectors 2 11 TIMING submenu 3 53 3 59 VIDEO submenu 3 53 3 61 Index 2 B Backup presets and user data 2 63 Beeper control 2 30 BG7 BLACK 1 connector 2 11 BLACK 2 connector 2 11 BLACK 3 connector 2 11 BLACK 4 connector 2 11 BLACK submenu 3 66 Factory default settings 3 74 Functional checks 1 23 Main menu 3 65 Operating procedure 3 64 Product description 3 63 Rear panel connectors 2 11 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 65 TIMECODE submenu 3 71 TIMING submenu 3 69 Black Generator See BG7 C CAL OVEN submenu 2 46 Calibration Gain 3 100 internal oscillator frequency 2 46 Internal oscillator frequency 3 100 Character set installation 3 289 Cleaning 2 67 Exterior 2 68 Configuration GPS7 module 3 100 hardware installa
64. Each pair of connectors CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 output the same signal CH 1 Outputs the selected analog component video signal CH 2 Outputs the selected analog component video signal CH3 Outputs the selected analog component video signal BG7 module connectors The BG7 Black Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 BG7 module connectors BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal BLACK 3 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color bars signal BLACK 4 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal output Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color bars signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 11 Operating basics DVG7 module connectors GPS7 module connectors The standard DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC connectors to output serial digital video signals Option BK adds two additional BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals See Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 DVG7 module connectors Option BK E SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal E SIGNAL 2 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal BLACK
65. FRAME RESET STATUS submenu See page 2 26 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu 2 20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics Fan fault alarm CAUTION If the fan on the rear panel stops operating properly the internal components of the instrument could be damaged due to overheating To prevent this damage disconnect the power cable from the AC power source The TG8000 displays the following warning message if the fan on the rear panel stops operating properly If this warning message appears disconnect the power cable from the AC voltage line and contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative FAN FAULT ALARM Main Cooling Fan Press Enable 3036 076 When the warning message appears the LCD backlight flashes on and off and the front panel buttons are disabled If the beeper is enabled in the UTILITY submenu the instrument will beep periodically for the duration of a fan fault condition See page 2 27 UTILITY submenu If the GPI Alarm Output is enabled and the GPI Fan Fault alarm is enabled the GPI interface triggers a ground closure when a fan fault is detected You can operate the buttons temporarily for approximately 30 seconds by pressing the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button until the button illuminates During the 30 seconds you can use the UTILITY menu to view the diagnostics to see if there are additional hardware failures such as voltages and temperatures After 30 seconds
66. Flex0 Unik Flex1 Lock HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS DDS STATUS DDSO Phase Lock DDS Phase Lock HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS CRC ERRORS Y 0 YANC 0 C 0 CANC 0 HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS CLEAR CRC ERRS Press Enter to Clear CRC errors HD3G x DIAGNOSTICS TEMPERATURES Board Temp 44C FPGA Temp 46 C HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS FPGA VERSION Current 3 6 Expected 3 6 Ok y HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 1 1 2V 1 2V OK 1 2A 1 2V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 2 3 3V 3 4V OK 3 3VA 3 1V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 3 1 5V 1 6V OK 3 0VA 3 1V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 4 1 8V 1 9V OK Dref 1 0V Ok 1970 226 Figure 3 96 HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module PLL STATUS This diagnostic displays the following m Jit Indicates the condition of the jitter attenuator used to clean up the clock recovered from the input signal The condition can be reported as Lock locked or Unlk unlocked This diagnostic readout is only valid and significant when in converter mode If in converter mode it should read locked If not there may be a problem with the input signal or the module Flex0 This circuit is not used so the readout may show locked or unlocked The state has no bearing on instrument operation m Flex Indicates the state of the
67. GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module OFFSET Use this selection to set the DST offset that will be applied when either the ONCE event or the DST START event occurs at the user scheduled time Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the DST offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM When the DST Schedule function is set to RECURRING this offset can only be a positive number After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change ONCE This selection appears only when you set DST Schedule function to OFF or ONCE Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the DST setup value to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form YY YY MM DD HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE When the DST Once event occurs the scheduled offset will be either added to or subtracted from the time zone offset and the DST schedule will be cleared
68. Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Status Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1 2 3 or 4 Select any audio channel and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu See page 3 235 Emphasis Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select NO EMPHASIS CD or CCITT Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Sampling Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Frame Frame without Frame Number or Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between 24 bits and 20 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection HDVG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the embedded AUDIO CHANNEL audio signal for the selected audio channel Use the up A or down arrow submenu button to scroll through the menu The followi
69. GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart Note that cyan patch 18 cannot be reproduced properly in the RGB and XYZ color spaces because the red component lies at approximately 14 which exceeds legal limits for RGB formats This patch will appear as a cyan and black checkerboard pattern where the cyan patches are of a different hue than the full cyan patch as seen in YCbCr formats because the red component is clipped at 0 The color values used from SMPTE 303M are those with respect to the Des illuminant Black White Step Scale Black Dark Gray Step Scale Gray scale patterns per 6 9 of SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 A series of ten different monochrome patches at increasing luminance values is centered on a gray background to verify gray scale tracking The ten steps of the black to white scale are normalized gamma corrected values of 1 10 to 1 and the ten steps of the black to dark gray scale are 1 31 to 10 31 Pluge and Luma Reference Includes two elements to assist in black and white balance The left side of the pattern contains a pluge pattern with three vertical bars of 2 0 and 2 black The right side of the pattern contains four gray boxes corresponding to luminance levels of 110 mV 200 mV 450 mV and 700 mV 100 white in the analog domain The 2 patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0 black for XYZ formats Checkerboard 4x4 grid of alternating black and white patches used to measure intra frame contrast per
70. Inactive and Mute Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection m Frequency Use this menu to set the frequency of the Embedded Audio signal from 10 0 Hz to 20 kHz in steps of 0 5 Hz Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode then use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button again to confirm the new frequency TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 187 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Amplitude Use this menu to set the audio amplitude from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in steps of 1 dBFS Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the amplitude and then press the ENTER button to confirm it m Audio Click Use this menu to set the audio click rate to one click every one two three or four seconds or turn the click off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the click rate and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Origin Use this menu to set a channel origin ID of up to four ASCII characters Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the ID Press the ENTER button to confirm the Channel Origin ID Sampling Use this menu to set the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group s Audio Contr
71. LEDs indicate the status of the reference signal used to time signals The states of the INT and EXT indicators depend on whether a timing module is installed in the mainframe The following table shows the states of the LEDs for the different mainframe reference signal configurations Table 2 1 States of the INT and EXT reference indicators GPS7 module installed AGL7 module installed No timing module installed EXT INT EXT INT EXT INT Reference LED LED LED LED LED LED source Status state state Status state state Status state state Internal Good off Solid Good off Solid Good off Solid green green green Internal Warming up off Blinking Warming up Off Blinking Warming Off Blinking green green up green GPS Good Solid Off NA Off Off NA Off Off green GPS FOM not Solid Off NA Off Off NA Off Off reach to amber GPO Signal warning GPS GPO Loss Solid Solid NA Off Off NA Off Off of Lock red green Genlock Good Solid off Good Solid off NA off off green green Genlock Near Loss Solid off Near Loss Solid off NA off off lof Genlock amber of Genlock amber Genlock No Solid Solid Loss of Solid Solid NA Off Off Genlock red green Lock red green Detected TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 3 Operating basics TIME timecode LED indicator The TIME timecode LED indicates the status of the timecode function The state of the TIME LED depends on whether a GPS7 mod
72. Level B Option 3G only This is an alternate way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 A Level B stream looks similar to dual link as defined in SMPTE 372M The serial data is constructed by interleaving the two links of the dual link video signal As a result some formats will have the serial data take two lines worth of time to propagate This has implications for the effects of the pathological signals and can confuse the definition of timing adjustments Refer to the SMPTE 372M and SMPTE 425 standards for more information 2K x 1080 Option 3G only Available in both Level A and Level B mapping this selection provides 2048 x 1080 resolution signals primarily for digital cinema applications 2xHD Option 3G only Available in Level B mapping 2xHD signals provide two standard SMPTE 292 HD streams in the same format for example 10801 59 94 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal MOVING PICTURE up down or left right or randomly when in generator mode Use the up A or submenu down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu shown below Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu SDI x x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s 1 gt Set
73. MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select GPS SETUP c Press the ENTER button d Use the up A or down arrow button to select Antenna Power e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 3 3 V f Press the ENTER button Check that the voltmeter shows between 3 3 V and 4 V Use the left lt 4 arrow to set the antenna voltage to 5 V Press the ENTER button Check that the voltmeter shows between 5 V and 6 V Antenna current and fault thresholds 1 2 3 Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter Connect the BNC T to the adapter Set the antenna power to 5 V Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select GPS SETUP c Press the ENTER button d Use the up A or down arrow button to select Antenna Power e Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select 5 V f Press the ENTER button Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the module Check that the LED located between the DSUB connector and the antenna input on the rear panel of the module is flashing green Green indicates an open circuit Apply a 75 Q terminator to the BNC T and check that the voltage is between 4 5 V and 5 V Check that the LED on the module back panel is a steady green This indicates
74. Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 Analog Test Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the ATG7 Analog Test Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module ATG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 10 ATG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 18 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module ATG7 module product description The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is an analog test signal generator that provides NTSC PAL analog composite signals The ATG7 module provides the following features m SIGNAL output connector which outputs test signals selected from the front panel test signal buttons You can overlay ID text on this video signal output BARS output connector which outputs NTSC with or without setup and PAL color bars signals black burst signals and other video test signals You can overlay ID text on this video signal output BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 output connectors which output NTSC with or without setup and PAL black burst signals composite
75. N EEE E E TN 1 1 PrOdUCt CESCTIPHON sie ac ccdugs ved cage ES e EEEE EEEE EEEE EE S EA ENGE ES 1 1 ACCOSSOMIGS eneco caine chide ota deamon vase bac es needa eelanas b E dbase dented vabuibel is Gewneeameus tine 1 3 Options and upgrades o 5cc cccvencdsias nnseccaaad pddeedssaneddeeccasauws oceddsdaeadecesdes densivesagaenns 1 4 Initial product MSPectiON si s4 064 cage ve vee saea sends enwdy rede Ea EENE EEE EE oeedaued sananeguue eels 1 5 To install the mainframe sorsi sc0 lt e2004s boca baeees renee cones diainsdeu ss eGuleneceeud E E E EET toa 1 5 Module installation and removal 0 0 ccc e ccc eee eee cent n nee eee e nee settee eee nes 1 10 Functional Check issiessasaiscusasee ova ues anaa aE AE a NE E eae tiigaeaw shes KESEN 1 15 Operating basics Operating basics access euene ecdediaanicee eis tod raceetolaswhededentoanneenediaaeseea svidand ee cedotsaamseeeterten 2 1 Front panel COmtrol Svc ccanns sancnueewdieeretiidamernnsac viens veaeiclndlbienees ene dunuaierrnddedbderenmenacactuciends 2 1 Rear panel CONMECtOTS dsic c 0546 cs sadeanbidianded gal doradanatobGnaindaulhidcanwewdedbacaddded theoksheantabded 2 6 Frame reset signals 2 03 cctdsueahe ue vane san a camtesdouad couse gene cud vertandex Otasaaneaieenees 2 20 Fan fault alarm c wecevcncaseenenineannnenseaadanint ounainneun tend deans EEE EE EEE SS 2 21 Mainframe Menuis i0 s cccadhiasacansensbndsngdadduhsctasaduiid hetaddoahhidaseawenibeaiadites ahuzanaentes s 2 22
76. PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TIMING SDI a OTHER Other ITS Matrix 1 UK 1 Line ITS 525 Beta format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Valid 5 Step TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module Table 3 8 AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Chroma Noise PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar TPulses TIMING Timing 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie SDI OTHER Other Test Matrix 525 GBR format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Shallow Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Luminance Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Line Sweep 5 5 MHz 100 Line Sweep 8 MHz MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window 2 Level P
77. RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 157 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line 3G fast progressive format 1080 line e YCbCr 422 10b 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b YCbCr 444 10b RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2xHD formats 1080 and 720 line e YCbCr 422 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB 444 12b HD format YCbCr 422 10b When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it To select the test signalon All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the the HD3G7 module corresponding test signal buttons See Table 3 37 When the HD3G7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 76 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A C D TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE ENTER Bars LINEAR FLATFLO murersr f sweep Q 0 MoNiToR PULSE TIMING so omer Y
78. Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu See page 2 26 Refer to Frame Reset Signals for detailed information about the frame reset signals See page 2 20 UTILITY Sets the system related settings such as network parameters signal sets assignment to the front panel test signal buttons and enabling options Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu See page 2 27 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics PRESET submenu Use this menu to recall instrument settings saved as a preset or save the current instrument settings to a preset Use the up lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the menu items See Figure 2 18 The following three presets are named at the factory and can be used for your own application Power On Default Use this preset to save instrument settings that you want automatically loaded when the TG8000 powers on If one of the seven presets is selected in the mainframe GPI General Purpose Interface that preset takes precedence over this Power On Default preset You cannot assign this preset name to another preset NOTE If you want to save network parameters to a preset use the Power On Default preset User Default Use this preset to save user specified default settings If you save new instrument settings in this preset a confirmation message appears to prevent ove
79. Set the line number Figure 3 61 GPS7 module VITC submenu OUTPUT Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a VITC on the selected line Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Line number Use this menu item to select the video line on which the selected VITC signal will be inserted Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the video line number For NTSC you can select lines from line 10 to 20 lines 14 and 16 are recommended For PAL you can select lines between 6 and 22 lines 19 and 21 are recommended Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 127 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to set the GPS operating parameters and set the level at which a GPS SETUP submenu warning message will be generated if the GPS signal quality deteriorates Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the GPS SETUP submenu Select GPS SETUP in the main menu A V OFF GPS7 x GPS SETUP ANTENNA POWER lt gt 33 Volt OFF 5 Volt A GPS7 x GPS SETUP POSITION Fixed GPS7 x GPS SETUP ACQUIRE POSITION Press ENTER to reacquire Fixed pos y GPS7 x GPS SETUP SIGNAL WARNING 0 No Signal V 1970 204 A Fixed lt I Mobile ENTER z Rea
80. TERMS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE THE UNUSED PROGRAM AND ANY ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION SHOULD BE RETURNED PROMPTLY TO TEKTRONIX FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE LICENSE FEE PAID FOR INFORMATION REGARDING THE RETURN OF PROGRAMS ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN EQUIPMENT CONTACT THE NEAREST TEKTRONIX SALES OFFICE DEFINITIONS Tektronix means Tektronix Inc an Oregon corporation or local Tektronix legal entity that is supplying the equipment Program means the Tektronix software product executable program and or data enclosed with this Agreement or included within the equipment with which this Agreement is packed Customer means the person or organization in whose name the Program was ordered LICENSE Customer may 1 Use the Program on a single machine at any one time 2 Ifthe Program is provided in connection with a floating user license the Program may be used on multiple machines provided that the user is authorized and the total number of users at any one time does not exceed the total number of licensed concurrent users 3 Modify the Program or merge it with another for use on the single machine and 4 Copy the Program for archival or backup purposes provided that no more than one 1 such copy is permitted to exist at any one time If the Program is provided in connection with a floating user license the Program may be copied onto multiple machines for use by authorized users Each copy of the Program made by Cu
81. TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module CONFIGURATION Sets the configuration of the output channels Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite and CH1 2 3 Composites When you select CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite a Y signal C signal and composite signal are output from the CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors respectively When you select CH1 2 3 Composites a composite signal is output from each output connector Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu item appears only when a composite signal is being output GBR SYNC Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal and R signal when a GBR signal is being output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Syne ON Green and Sync ON All Channels When you select Sync ON All Channels a sync signal is multiplexed with the G B and R signals Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu item appears only when a GBR signal is being output G Y Turns the CH 1 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the
82. TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 263 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 264 3 When the desired zone plate signal is displayed press the ENTER button to enter the zone plate parameter menu If Circle Zoneplate was displayed for example the display changes to SDI x x ZONE PLATE CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency x c aph 1970 307 which shows the zone plate signal CIRCLE SWEEP and the pattern control parameter Circle Frequency As mentioned earlier each of the standard zone plate signals have a pattern control parameter that is unique to that signal Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Circle Circle frequency x c aph 1 Diagonal Diag Frequency x c aph 1 H Sine Horiz Frequency x MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency x MHz V Sine Vert Frequency x c aph 1 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency x c aph 1 1 c aph cycles per active picture height 4 While the pattern control parameter is displayed you can use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to modify it This will modify the signal while maintaining the basic pattern NOTE Press the left 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to reset any parameter 5 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the parameters menu which for the predefined signals starts with it s unique pattern control parameter as shown in the table above and then continues through the list
83. TIME submenu 3 136 Use this menu to set the initial value for the Program Time counter The following figure shows the PROGRAM TIME submenu Select PROGRAM TIME menu in the main menu GPS7 x TIME SETUP PROG TIME APPLY Press ENTER to apply initial time GPS7 x TIME SETUP PROG TIME SETUP DS ON Initial Time 00 00 lt j gt Edittime V Applies initial time Figure 3 66 GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu APPLY Press the ENTER button to immediately apply the initial program time entered in the SETUP parameter below SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Program Time counter to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to set parameters for the Jam Sync function Use the function to JAM SYNC submenu immediately synchronize the module timecode with the selected time source for each output or to regularly schedule a synchronization Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the JAM SYNC submenu Sel
84. Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 61 Operating basics 2 62 14 Unmount the USB drive a c Press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB lt status gt The USB status should be Mounted Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive After the message You may now safely remove the USB drive is displayed the menu readout should change to TG8000 UTILITY USB Not mounted Remove the USB drive from the instrument 15 If your TG8000 includes an HDLG7 module proceed with the following steps to complete the upgrade CAUTION While upgrading do not press the front panel buttons or cycle the instrument power Doing so can corrupt the module memory and FPGA image Power on the TG8000 Press the MODULE button until the name of the HDLG7 module you are upgrading appears Press and hold the ENTER button until Upgrade FPGA appears Press the ENTER button to upgrade the module The upgrade will take approximately three minutes After it is complete remove power from the TG8000 and then reapply power to reboot the system NOTE Ifyou are upgrading the FPGA of multiple HDLG7 modules you need to upgrade them separately and reboot the instrument after each upgrade For example if you have three HDLG7s the FPGA upgrade process sequence will be select and upgrade a module then reboot then select and upgrade another module then reboot select and upgrade the final
85. The modules are either signal generators or they provide special functions such as genlock capability Key features The TG8000 and the available modules provide the following features Simultaneous generation of HDTV SDTV synchronization signals and test signals in a variety of formats Modular architecture with up to four generators or special function modules Analog genlock function dealing with NTSC or PAL black burst signal HDTV trilevel sync signal and CW signals AGL7 Synchronization with the GPS timing signal GPS7 Timecode generator with VITC GPS7 and BG7 with LTC GPS7 and with ATC HDVG7 when a GPS7 module is installed Timecode generator with ATC HD3G7 and SDI7 with or without a GPS7 module Dual link SDI generator and converter HDLG7 3 Gb s SDI video generator HD3G7 and SDI7 with Option 3G 3 Gb s SDI video converter HD3G7 Independent setting of amplitudes frequencies and audio clicks of 16 channel embedded audio signal DVG7 and HDVG7 Independent setting of amplitudes frequencies and audio clicks of embedded audio signal up to 32 channels HD3G7 and SDI7 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 1 Getting started Contents of the TG8000 and TG700 Software Library and Documentation DVD Circle logo and text overlays on test signals AVG7 AWVG7 DVG7 HDVG7 SDI7 Zone plate signals HD3G7 and SDI7 Moving picture generation function by scrolling the active are
86. This allows for a new schedule to be set up for any time in the future NOTE VITC may have DST shift already applied To avoid duplicating DST shifts disable the DST SCHEDULER if the time of day reference has DST applied RECUR There are two Recurring selections DST Start and DST End These selections appear only when you set the DST Schedule function to OFF or RECURRING The DST Start time is the time when the DST offset you enter will be added to the time zone offset The DST End time is the time when the DST offset will be removed The DST Start and DST End times are edited in the same manner Press the Enter button and then use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select a digit in the DST START or DST END value to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form Week Day Month HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time For example if you enter First Sun Mar 02 00 00 for the DST Start time the DST offset you entered would be added to the time zone offset on the first Sunday in March at 2 AM The Week field can be set to the First Second Third Fourth or Last Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 135 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module PROGRAM
87. This menu item appears only when a GBR signal is being output CH1 Turns the CH 1 signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component CH 2 Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 61 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module CH 3 Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component AWVG7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the AWVG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 12 AWVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings
88. VITC menu items are present only when a GPS7 module is also installed in the mainframe TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 Digital Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module DVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 12 DVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 24 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module DVG7 module product description The DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is a digital video generator that provides NTSC composite digital signals and 525 625 component digital signals The module provides the following features Two serial digital video outputs Two serial digital black outputs Option BK only Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal Moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output signal Up to 16 channels of 24 or 20 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG8000
89. VITC on the selected line Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Line number Use this menu item to select the video line on which the VITC signal will be inserted Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the video line number The line number range varies by format you can select from line 10 to line 20 for NTSC and from line 6 through line 22 for PAL Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 73 BG7 Black Generator module BG7 module factory default settings 3 74 The following table shows the factory default settings for the BG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 16 BG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings OUTPUT BLACK 1 to BLACK 4 Format NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT HD TRI LEVEL SYNC Non integer RATE FIELD REFERENCE 1 Disable TEST SIGNAL 1 Black Burst TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 msec TIMECODE 2 SOURCE Disable 30 DROP Enable Drop Frame VITC 2 OUTPUT Disable VITC 1 Line 14 VITC 2 Line 16 1 The TEST SIGNAL menu item replaces the FIELD REFERENCE menu item on the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs when the BG7 module has Option CB installed 2 The TIMECODE and
90. Video signal 100 Flat Field NOTE The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 93 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to set the output parameters of the serial digital black signals output BLACK submenu from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Option BK Only Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the BLACK submenu Select BLACK OPTION in the main menu DVG7 x BLACK FORMAT 525 143 lt 1 gt 525 270 625 270 Black lt gt 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Group 1 ENTER lt gt Group 2 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 3 Group 4 BACK To TIMING submenu To VIDEO submenu 3036 027 DVG x Black BLACK SIGNAL DVG7 x BLACK AUDIO EMBEDDED Group 1 DVG7 x BLACK TIMING DVG7 x BLACK VIDEO Figure 3 52 DVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only FORMAT Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select 525 270 or 625 270 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection SIGNAL Selects the serial digital black signal to output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Black serial digital black 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field and 100 Flat Field Press the ENT
91. Y Position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 233 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks AUDIO GROUP submenu Enable or disable the embedded audio of the selected audio group Select which audio channel to enable Set the emphasis status bits sampling alignment status bits and sample bits of the selected audio group Select any of the audio groups in the AUDIO EMBEDDED main menu DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 Status Enable a 1 ENTER lt gt A To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 4 BACK DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 Channel 1 DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 Pale oe EMPHASIS Emphasis NO EMPHASIS CCITT Frame as cei lt gt Frame without Frame Number ping Asynchronous DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 24 bits Resolution 24 bits lt 1 gt 20 bits 1 V Figure 3 108 HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu 3036 049 3 234 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal
92. Y position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings AVG7 module Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set ID TEXT submenu the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable Disabl lt I gt Erve Hilt AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 10 0 APH A gt Set the horizontal position AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 80 0 APH AVG7 x a TEXT EDIT AVG7 x a TEXT SAVE Figure 3 21 AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu gt Set the vertical position A lt gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable
93. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt or right arrow buttons simultaneously The adjustment range of the timing offset settings depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 11 on page 3 60 Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 frame of the selected signal format in 1 line steps Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line of the selected signal format in 1 clock 18 5 ns steps Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset You can set the value from 10 ns to 10 ns in 0 1 ns steps Table 3 11 Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals Signal format Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns 1080 60i YPbPr GBR 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 59i YPbPr GBR 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 50i YPbPr GBR 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24sF YPbPr GBR 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23sF YPbPr GBR 562 37 0741 10 00 1080 30p YPbPr GBR 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 29p YPbPr GBR 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 25p YPbPr GBR 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24p YPbPr GBR 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23p YPbPr GBR 562 37 0741 10 00 720 60p YPbPr GBR 3
94. a yellow line TIMING Co siting Pulse One single sample wide pulse in the center of the image used to show the timing relationship and alignment between chroma and luma channels Different amplitudes are used to distinguish the three channels SDI Equalizer Test Full field equalizer test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 300h and 198h regardless of the current sampling structure and format For 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr HD SDI formats the Y samples carry the 198h words and the Cb Cr samples carry the 300h words resulting in a magenta shaded field for this pattern For other formats these same 10 bit word values will result in different color representations This pattern also includes the polarity control word such that the first sample in the active picture in every other frame is 190h instead of 198h PLL Test Full field phase locked loop test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 200h and 110h regardless of the current sampling structure and format It appears as a 24 gray field in 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr formats but as different colors in other formats SDI Matrix Matrix pattern with the equalizer test pattern 300h 198h in the upper half of the field and the PLL test pattern 200h 110h in the lower half of the field OTHER a For 3G output formats only Use this button to select the converter mode of operation Press any other test sign
95. access the LINK OFFSET submenu See page 3 219 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Selects the signal sets to be assigned to the test signal button Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following two signal sets HD Test Signal Assigns standard HD video test signals to the test signal buttons See Table 3 41 on page 3 212 Projector Test Pattern Assigns digital cinema projector test patterns to the test signal buttons These signal sets are only selectable in the 2K format See Table 3 42 on page 3 213 MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 219 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module HDLG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link LINK OFFSET submenu A output The following figure shows the LINK OFFSET submenu Select LINK OFFSET in the main menu HDLG7 x LINK OFFSET A NB 0e lt 1 0 2020 ms to 0 2020 ms Figure 3 99 HDLG7 module LINK OFFSET submenu Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 2020 us to 0 2020 us in 0 0135 us steps NOTE You can reset the offset value to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously HDLG7 module Use this menu
96. and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection 3 40 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down V arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its po
97. and restore Control parameters 3 168 functions 2 63 3 265 mount and unmount 2 32 Defined 3 165 3 262 USB port 2 2 Dependent UTILITY submenu 2 27 parameters 3 170 3 267 Modifying 3 166 3 263 Z Parameters Control 3 168 3 265 Zone Plate signals Selecting 3 166 3 263 Pafameters Using 3 177 3 274 Dependent 3 170 3 267 Equipment An Interworld Highway LLC Company Index 6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual
98. and when there is a loss of signal lock and the instrument is configured to switch to internal timing NOTE Perform the mainframe internal frequency calibration at least once a year to compensate for oscillator drift With a GPS7 module installed this calibration can be done while the instrument is in service If your GPS7 module is installed in a TG700 mainframe you need to also characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage Refer to the TG700 User Manual for more information Tektronix part number 071 1970 XX The following figure shows the CAL OVEN submenu You can find a complete internal frequency calibration procedure in the Oven Calibration Procedures section See page 3 100 Select CAL OVEN in the UTILITY submenu Execute Calibration ENTER oe i Execute calibration routine Yes ENTER No CANCEL Figure 2 29 Internal frequency calibration menu Press the ENTER button to execute the oscillator frequency calibration routine or press the BACK button to exit the menu CAUTION To prevent an incorrect oscillator frequency from being stored as the calibrated value be sure that the instrument is locked to one of the following signal sources before you run the internal frequency calibration routine Rubidium clock GPS antenna GPS7 module only or the master sync signal of your video installation To run the gain calibration the instrument must be locked to a GPS reference TG8
99. antenna is blocked from direct line of sight to the satellites or the power is not getting to the antenna 1 Low signal This means that some signal is detected but that the signal quality is too low for extraction of useful timing or position information This is a normal situation for a short duration but if it persists the causes are likely to be similar to those for FOM state 0 2 Acquire satellites This means that the instrument is receiving data from the satellites and is determining which signals to use 3 Bad position This means that the instrument detects that the stored position is different from the current position In this case the instrument will automatically go to FOM state 4 and reacquire the position TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Table 3 19 Figures of merit for signal quality cont Figure of merit FOM Indicator Description 4 Acquire position This means that the instrument is acquiring multiple fixes of the satellite position and averaging this into a new position to store in flash This state will also be displayed if you manually perform a new position acquisition This state normally lasts 60 seconds with good GPS signal quality 5 Adjust phase This means that the instrument is adjusting the time base or frame timing to correctly line up with the GPS signal 6 Locked gt These states indicate that
100. at 29 97 Hz 16 68 ms rate SOURCE Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select from the following LTC signal sources m Disable Disables the LTC outputs Time of Day Uses the Time of Day counter as the timecode Program Time Uses the Program Time counter as the timecode OFFSET Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the LTC offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The time digits take the following form HH MM SS FF After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change TIMING Press the ENTER button to access the LTC TIMING submenu for the selected LTC output See page 3 144 OUTPUT LEVEL Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the signal level of the selected LTC output between 0 5 V and 5 0 V TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 143 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu 3 144 GPS7 module GPI submenu Use this menu to set the delay used for all the signal formats Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the delay See Table 3 23 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the LTC TIMING submenu Selec
101. button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When the edge filter is enabled certain data transitions between two levels are run through a low pass filter to set rise times pulse widths and to prevent ringing If the filter is disabled the edges will not be filtered The filter should not be disabled in broadcast environments Edge filtering is not necessary in certain environments such as digital cinema applications and several types of picture monitors and projectors In these cases disabling the edge filtering will result in instantaneous level changes for adjacent color bars NOTE Software versions of the HD3G7 module prior to V5 5 included a 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN menu to select projector specific test patterns that had no edge filtering With software version V5 5 this functionality has been replaced by the Edge Filter submenu which can be applied to any test signal AV Timing Mode Turns the AV Timing Mode on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection In the AV Timing mode the video and audio are continuously cycled between being on as configured for 1 second then set to black and muted for 4 seconds Use this signal to measure the AV delay through a system with the AV Timing mode on an appropriate Tektronix waveform monitor or rasterizer TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Gener
102. by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu If 12 bit is chosen the addition 2 LSB bits are set to zero on the Y and co sited Cb and Cr samples The derived Cb and Cr samples will contain derived LSB bits 4 4 4 RGB Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr as described above Then the signal is color space converted using the inverse linear transform defined in SMPTE 274M If 10 bit sample structure is selected the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu If 12 bit is chosen the addition 2 bits LSB are computed from the linear transform calculations 4 2 2 YCbCr 12 Bit Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 2 2 YCbCr 12 bits by setting zeros for the additional 2 bits LSB The alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu 4 4 4 XYZ Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr and 4 4 4 RGB as described in the preceding paragraphs Then the RGB signal is converted to XYZ by normalizing the gamma corrected RGB signal and applying the results to a RGB to XYZ color space converter The output of the converter is gamma corrected for digital cinema The XYZ mode can be selected only in the 2K format mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module Perform the following steps to select the converter mode 1 Pr
103. c aph The circle frequency is actually the equivalent of the maximum vertical sinusoid frequency at the very top and bottom of the screen see the discussion of the Ky 2 parameter Adjusting the circle frequency has the simple effect of increasing or decreasing the maximum frequency at the outer edges of the pattern However this adjustment actually changes the coefficients of four of the zone plate parameters to keep the pattern round and centered on the screen The diagonal frequency is 2 times the vertical and horizontal frequencies c aph Adjusting the diagonal sine frequency changes both the KX and KY coefficients H Sine Horizontal Frequency MHz The horizontal frequency reported on the display is the real time frequency of the sine wave that causes the vertical bar pattern The maximum frequency is half of the clock frequency used by the generator for the active video standard for example 74 25 MHz 2 37 125 MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency maximum MHz or multiple For horizontal sweep frequencies up to half of the video standard s sampling frequency fs the displayed value is the maximum or swept to frequency of the sine wave For numbers greater than f 2 dividing the displayed value by the sampling frequency will give the number of complete DC f 2 DC cycles per line For example in a standard with sampling frequency of 74 25 MHz a horizontal sweep frequency of 148 5 MHz will result in appro
104. can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select When a GPS feed is first connected to the antenna input on the module it can take several minutes for the signal quality to reach its nominal potential How long that takes depends on such things as antenna site cable plant design and available satellites Excluding those variables the typical time to acquire satellites and achieve specified stability with a good satellite signal known position and a warmed up instrument is two minutes Antenna systems vary depending on the operating environment and on safety and regulatory requirements A simplified typical system is shown in the following figure to help you with planning and understanding the trade offs of one set up versus another See Figure 3 53 Optional Antenna with amplifier Cable 1 Cable 2 Ys Figure 3 53 Simplified GPS antenna system 1970 219 A GPS specific antenna with amplifier provides sufficient gain to drive a reasonable length of cable and provides filtering to reject signals at other frequencies A typical example of this is the Trimble Bullet HI 35 dB 5 V antenna TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module In a simple system without the optional booster Cable 1 connects the antenna to the GPS7 The length of this cable is limited by its attenuation at the GPS carrier frequency of 1575 MHz The G
105. case where the TG8000 system needs to make a large frequency change to achieve signal lock then depending on the instrument mode the value may slew slowly to the target value to stay inside the allowed slew rate for reference systems In this case the first number will slew over seconds or minutes until it equals the value of the second number If the instrument is taking a long time to lock to an external reference signal the Tune readout may provide valuable information about what is happening CAL Displays the tuning control word for the calibrated frequency of the mainframe oscillator and how far the TG8000 system is deviating from the calibrated frequency to achieve a lock to the internal reference The first part of the CAL readout indicates the fractional amount of deviation from the calibrated frequency For example a readout of 0 59e 6 indicates a fractional correction of 0 59 parts per million When a calibration of the instrument oscillator is performed the CAL readout values will typically change Over the life of the oscillator oven the expected frequency drift is 2 5 e 6 so this number should always be in this range If the fractional number is not within this range then the instrument may have been miscalibrated or the oscillator oven may have drifted out of specification since the last calibration In this case you should consider calibrating the internal frequency of the instrument This can be performed while the
106. change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change 30 DROP Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to Enable or Disable the 30 Drop Frame mode Most applications will prefer drop frame compensation VITC on NTSC but if needed it can be disabled by this menu This menu selection appears only when NTSC or NTSC J is set as the signal format for the selected BLACK output VITC Use this menu item to insert the same VITC signal on or 2 lines of the vertical interval Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line Select the VITC output you want to configure and then press the ENTER button to enter the VITC submenu for the selected output See page 3 127 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to enable or disable the output of a VITC on the selected line Use VITC submenu the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the VITC submenu Select VITC 1 or VITC 2 in the TIMECODE submenu GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 OUTPUT DISABLE A V GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 Line number 14 V 3036 032 ENABLE lt gt DISABLE 1 gt
107. error counts from the video input Access output calibration only available when in factory mode Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figures show the HD3G7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Selection by the MODULE button A HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p m 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 A Vi HD3G7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH m RGB 444 12b d HD3G7 x ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel d HD3G7 C 2xHD STREAM CONTENT m Test E Test Signal To SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH submenu To MOVING PICTURE submenu HD3G7 A AUDIO EMBEDDED To AUDIO submenu GROUP 1 To TIMING submenu To TIMECODE submenu 3036 039 v Continued on the next Bel 1 Not available in HD SDI and 3G fast progressive modes 2 Only available in A sample structure mode for 3G formats 3 Only available in 2xHD output mode Figure 3 82 HD3G7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 179 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module From previous page ENTER HD3G7 x VIDEO as To VIDEO submenu iia ae BACK HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD E To ANC PAYLOAD submenu ee BACK HD3G7 x A __V 352 PAYLOAD m Enable ENTER HD3G7 aa TRIGGER OUTPUT To TR
108. error in the instrument calibration For example if the instrument is locked to GPS and the Tune readout is more than 0 1 e 6 then you should consider calibrating the internal frequency of the instrument This can be performed while the instrument is in service with no disruption to the operation See page 2 46 CAL OVEN submenu GPS7 module only The first part of the Tune readout indicates the fractional amount of deviation from the calibrated frequency For example if you use a GPS7 or AGL7 module to lock to a video source that is 5 parts per million high then the readout will say 5 00e 6 This allows you to measure the frequency of the reference input and to see if the input is near the end of the available tuning range If the TG8000 system is in internal reference mode the tune value should be 0 00 e 6 and the integer values will equal the calibration value CAL readout NOTE The TUNE display will show non zero deviation values only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is installed and the signal reference setting is not configured as INTERNAL 2 42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics The integer values indicate the actual tuning control word The allowed range of the tuning control word is 0 to 4 194 304 The first number is the current value of the word and the second number is the target value for the tuning control loop In most cases these two values are the same However in the
109. flexible clock generator This readout should show Lock locked and is only valid and significant when the instrument is in generator mode An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe DDS STATUS This diagnostic displays the following DDSO Phase This circuit is not used so the readout may show locked or unlocked The state has no bearing on instrument operation m DDS Phase Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with the internal frame pulse This readout should show Lock locked and is only valid and significant when the instrument is in generator mode An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe If the instrument is in converter mode this readout is not active and may show locked or unlocked CRC ERRORS This diagnostic shows how many CRC errors are detected from the input signal If the output signal of the conversion process is not what you expect or the jitter attenuator is having trouble locking then you should check this readout for errors on the input It is normal to see errors when you are connecting or disconnecting the input or when no input is present When this occurs clear the errors after the connections are made by using the Diagnostics gt Clear CRC Errors submenu After clearing the errors monitor this readout if you have concerns about the input signal This diagnostic displays the following m Y Th
110. have been copied the message Finishing copy is displayed while the file system buffers are emptied This message may appear for a couple of minutes h When the restore operation is complete the message Backup completed successfully or Restore completed successfully is displayed before the menu display returns to normal NOTE If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the restore operation completes an error message is displayed Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements 18 Unmount the USB drive a Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB lt status gt The USB status should be Mounted b Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive After the message You may now safely remove the USB drive is displayed the menu readout should change to TG8000 UTILITY USB Not mounted c Remove the USB drive from the instrument 19 If your TG8000 includes an HDLG7 module proceed with the following steps to complete the upgrade CAUTION While upgrading do not press the front panel buttons or cycle the instrument power Doing so can corrupt the module memory and FPGA image a Power on the TG8000 b Press the MODULE button until the name of the HDLG7 module you are upgrading appears c Press and hold the ENTER button until Upgrade FPGA appears 2 56 TG8000 Multiformat Test Si
111. how to create a logo file Logo displays work best with the uncompressed BMP images 24 bits and 32 bits true color Logo displays do not work with RLE8 or RLE4 BMP compression BMP files are not scaled for each raster size For example a 320240 size bitmap will be rendered as 320x240 pixels regardless of the current raster area The bitmap would occupy about 25 of the active video for the SD 525 format but less than 4 of a 1920x1080 picture Therefore you might need to choose a bitmap size appropriate for the target display resolution when using the logo overlay Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu SDI x x OVERLAY LOGO Status Disable Al SDI7 x x OVERLAY LOGO 1 b gt Select a logo file Source Tektronix_logo_500x125 bmp d lt Disable Enable SDI7 x x OVERLAY LOGO X Position 5 0 APW lt q gt Set the horizontal position SDI x x OVERLAY LOGO lt q gt Set the vertical position Y Position 5 0 APH V 1970 326 Figure 3 126 SDI7 module LOGO submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 287 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 288 Status Displays the status of the logo overlay display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Disable or Enable Press the ENTER button confirm the selection Source Displays the selected logo file Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a logo fil
112. image used to show the timing relationship and alignment between chroma and luma channels Different amplitudes are used to distinguish the three channels 3 258 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description SDI Equalizer Test Full field equalizer test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 300h and 198h regardless of the current sampling structure and format For 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr HD SDI formats the Y samples carry the 198h words and the Cb Cr samples carry the 300h words resulting in a magenta shaded field for this pattern For other formats these same 10 bit word values will result in different color representations This pattern also includes the polarity control word such that the first sample in the active picture in every other frame is 190h instead of 198h PLL Test Full field phase locked loop test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 200h and 110h regardless of the current sampling structure and format It appears as a 24 gray field in 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr formats but as different colors in other formats SDI Matrix Matrix pattern with the equalizer test pattern 300h 198h in the upper half of the field and the PLL test pattern 200h 110h in th
113. instrument is in service with no disruption to the operation See page 2 46 CAL OVEN submenu GPS7 module only PLL Displays the frequency in MHz and the lock status for each of the mainframe clocks used to drive the video outputs All of the clocks should show a status of locked LK during normal instrument operation TEMP Displays the current temperatures of the mainframe and CPU in C followed by their status OK is displayed as the status when a temperature is within the operating range WARN is displayed when a temperature is out of range TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 43 Operating basics VOLTAGE Displays the current voltage readings for the various mainframe and module slot voltages OK is displayed as the status when a voltage is within the operating range WARN is displayed when a voltage is out of range The Voltage readings include the status of the RTC Real Time Controller battery power level The following readouts may appear m gt 40 OK indicates the battery power is good m 20 to 40 WARN indicates the battery power is getting low and should be replaced soon mB lt 20 LOW indicates that the battery should be replaced immediately rN CAUTION The RTC battery should be replaced before it loses power The RTC battery powers non volatile memory that contains system information such as the network configuration settings and the real time clock settings This information
114. is selected the signals listed below are available Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF m When the PAL format is selected the signals listed below are available Black Burst Black Burst with No Field REF AGL7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the input and output signals relative to TIMING submenu the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The TIMING submenu uses the same menu structure for both input and output signals except for the menu items displayed in the first line The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the GENLOCK or OUTPUT submenu AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Vertical 0 Line s AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 msec AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec Figure 3 8 AGL7 module TIMING submenu 1 gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the vertical offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the s
115. is slewing it indicates that the LTC and the selected reference Internal GPS or Video Genlock are not synchronous In this case the time code will shift when it crosses the threshold from one frame to another This can be avoided by not using the follow mode for the time synchronization Instead use the Synchronize Once or Synchronize now modes LTC time display and status LTC signal amplitude and status Time of day and the reference source UTC local and internal time displays Program time counter GPS signal quality and the number of satellites detected versus satellites usable NOTE Signal quality is an indicator of how well the GPS signal is being received It is a sum of the correlation for each of the satellites It can be used to evaluate the antenna and connecting cable but it can take a while for the receivers to recognize which satellites are available and stabilize at the final level Antenna power status Power OFF Open Short or Nominal NOTE A shorted GPS antenna will not damage the GPS7 module If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but will still pass through the RF signal which will allow the GPS to function The status will read Open if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used REFERENCE Selects the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock to the timing r
116. it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe 2 Watch the display for messages during the boot process Messages are displayed for a few seconds If a serious error is detected during boot the module menus will not be displayed 3 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the GPS7 module main menu appears It will look similar to what is shown below GPS7 x STATUS GPS No Signal GPS 1980 01 06 0 00 00 00 1970 250 5 Configure the GPS7 module as required for your installation See page 3 100 To configure the GPS7 module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to GPS7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 111 NOTE Configure your GPS7 for your installation before putting it into service See page 3 100 To configure the GPS7 module After you have configured the module save the configuration as the power on preset so that if power is lost the GPS7 will power on in the correct configuration See page 2 23 PRESET submenu TG8000 Multiformat
117. m The TG8000 does not lock to a genlock signal The frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift considerably and the TG8000 is near loss of lock The threshold for near loss of lock is approximately 2 x 10 6 from the ends of the tune range 2 50 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics The alarm signal output can be enabled using the GPI ALARM OUTPUT and AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu items in the UTILITY submenu See page 2 40 See page 2 41 NOTE After the instrument is powered on it takes about three minutes to detect a stable error signal this time is required to stabilize the temperature in the temperature controlled oven in the internal reference oscillator You can see the remaining time before the alarm becomes effective in the AGL7 main menu as shown below AGL x GENLOCK STATUS Genlock Alarm 120 seconds to Enable 1970 190 How to upgrade the instrument firmware You can use the UTILITY menu to upgrade the firmware installed in the instrument using one of the following two methods USB upgrade Install the upgrade using a USB drive that is connected to the instrument Network upgrade Install the upgrade using a PC that has an Ethernet network connection to the instrument CAUTION To prevent the loss of your user created files during a firmware upgrade be sure to backup all user data to a USB drive as instructed in the upgrade procedures Du
118. message Backup completed successfully or Restore completed successfully is displayed before the menu display returns to normal NOTE If the USB drive fills up before the backup operation completes an error message is displayed Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics 9 After the backup operation is complete prepare the instrument for the firmware upgrade a Press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY FIRMWARE UPGRADE b Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Network Upgrade and then press the ENTER button This puts the instrument in upgrade mode and makes it ready to receive the upgrade files through the 10 100 1000 BASE T port c A second confirmation message is displayed to remind you that the upgrade will delete all user created files on the instrument CAUTION If you did not backup your user files as described in step 8 it is recommended that you press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade and then backup your user files before performing the upgrade You will restore the user files after the upgrade d Press the ENTER button to proceed with the upgrade or press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade 10 From the instrument display note the current IP address of the instrument TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Gen
119. mode 3G Level B 2xHD 1920 x 1080 HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 30 50 59 94 60 23 98 24 25 2997 30 Output Format 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf30ps Output sample structure YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X To select the output mode on the HD3G7 module 3 156 You can select how the generated 1 5 Gb s or 3 Gb s serial data stream is constructed This selection is available in the HD3G7 OUTPUT MODE submenu Perform the following steps to select the output mode 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu appears as shown below HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 2 Press the down arrow button to access the output mode menu as shown HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p below 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 d 1970 241 Note the dot at the start of the second line and the return symbol at the end of the second line The dot indicates that this is the currently selected output mode and the return symbol indicates that you can press the ENTER button to select a new displayed output mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the available output modes 3G Level A 192
120. nthe pep eeprenaee cons 3 250 SDI7 module SD 625 720 x 576 cccecessecensecencneencnseneneeoeeesoeenensenenes 3 251 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cceeeeee eee ees 3 253 SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters ecceceeeeeeeene eee eae ees 3 266 SDI7 module factory default settings c cece cece ence e eee eee e eee een enna ens 3 314 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xi General safety summary General safety summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To avoid fire or personal Use proper power cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and injury certified for the country of use Ground the product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe all terminal ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a po
121. of 15 18 21 24 27 and 30 MHz Multiburst 15 30 MHz Y Multiburst 35 60 MHz 4 4 4 and fast progressive 3G formats only Three channel pattern with packet frequencies of 15 18 21 24 27 and 30 MHz Fast progressive 3G formats only Y channel pattern with packet frequencies of 35 40 45 50 55 and 60 MHz SWEEP Circle Diagonal Sine H Sine H Sweep V Sine V Sweep Custom 1 Custom 2 Zone plate test signal with real time parametric controls See page 3 262 SDI7 module zone plate signals MONITOR ChromaDuMonde Color reference chart used with permission of DSC Laboratories The pattern consists of a series of DSC standard color patches representing the six primary colors 18 evenly spaced intermediate colors and four skin tone reference patches The 24 primary and intermediate colors will show as a hexagonal shape on a vectorscope display providing a reference for comparison with a camera generated image of a physical DSC ChromaDuMonde chart The pattern also includes an 11 step crossed grayscale section and a center section with 0 black and 100 white patches 3 256 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description SMPTE 303M Color Reference Color reference chart per SMPTE 303M also known as the
122. of dependent parameters At each parameter whether it s a pattern control parameter or a dependent parameter you can use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to modify it 6 When you are done altering parameters scroll to the Save As selection at the bottom of the menu and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select User Custom 1 or User Custom 2 7 Press the ENTER button to save the modified signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters NOTE Zone plate variations can be sinusoidal square or triangular These discussions of zone plated parameters will refer to sinusoidal variations for convenience Zone plate patterns are made up of sinusoidal variations in luminance with the peaks of the sine waves resulting in white areas on the video screen and the wave troughs shown as gray or black The cycles can occur in all three of the video dimensions horizontally or along each line of the picture vertically or down the video frame and temporally with time The three dimensions are often referred to by the shorthand designations of X Y and T The luminance of any point in the picture physically on the screen and in time is determined by the value of sine at that particular point the value of sine follows from the phase of the cycle at that point and by the
123. of the groups and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 234 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 237 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 241 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDVG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 47 HDVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS 1080 59 941 SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 24 bits AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 ms TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User
124. option key d Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character to the next character in the option key e Enter all of the option key characters and then press ENTER button to confirm the selection f Press the BACK button twice to exit the UTILITY submenu This returns to the top of the UTILITY submenu 8 Verify that Option 3G is enabled a Press theENTER button to enter the UTILITY submenu b Press the up A or down arrow button until TG8000 UTILITY OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed c Verify that SDI7 slot number 3G is displayed This indicates that Option 3G has been enabled TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x OPTIONS 3G 3Gbps SDI Yeneration 3036 054 d Press the BACK button to exit the UTILITY submenu This returns to the mainframe main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To select an output signal on the SDI7 module To select an output signal perform the following procedure to generate either 3 Gb s SDI 1 5 Gb s HD SDI or 270 Mb s SD video test signals 1 Select the output mode See page 3 251 To select the output mode on the SDI7 module 2 Select the signal format See page 3 252 To select the signal format on the SDI7 module 3 Select the sample structure and depth See page 3 252 To select the sample structure and depth for the SDI7 module Option 3G only 4 Select the
125. or Test Pattern Mute Audio When set to any of the Test Pattern selections the Signal 2A and Signal 2B connectors will output the same test signal When set to any of the Black selections the Signal 2B black signal is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 2A output See page 3 275 SDI7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics TRIG OUT This output can be configured to output one of the following signals system clock 148 5 MHz frame field pulse once per video frame or field line pulse once per video line or pixel clock See page 3 309 SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu When an interlaced format is selected the frame field pulse selection produces a frame rate square wave trigger output which is low during field one and high during field two The frame pulse selection produces the once per field pulse for all other formats The frame field pulse and the line pulse signals are derived from the signal format of the selected trigger source channel or channel 2 The rate of the pixel clock depends on the signal format of the selected trigger source channel or channel 2 27 MHz for SD formats 74 25 or 74 18 MHz for HD formats and most 3G formats where 74 25 MHz is for integer frame rates and 74 18 MHz is for non integer frame rates such as 59 94 29 97 and 23 98 fps Option 3G only 148 5 MHz for signal formats such as 50p and 60p 148 35 M
126. or down arrow button to select SELECT LTC c Press the ENTER button to select LTC 1 d Use the up A or down arrow button to select Format e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 30 fps drop frame f Press the ENTER button Use the up A or down arrow button to select Source h Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Time of Day i Press the ENTER button Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM8300 timecode display Repeat this procedure for LTC 2 at 30 fps Repeat this procedure for LTC 3 at 25 fps 10 Repeat this procedure for LTC 4 at 24 fps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started GPI output 1 Check that the antenna signal is connected to the antenna input of the module and that the instrument shows the signal is locked a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A or down arrow button if needed to select STATUS c Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked 2 Connect the GPI 1 output to the voltmeter a Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter b Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module c Connect the GPI 1 connector on the breakout cable to the BNC to Banana plug adapter 3 Configure the GPI 1 output to be asserted on unlock a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the u
127. output channel configuration B Pb B Y Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the B Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the output channel configuration R Pr R Y Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the R Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the output channel configuration SCH PHASE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the SCH phase for a composite signal You can set the value from 180 degrees to 180 degrees in 1 degree steps This setting is not saved as a preset NOTE Ifyou try to set the SCH phase over 180 degrees the value jumps to 179 degrees Also if you try to set the SCH phase under 180 degrees the value jumps to 179 degrees TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 45 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce parameters for the
128. output s using the 3 000 Hz frame reset signal UTILITY submenu Use this menu to set the system related settings such as the contrast of the LCD display and the network parameters or to enable module options Use the up A or down F arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figures show the UTILITY submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 27 Operating basics Select UTILITY in the main menu T8000 UTILITY VERSION INFO H W lt 1 Select the module for which the hardware CPU 0 V0 13 FR 1 4 FP 1 1 version information will be displayed TG8000 UTILITY VERSION INFO F W Version 1 1 lt date and time gt 4 ENTER TG8000 UTILITY OPTIONS Select an SDI7 x None an as To OPTIONS ENABLED Submenu BACK TG8000 UTILITY SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN erase Press ENTER for menu TG8000 UTILITY LCD CONTRAST 1 gt Adjust the display contrast LOW lt lt 17 gt gt HIGH j py TG8000 UTILITY BEEPER CONTROL Enable m Enable lt I disable TG8000 UTILITY FRONT PANEL DISABLE Disable 10 Minutes Time Out Disable lt j es Immediately 30 Minutes 1 Minute 1 Hour ENTER TG8000 UTILITY NETWORK Information To NETWORK INFORMATION Submenu or Information lt gt Setup To NETWORK SETUP Submenu BACK A V TG8000 UTILITY ALARM STATUS No Alarm TG8000 UTILITY ALARM RESET Press ENTER to clear Alarm AR NO A Continued on the next page 1 Only available
129. oven oscillator tuning range This can happen if the input signal is too far from the correct frequency This could also indicate that the oven oscillator is near its end of life and the instrument needs to be serviced No Genlock Detected Output goes low when no Genlock signal is detected NOTE The GPIO alarms are active for the currently selected reference For example GPS specific alarms assert only if GPS is the selected reference and the same for Genlock specific alarms If the selected reference is Internal then only the Alarm Time output can be used TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 145 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 146 Use this menu to view operation parameters for the GPS7 module Because many sync sources are never turned off it makes sense to check them periodically These menus allow access to some internal nodes to forewarn of impending problems Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Select DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu TEMPERATURES GPS Temp xxxx TUNE Phase xxxx DAC xxxx GPS Temp 42 8 C VOLTAGE MON 2 5V relative to 3 3V xxx T PHASE DET RAMPS Up A xxxx B xxxx PHASE DET RAMPS Down A xxxx B xxxx Figure 3 75 GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu TEMPERATURES This diagnostic displays the temperature of the GPS7 m
130. overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the LOGO submenu display position of the logo Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG8000 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 X Po x OVERLAY LOGO sition 0 0 APH lt D gt Set the horizontal position AWVG7 Y Po x OVERLAY LOGO sition 0 0 APH lt 1 gt Set the vertical position AVWG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF AVWG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Figure 3 30 AWVG7 module LOGO submenu lt gt Select OFF or a logo Save the display position for the logo X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y position Sets the ver
131. pattern contains a pluge pattern with three vertical bars of 2 0 and 2 black The right side of the pattern contains four gray boxes corresponding to luminance levels of 110 mV 200 mV 450 mV and 700 mV 100 white in the analog domain The 2 patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0 black for XYZ formats Checkerboard 4x4 grid of alternating black and white patches used to measure intra frame contrast per 6 8 of SMPTE SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 Window White square centered on a black background This pattern can be used as an alternative to a full field white pattern when it is desirable for the average picture level APL to approximate normal program content Production Aperture Includes single pixel wide lines at the extreme edges of the active video area marking the complete production aperture Vertical lines are implemented as single sample pulses with no edge filtering so this pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal Clean Aperture Grid pattern per SMPTE RP 187 1995 The clean aperture is marked by the outer markers with overscan markers at approximate 2 5 increments The center 4 3 section of a 16 9 image has an additional set of aperture and overscan markers Each line on the grid is implemented with two horizontal lines or a double width pulse centered on two samples because the actual aperture boundary and the center of the image each lie midway between lines and samples Convergence Grid patter
132. right arrow button to scroll through the available output modes SD HD 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 3G Level A 1280 x 720 1 3G Level A 2K x 1080 1 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 en fr snes a 1 Available with Option 3G only 4 Press the ENTER button to select the desired output mode Note that the dot will appear in front of the output mode on the display to indicate that it is now the selected output mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 251 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format on the SDI7 module 1 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows SDI x x SELECT FORMAT HD 1080 1080 59 94i d 1970 340 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The dot will appear at the left of the second line to indicate that the format has been selected 3 Press the BACK button to exit FORMAT mode To select the sample This menu item appears only when Option 3G is enabled There are several sample structure and depth structures to choose from when the output mode is set to a non fast progressive for the SDI7 module format Press the do
133. separate supply When you are designing the antenna system check the voltage and current requirements of the components to insure compatibility The location of the booster amplifier is important It needs to be before the second length of cable shown in the simplified antenna system diagram If the booster amplifier is placed just before the GPS7 then the signal will have been attenuated too far and the output may be noisy If you cannot put the optional booster amplifier in the middle of a long run of cable then put it near the antenna rather than near the GPS7 end For more complex systems a variety of booster amplifiers powered and passive splitters DC blocks and filters are available from a number of vendors Antenna location It is important that the GPS antenna location has a clear view of a large part of the sky Since GPS satellites are constantly orbiting the earth they may be in any direction at a given time If part of the sky is blocked by buildings trees mountains etc then fewer satellites will be visible It is also possible to get reflected signals that will have come by a longer path than expected and thus may degrade timing accuracy and stability When evaluating a site it is important to monitor it over several days and with a variety of weather conditions present TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 103 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Figures of Merit FOM 3 104 This ante
134. shown here DID 0x41 SDID 0x05 DC 8 UDW 000 0 AFD Code AR 0 0 UDW 001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDWf002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDW 003 _T B L R 0 0 00 UDW 004 First bar data b8 b15 UDW 005 First bar data b0 b7 UDW 006 Second bar data b8 b15 UDW 007 Second bar data b0 b7 CS automatic calculation Where AR aspect ratio 1 16 9 0 4 3 T top bar data flag B bottom bar data flag L left bar data flag and R right bar data flag Note that these are all eight bit values for the respective User Data Word The HD3G7 module will automatically calculate the parity bits when Parity is set to Automatic which is the default TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 199 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 200 Most AFD codes do not require bar data information only the first user data word needs to be defined For example one common AFD code for a 16 9 coded frame is 1001 9 which indicates a 4 3 image horizontally centered with pillarboxes as shown in the following figure Figure 3 94 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame Therefore for this AFD code set the data words as follows UDW 000 0x4C UDW 001 0x00 UDW 002 0x00 UDW 003 0x00 UDW 004 0x00 UDW 005 0x00 UDW 006 0x00 UDW 007 0x00 The AFD ancillary data packet should be located in the active line portion of the
135. signal files logo files and preset files through the port You can use the GPI port to recall one of the seven available instrument presets and output an alarm signal See page 2 49 How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics AG7 module connectors The AG7 Audio Generator module is equipped with six BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 3 48 kHz CLOCK Figure 2 3 AG7 module connectors 1 2 Outputs channels 1 and 2 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal E 3 4 Outputs channels 3 and 4 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal 5 6 Outputs channels 5 and 6 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal 7 8 Outputs channels 7 and 8 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal E SILENCE Outputs a silence signal DAR signal 48 kHz CLOCK Outputs a 48 kHz clock signal The clock output level can be set as described below Setting the clock output level Use jumper J452 on the AG7 module to set the output level of the 48 kHz clock signal See Figure 2 4 Install the jumper on pins 3 4 of J452 factory default position to set the clock output level to CMOS compatible Install the jumper on pins 1 2 of J452 to set the clock output level to 1V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SILENCE lt 48KHz
136. source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 main menu shown below appears HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94i 100 Color Bars 6 10 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a format then press ENTER Press one of the front panel test signal button for example COLOR BAR to output a signal Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 39 Getting started SDI7 module functional 1 40 check 11 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector 12 Check that the signal appears as expected Use the following procedure to check that the SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module is functional Required equipment 3 Gb s waveform monitor One 1m 3ft BNC to BNC high bandwidth cable Procedure 1 Install the SDI7 module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power sour
137. test signal outputs APL submenu Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the APL submenu Select APL in the main menu APL OFF AVG7 x APL MODE High APL APL OFF Low APL APL Bounce v Bounce ii ei aoe Set the bounce period Figure 3 25 AVG7 module APL submenu MODE Sets the output mode of the APL signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the mode and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The choices are APL OFF Outputs the selected signal without making any changes High APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 100 flat field signal and then outputs them Low APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 0 flat field signal and then outputs them APL Bounce Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately for the period set in the PERIOD menu item Bounce Outputs the 100 flat field signal and 0 flat field signal alternately regardless of the selected signal for the period set in the PERIOD menu item PERIOD Sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in APL Bounce or Bounce mode Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the interval You can set t
138. test signal that you want to generate See page 3 253 To select the test signal on the SDI7 module Table 3 48 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 49 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 1280 x 720 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR A 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 50 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 2K x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 249 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 51 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 1920 x 1080
139. the TG8000 See Figure 2 19 A sequence is a series of generator settings defined using the Tcl language and SCPI commands The TG8000 loads a sequence and runs the command and settings in the order dictated by the sequences file Refer to the TG8000 Programmer Manual for more information about using sequences Select SEQUENCE in the main menu TG8000 SEQUENCE PLAYBACK No Sequence Loaded TG8000 SEQUENCE STOP 3036 005 lt ie Select a sequence to be run Stop the currently running sequence Figure 2 19 SEQUENCE submenu PLAYBACK Selects and runs a sequence Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the sequence you want to run and then press the ENTER button to run the sequence If no sequence is loaded into the instrument the message No Sequence Found is displayed on the second line STOP Stops the currently running sequence When you select the menu item and then press the ENTER button the sequence is stopped TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 25 Operating basics FRAME RESET STATUS submenu 2 26 Use this menu to display which of the three frame reset signals is used by the output of the installed modules Refer to Frame Reset Signals for detailed information about the frame reset signals See page 2 20 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu
140. the instrument rear panel to verify that the fan is operating 3 The flashing FAN FAULT message will reappear in 30 seconds if the fault condition still exists The FAULT LED will continue to blink red unless the fan restarts 4 Unplug the instrument from the power source and contact Tektronix customer support A fault condition exists that renders the instrument unusable The fan speed is out of range The power supply operation is out of range Solid red 1 If the instrument is still on navigate to the UTILITY gt DIAGNOSTICS menu 2 Scroll through the diagnostic readouts and look for voltage Warn messages 3 Unplug the instrument from the power source and contact Tektronix customer support A fault condition exists but the instrument is still usable The clock PLL is out of range Solid amber 1 Navigate to the UTILITY gt DIAGNOSTICS menu 2 Scroll through the diagnostic readouts and look for a PLL UL unlocked message 3 When you are ready to have the instrument serviced unplug the instrument from the power source and contact Tektronix customer support Normal The instrument is operating properly The instrument is turned off Off None TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 5 Operating basics Rear panel connectors 10 100 1000 Base T port The following figure shows the locations of the TG8000 mainframe and module c
141. the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 185 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module Use this menu to select the audio group For HD SDI and 3G Level A mapping AUDIO EMBEDDED you may select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 For 3G Level B mapping you may submenu _ Select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 for both Link A and Link B Press the left lt or right arrow button to make the selection When the desired audio group and Link are displayed press the Enter button to access the menu for that group In each group you can enable or disable the embedded audio select a specific channel and set the sampling mode Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items Press the ENTER button to select a specific channel While in the Audio Channel submenu you can set the embedded audio frequency amplitude and click rate for the channel The following figure shows the AUDIO EMBEDDED Audio Group submenu See Figure 3 87 Select AUDIO in the MAIN menu lt DISABLE ENABLE HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x STATUS DISABLE HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x CHANNEL x HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x Sampling Frame Figure 3 87 HD3G7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 3036 042 BACK Frame lt 1 gt Frame without Fr
142. the phase of the Signal quality is lt 16 frame signals is within 150 ns of the GPS 7 Lockedss signal The number of arrows indicates the 5 e p signal quality It is normal for this to vary with Signal quality is gt 16 the time of day as the different satellites move 8 Locked gt gt gt through their orbits as well as with changes in Signal quality is gt 26 weather and other conditions 9 Locked gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 42 10 Locked gt gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 68 11 Locked gt gt gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 110 NOTE The duration of some states depends on the strength of the received GPS signal If the antenna only has access to part of the sky or if the cable loss between the antenna and the receiver is too large then it may take significantly longer to progress up to the higher entries in the FOM table Time flow block diagram The following time flow diagram shows time information is used at different points in the system In particular it illustrates how the different user inputs and configuration settings combine with the time base to create the timecode An asterisk denotes points of possible user input TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 105 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 222 0161 Sas ind AWVYSs LINO Id YA INGSHOS ASYL INIL WHV TV INIL WWeS0ud ZOAQH ONIWIL LAdLNO ANISNS OL MO
143. the sample number to be scrolled SDI x x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s SDI7 x x MOVING PICTURE k x lt gt Set the frame period be scrolled Period 1 Frame s 7 A V SDI x x MOVING PICTURE zj gt Disable Random Disable Enable J 1970 328 Figure 3 124 SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu Ka D gt Set the Line number to be scrolled NOTE The Moving Picture function is not available with zone plate or multiburst signals However zone plate signals may be defined with motion in the zone plate parameters See page 3 263 To modify a zone plate signal on the SDI7 module The Moving Picture function is enabled whenever the H Step or V Step parameter is set to a value other than 0 When Moving Picture is enabled the circle and text overlays remain static regardless of the signal type standard test signal or frame BMP picture However the logo overlay remains static for only standard test signals but continues to move when used with a frame BMP picture The Moving Picture behavior is different when the SDI7 module is installed in a TG700 mainframe See page 1 3 Module compatibility between the TG8000 and TG700 mainframes TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 283 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 284 H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right g
144. the selected output See page 3 145 DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 146 Use this submenu to select the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock to the timing reference The following figure shows the REFERENCE submenu Select REFERENCE in the main menu Internal GPS Signal NTSC Burst NTSC Burst with 10 FieldID REF IN GPS x REFERENCE SOURCE 1 gt PAL Burst only m GPS Signal HD Tri level Sync CW REF IN only To GENLOCK TIMING submenu GPS7 x REFERENCE LOSS LOCK ACTION Use Internal Frequency m Stay at Current Frequency Stay at Current Frequency Jam Phase Fast Slew Stay Legal This menu selection appers only when the REFERENCE SOURCE is set to GPS Signal Figure 3 56 GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the reference source for the module timing Select one of the following references and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Internal Uses the internal clock frequency setting as the timing reference GPS Signal Uses the GPS signal input as the timing reference NTSC Burst Uses the NTSC black burst signal applied to the BLACK 1
145. through the available options When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only 3G fast progressive format 1080 line e YCbCr 422 10b 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b YCbCr 444 10b e RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2xHD formats 1080 and 720 line e YCbCr 422 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB 444 12b HD format e YCbCr 422 10b ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Selects the data to be placed on the alpha channel when a sample structure that includes an alpha channel is selected The channel can contain a duplicate of the Y or G channel data or a flat field signal This menu item appears only when the sample structure is set to A for 3G signal formats Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Use Y G Channel or to select a 0 to 100 Flat Field in 10 increments and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 181 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 182 2xHD STREAM CONTENT Selects the content for the first and second HD signals on link A and link B This menu item appears only when the signal format is set to 2xHD Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Test Signal Test Signal Test Signa
146. time interval between two signals when they are output in APL Bounce or Bounce mode Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the interval You can set the value from 0 5 seconds to 2 0 seconds in 0 5 second steps ATG7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the ATG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 7 ATG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS Shows the signal format and NTSC SMPTE Color Bars signal name output from the SIGNAL connector OUTPUT BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BARS FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL SMPTE Color Bar ID TEXT Status Disable TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 msec APL Mode APL OFF Period 1 0 sec 3 28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 Analog Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the AVG7 Analog Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module AVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 10 AVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 20 TG8000 Specifications and Perfor
147. to height aspect ratio of the active format For example Kx 9 0 will result in approximately 12 cycles per line ina format with a 4 3 aspect ratio the same setting will yield about 16 cycles per line when the ratio is 16 9 To estimate the equivalent absolute frequency of the sine wave i e to convert from c aph to c s or Hz use the formula fea x Kx x Riav x Raspect x Niines x fframe where Raspect the aspect ratio width height Niines the number of lines per frame frame the frame rate R av the ratio of line length to the length of the active video The maximum frequency is half of the active format s sampling frequency In formats that use a 74 25 MHz clock for example the maximum value of KX will correspond to a sine frequency of 37 1 MHz The Horizontal Sine zone plate for example is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 116 Figure 3 116 A Ky only zone plate TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Ky2 parameter Display name KX 2 H Sweep Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kx H Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in the horizontal frequency as a function of position along the video line When Kx alone is applied the result resembles a common sweep test signal Again use a waveform monitor to look at all the video lines to see the effects of Kx2 When Kx is 0 0 setting Kx t
148. to select TG8000 PRESET 8 Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 53 Operating basics 9 Verify the status of the USB drive a Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB lt status gt b Verify that the USB status is Mounted c Ifthe status is Not Mounted press the ENTER button to mount the USB drive 10 Back up the user created files a Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE b Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Backup All User Data to USB and then press the ENTER button to start the backup process c A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation d During the first stage of the copy process the display shows the names of the files as they are copied Depending on the size of the files being copied this may take a couple of minutes e When all of the files have been copied the message Finishing copy is displayed while the file system buffers are emptied This message may appear for a couple of minutes f When the backup operation is complete the message Backup completed successfully or Restore completed successfully is displayed before the menu disp
149. to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output OVERLAY submenu test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down V arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu Logo ENER To LOGO submenu lt gt gt Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle BACK To CIRCLE submenu DVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK oF OFF 1 gt Fast Slow V 3036 048 Figure 3 104 HDVG7 module OVERLAY submenu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 230 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 231 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 233 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay E Fast Sets the overlay to
150. top of the picture to the bottom To center the DC point at mid screen set Ky to 2 times Ky The Vertical Sweep zone plate is a Ky2 only zone plate See Figure 3 119 Figure 3 119 A Ky2 only zone plate K parameter Display name K Phase Units cycles The Kg parameter is the initial phase of the pattern it cannot create a pattern by itself To see the effects of this adjustment first set the Kx coefficient to approximately 0 75 and set a waveform monitor to view the line waveform Then adjust Kg The sine wave will begin on each line at the selected point in the cycle Note that 0 25 cycle corresponds to a phase of 90 degrees or 2 2 radians recall that the sine of 90 is 1 0 and the sine of 90 is 1 0 When Kg 0 25 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 271 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 272 Ky parameter Kyr parameter Kr parameter K parameter Display name KXT T Ch H Freq Units c aph per second c aph s The Kx T Ch H Freq parameter controls the change in horizontal sine frequency over time Setting Kxr to 1 0 for example causes the horizontal frequency to increase by one c aph each second If Kx is 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal w
151. up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu NOTE The items in this menu modify the signal output to make it non standard To indicate that the signal is non standard an asterisk is inserted at the beginning of the signal name displayed on the STATUS menu Select VIDEO in the main menu SDI x x VIDEO Y ON SDI x x VIDEO Cb ON SDI x x VIDEO Cr ON SDI x x VIDEO Edge Filter Enable d tA V SDI x x VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF SDI7 x VIDEO EDH 1 A V 4970 320 Figure 3 134 SDI7 module VIDEO submenu ON lt D of ON lt D of ON I of lt Enable Disable lt ON OFF lt ON OFF SD output mode only TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Y Turns the Y component YCbCr format G component GBR format or X component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Cb Turns the Cb component YCbCr format B component GBR format or Y component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Cr Turns the Cr compon
152. use FORMAT Cnr EXT TIME FAULT 3036 023 Figure 3 76 Front panel test signal buttons 3 158 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is in generator mode Table 3 37 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signals in the signal set Description COLOR BAR LINEARITY 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 White 75 Color Bars 75 White Eight full height bars of white yellow cyan green magenta red blue and black This pattern is available with three variations at 100 value for all bars at 75 value for colors and 100 for white and at 75 value for all bars SMPTE EG1 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE EG 1 1990 This pattern includes 75 color bars reverse blue bars I and Q sections black white and pluge sections Note that this pattern is only available for YCbCr formats since the I and Q sections contain color components outside of the legal RGB gamut SMPTE RP219 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE RP 219 2002 This pattern is intended for 16x9 aspect ratio displays with additional elements as compared to EG1 bars The HD3G7 implementation includes I and Q sections but unlike the similar sectio
153. width First the Y Valid Ramp spans from black to white across the valid range of the luminance Y channel Next the B Y Valid Ramp spans from yellow to cyan across the valid range of the Cb color difference channel Last the R Y Valid Ramp spans from cyan to red across the valid range of the Cr color difference channel 3 Channel Ramp Wide ramp from the lower valid value to the upper valid value for all three channels This pattern is color independent so it will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level black and at the valid level TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 159 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 37 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description Limit Ramp Wide ramp that spans the legal limit range 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats for all three channels On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level the valid level and the limit level Shallow Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of shallow ramps that together span the range between legal limits 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats Each bit value is held for 16 pixels for 10 bit formats and for 4 pixels for 12 bit formats There is overlap between the end of one ramp and the start of
154. 0 UTILITY is displayed and then press the ENTER button TG8000 UTILITY 3036 051 a Press the up A or down arrow button until TG8000 UTILITY OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed The bottom line of the display will list the slot number in which the SDI7 module is installed and will indicate whether option 3G is enabled None is displayed when the option is not enabled 3G is displayed when the option is enabled TG8000 UTILITY OPTIONS ENABLED SDI7 x None A 3036 052 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 247 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 248 4 If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the desired module and then press the ENTER button Press the up A or down arrow button until TG8000 UTILITY MODULE ID is displayed Verify that the displayed module ID matches the module ID listed on the option key document Enter the option key a Press the up A or down arrow button until TG8000 UTILITY OPTION KEY is displayed When Option 3G is not enabled the option key string is blank as shown below TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x OPTION KEY 3036 053 b Press the ENTER button to enter the option key edit mode The underscore character _ appears under the first character of the option key c Use the up A or down arrow button to select the first character of the
155. 0 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep SinX X MONITOR Monitor 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge Convergence Pattern Gamut Test Grey Window White Window PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse and Bar T Pulses TIMING Timing 2 5 MHz Bowtie 500 kHz Bowtie Active Picture Timing Co Siting Pulse TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Table 3 17 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Other Chroma Freq Resp Color Palette FCC Composite FCC Multiburst NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite 625 270 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Colour Bars 75 Colour Bars 100 Colour Bars Over Red 75 Colour Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 3 Channel Ramp 5 Step B Y Valid Ramp Limit Ramp Modulated Ramp Oversize Ramp R Y Valid Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Y Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep SinX X MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Convergence Pattern Gamut Test Grey Window White Window PULSE BA
156. 0 of the operating voltage range Line frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum power 120 VA Connecting the power cable Connect the power cable to the instrument first and then connect it to the AC power source Connecting the power cable causes the instrument to power on After connecting the power make sure that the fan on the rear panel is working If the fan is not working turn off the power by disconnecting the power cable from the AC power source and then contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 9 Getting started Module installation and removal A To prevent component damage A The following procedures describe how to install and remove modules from the TG8000 mainframe A screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip is the only tool you need to install or remove a module CAUTION To prevent damage to the mainframe and module always remove the power cord before installing or removing a module CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage components on the module and mainframe To prevent ESD or other component damage follow the guidelines below when installing removing or handling a module Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage from your body while installing or removing modules from the TG8000 mainframe Transport and store modules in a static protected bag or container Do not slide the module ove
157. 0 x 1080 3G Level A 1280 x 720 3G Level A 2K x 1080 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 HD 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 4 Press the ENTER button to select the desired output mode Note that the dot will appear in front of the output mode on the display to indicate that it is now the selected output mode To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format on the HD3G7 module 1 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows HD3G7 x SELECT FORMAT 3G A m 1080 59 94p d 1970 242 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The dot will appear at the left of the second line to indicate that the format has been selected 3 Press the BACK button to exit FORMAT mode To select the sample There are several sample structures to choose from when the output mode is set to structure and depth onthe a non fast progressive format Press the down V arrow button to navigate to HD3G7 module _ the sample structure depth selection shown below HD3G7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH mRGB 444 12b d 1970 244 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons to scroll through the available sample structures 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b
158. 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 10 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24p 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 10 00 720 60p 375 22 2222 10 00 720 59 94p 375 22 2444 10 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 10 00 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module LOSS LOCK ACTION Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the action that the module will make when a loss of lock condition is detected This can happen for example if the GPS antenna signal is lost Select one of the following actions and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Stay at Current Frequency Sets the module timing to keep operating at the current frequency until the reference signal is recovered m Use Internal Frequency Sets the module timing to switch to the internal frequency setting until the reference signal is recovered GPS HOLDOVER RECOVERY Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select how the module timing responds when the reference signal is recovered after a loss of lock Select one of the following recovery modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE If the module timing is off by more than 20 ms when the GPS signal is recovered the module forces a jam phase timing recovery In genlock mo
159. 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 7 00 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 7 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 7 00 1080 24p 562 37 0370 7 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 7 00 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 15 AGL7 Analog Genlock module Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals cont Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns 720 60p 375 22 2222 7 00 720 59 94p 375 22 4444 7 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 7 00 AGL7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings of the AGL7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 4 AGL7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings GENLOCK SOURCE Internal GENLOCK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec GENLOCK LOCK LOSS ACTION Go Internal Frequency GENLOCK FRAME RESET CW 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group OUTPUT BLACK 1 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BLACK 2 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BLACK 3 FORMAT 1080 59 94i SIGNAL Trilevel Sync BLACK x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec TG8000
160. 00 000 spe risi DHCP Server 3036 074 Figure 2 24 NETWORK INFORMATION submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 37 Operating basics NETWORK SETUP submenu Use this menu to set the network parameters for the 10 100 1000 BASE T port on the TG8000 which will be used when you remotely control the TG8000 using a PC and when you transfer files between the TG8000 and a PC Refer to Connecting to a Network for detailed information about connecting the TG8000 to a PC See page 2 47 Use the up lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the NETWORK SETUP submenu Select Setup in the UTILITY NETWORK menu TG8000 UTIL NET SETUP DHCP Enable Enable lt I peas TG8000 UTIL NET SETUP IP ADDRESS TG8000 UTIL NET SETUP SUBNET MASK A 000 000 000 000 1 gt Set the subnet address TG8000 UTIL NET SETUP GATEWAY ADDR A 000 000 000 000 lt ee Set the gateway address 3036 073 Figure 2 25 NETWORK SETUP submenu DHCP Enables or disables the TG8000 to receive IP address settings using the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol service on your network Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enabled and Disabled Press the ENTER button to implement the selection If you select Disable in this menu you will need to set address values in each of the following menu items NOTE Under some network envir
161. 000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics How to connect the generator to a network The TG8000 has a 10 100 1000 BASE T port on the rear panel that allows you to use a PC to remotely control the instrument and to upload and download files such as signal or logo files This section provides instructions for connecting the TG8000 to a single PC or to a network and for setting the network parameters on 10 100 1000 BASE T port Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to upload and download files using the 10 100 1000 BASE T port Connecting the TG8000 to The TG8000 uses the rear panel 10 100 1000 BASE T port to communicate with your PC s aPC or network Use one of the following two methods to connect the TG8000 to your PC s See Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 If you are connecting the TG8000 directly to a single PC use a crossover Ethernet cable to connect between the 10 100 1000 BASE T port on the TG8000 and the Ethernet port on the PC If you need to construct your own crossover cable use the following figure to change the pin connections on a straight cable to produce a crossover cable See Figure 2 30 If you are connecting the TG8000 to your local Ethernet network use a straight Ethernet cable to connect between the 10 100 1000 BASE T port on the TG8000 and the Ethernet hub port of your local network By connecting to an Ethernet network you can access the TG8
162. 000 using any PC on the network Pin 1 TD Pin 1 TD Pin 27D Pin 2 TD Pin 3 RD Pin 3 RD Pin 6 RD Pin 6 RD Figure 2 30 Pin connections for a crossover Ethernet cable Setting Ethernet network Use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to set the network parameters for the parameters TG8000 mainframe Accessing the NETWORK SETUP submenu Perform the following procedure to access the NETWORK SETUP submenu 1 Press the front panel MODULE button repeatedly to display the mainframe main menu 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select UTILITY and then press the ENTER button This accesses the UTILITY submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 47 Operating basics 3 Use the up A or down arrow button to select Network 4 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Setup This accesses the NETWORK SETUP submenu See Figure 2 25 on page 2 38 Setting the parameters on a network with a DHCP server If your network has a DHCP server use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to enable the TG8000 to function as a DHCP client When the TG8000 is connected to the network and DHCP service is enabled the TG8000 obtains the necessary network addresses automatically from the DHCP server NOTE Under some network environments the TG8000 may not be able to get the IP address automatically from a DHCP server In this case you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item Refer to you
163. 040 and J960 on the AGL7 module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 9 Operating basics ATG7 module connectors The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 7 Figure 2 7 ATG7 module connectors BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst timing pulse or subcarrier signal E BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst timing pulse or subcarrier signal SIGNAL Outputs the signal selected using the front panel test signal buttons See Table 3 5 on page 3 20 BARS Outputs the selected black burst or color bars signal AVG7 module connectors The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is equipped with three pairs of BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 AVG7 module connectors NOTE Each pair of connectors CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 output the same signal CH 1 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal CH2 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal CH 3 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal 2 10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics AWVG7 module The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is equipped with three connectors pairs of BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 9 4970 048 Figure 2 9 AWVG7 module connectors NOTE
164. 0psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 153 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 28 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X YCbCr A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 29 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2K x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 30 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 31 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2xHD 720 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b
165. 1 you can use the GPS7 module to test diagnostics in each of the four mainframe slots Refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for more information For the AG7 ATG7 AVG7 AWVG7 BG7 DVG7 HD3G7 HDLG7 HDVG7 and SDI7 modules up to four of the modules can be installed in the TG8000 mainframe The TG8000 Power Supply module is user replaceable and must be installed only in the position shown in the following figure The TG8000 Power Supply module cannot be installed in a TG700 mainframe Generator module slots Power Supply module HDVG7 DVG7 AGL7 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot4 Figure 1 2 TG8000 slot numbering TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 11 Getting started 3 Use a screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws of the blank panel attached to the slot you want to use and then pull it away from the instrument Save the blank panel for future use See Figure 1 3 If you are installing a new module into a slot that already contains a module remove the existing module See page 1 14 To remove a module Figure 1 3 Removing the blank panel CAUTION Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you insert the module into the mainframe TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 4 Insert the module into the slot paying attention to the mo
166. 4 4 4 GBR 4 4 4 4 GBR A 4 4 4 YCbCr 4 4 4 4 YCbCr A 4 2 2 YCbCr 4 2 2 4 YCbCr A 4 4 4 XYZ Test signal buttons have two modes of operation native YCbCr or RGB HD video test signals and native XYZ digital cinema projector test patterns only in 2K formats Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Adjustable timing offset between link A and link B outputs Full remote control using the Ethernet interface How to operate the HDLG7 module 3 208 After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe 2 Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display 3 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDLG7 x STATUS SMPTE RP219 ColorBar 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 5 Configure the module to the desired operational mode converter or generator select the signal format and if necessary select the test s
167. 50 and 100 white You can install extended signal sets which include additional patterns for the remaining 10 increments See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module 100 Red Field 100 Green Field 100 Blue Field 100 Cyan Field 100 Magenta Field 100 Yellow Field Full frame color flat fields The factory installed patterns include each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and yellow at 100 value You can install enhanced signal sets which include additional patterns for these six colors at 75 value See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field Full frame monochrome flat fields available in individual patterns from 10 to 90 in 10 increments These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module 75 Red Field 75 Green Field 75 Blue Field 75 Cyan Field 75 Magenta Field 75 Yellow Field Full frame color flat fields available in individual patterns of 75 value for each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and yellow These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these
168. 556 format 2K 1556 14 99sF 2K 1556 15sF 2K 1556 17 98sF 2K 1556 18sF 2048 x 1080 format 2K 1080 23 98sF 2K 1080 24sF 2K 1080 25sF 2K 1080 29 97sF 2K 1080 30sF 2K 1080 23 98p 2K 1080 24p 2K 1080 25p 2K 1080 29 97p 2K 1080 30p 1 No SMPTE 352M identification payload is added to the output of 2048 x 1556 format signals Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDLG7 x STATUS 100 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes to show the currently selected signal format as shown below HDLG7 X SELECT FORMAT 1080 59 941 Current 3 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module To select the test signalon The test signals in the HDLG7 module are divided into the following two groups the HOLG module HD SDI video test signals m Projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only NOTE Use the HDLG7 module Main menu to configure the module to output HD test signals or projector test patterns See page 3 216 HDLG7 module main menu All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons
169. 56 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 7 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 7 00 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Table 3 22 Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals cont Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 7 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 7 00 1080 24p 562 37 0370 7 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 7 00 720 60p 375 22 2222 7 00 720 59 94p 375 22 4444 7 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 7 00 BLACK TIMECODE Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected BLACK output Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 125 NOTE This submenu is available only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output BLANK ON GPS UNLOCK Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the blanking function on the BLACK 2 output when a loss of lock to the GPS signal is detected When turned on the BLACK 2 output will be blanked as long as the loss of lock condition occurs This purpose of this function is to trigger a change over If configured to blank on loss of lock this output should not be used for normal reference appl
170. 64 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal Black to Gray 3 Black to Gray 4 sets Black to Gray 5 Black to Gray 6 Black to Gray 7 Black to Gray 8 Black to Gray 9 Black to Gray 10 Red 1 Field Red 2 Field Full frame color flat fields representing the individual colors in Green 1 Field Green 2 Field the SMPTE EG 432 1 color accuracy patterns available under Blue 1 Field Blue 2 Field the COLOR BAR button Cyan 1 Field Cyan 2 Field These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You Magenta 1 Field Magenta 2 Field must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals Yellow 1 Field Yellow 2 Field See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets MULTIBURST No test signals are currently available for the MULTIBURST signal set SWEEP Circle Diagonal Sine Zone plate test signal with real time parametric controls See H Sine H Sweep V Sine V Sweep page 3 165 HD3G7 module zone plate signals Custom 1 Custom 2 MONITOR ChromaDuMonde Color reference chart used with permission of DSC Laboratories The pattern consists of a series of DSC standard color patches representing the six primary colors 18 evenly spaced intermediate colors and four skin tone reference patches The 24 primary and intermediate colors will show as a hexagonal shape on a vectorscope display providing a reference for comparison with a camera generated image of a physical DSC ChromaDuMonde chart The pattern al
171. 75 22 2222 10 00 720 59p YPbPr GBR 375 22 4444 10 00 720 50p YPbPr GBR 375 26 6667 10 00 720 30p YPbPr GBR 375 53 3333 10 00 720 29p YPbPr GBR 375 45 9770 10 00 720 25p YPbPr GBR 375 44 4444 10 00 720 24p YPbPr GBR 375 55 5556 10 00 720 23p YPbPr GBR 375 55 6111 10 00 3 60 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks VIDEO submenu m Enable or disable the signal output from the CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors m Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a GBR signal is being output Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu AWVG7 x VIDEO GBR SYNC Sync ON Green Sync ON All Channels Sync ON All Channels AWVG7 x VIDEO CH1 ON Y ON OFF AWVG7 x VIDEO CH2 ON Pb ON OFF AWVG7 x VIDEO CH3 ON Pr ON OFF Figure 3 34 AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu GBR SYNC Sets whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal and R signal when a GBR signal is being output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Syne ON Green and Sync ON All Channels When you select Sync ON All Channels a sync signal is multiplexed with the G B and R signals Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection
172. 8 35 MHz for 3G fast progressive formats such as 60p 59 94p and 50p Frame Field Pulse The trigger pulse is produced at the field or frame rate of the video signal In interlaced and segmented frame formats this produces a frame rate square wave that is low during field one and high during field two In progressive formats the output is high during the vertical blanking period producing a field rate pulse When this menu item is displayed use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a different clock Line Pulse The trigger pulse output is high during the horizontal blanking period producing a line rate pulse When this menu item is displayed use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a different clock 1 The Frame Field Pulse and Line Pulse signals are derived from the EAV and SAV XYZ byte H V and F bits just prior to the parallel data entering the serializer therefore these pulses can be used to approximate the signal timing Use this menu to view operation parameters for the SDI7 module Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See Figure 3 139 NOTE The SDI7 module provides additional diagnostics for checking the DDR2 and SRAM memory that can be accessed only in factory mode See the TG8000 Service Manual for information on using the factory mode PLL STATUS This diagnostic displ
173. 9 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 57 SDI7 module SD 525 720 x 486 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X 3 250 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 58 SDI7 module SD 625 720 x 576 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X To select the output mode You can select how the generated 270 Mb s 1 5 Gb s or 3 Gb s serial data on the SDI7 module stream is constructed This selection is available in the SDI7 OUTPUT MODE submenu Perform the following steps to select the output mode 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the SDI7 module main menu appears as shown below SDI7 x 1 STATUS 100 Color Bars HD 1080 59 94i 1970 338 2 Press the down V arrow button to access the output mode menu as shown below SDI x 1 OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94i m HD 1920 x 1080 d 1970 339 Note the dot at the start of the second line and the return symbol at the end of the second line The dot indicates that this is the currently selected output mode and the return symbol indicates that you can press the ENTER button to select a new displayed output mode 3 Use the left lt 4 or
174. 92 SDI7 module BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu 0 cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 3 293 SDI7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 0 ccc cece cence eee e eae ees 3 294 SDI7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 000ccceeeceeee eee eee eeaeees 3 295 SDI7 module TIMING submenu 0 0 cece ec ee ence n eee ne ene e ene e eens en eeea 3 297 SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu 0 ce cece cee n eee eect eens eens ene eee 3 298 SDI7 module VIDEO submenu cc cece cece ence een e ene ee eee eens ene eea 3 300 SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu ccc cece cece eee eee eeeeeeneees 3 303 SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu Continued ccceeeeeeee enone 3 304 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame 0 0 ccc cece cence eee ee eens een rreren 3 308 SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu ccc cece eee cece rererere 3 309 SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu eseese eenen esner eseese errre erernel 3 312 ix Table of Contents List of Tables Table i TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation cseeeeeeeeeneeee eee ees XX Table 1 1 Standard and optional accessories 0 0 sce ceeee eee eee eee ene ence eeeee eee eneeneeeaeeaenees 1 3 Table 1 2 Instrument and module options 00 ccc cece cee cece eee e eee eee nee ene e ene e eee enee ens 1 4 Table 1 3 TG8000 environmental requirements 0
175. Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase Limit Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Shallow Ramp Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field MULTI BURST Multiburst Multiburst 1 10 MHz Multiburst 10 20 MHz Multiburst 20 30 MHz SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 1 15 MHz 100 Sweep 1 30 MHz MONITOR Monitor 75 Blue Field 75 Green Field 75 Red Field Convergence PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2730 Pulse and Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie 1ns Markers Co site Pulse SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module main menu Use the HDVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signals Scroll the active picture area of the output signal m Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio group m Enable or disable the Y Pb and or Pr components on the video output signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 225 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the HDVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94i 100 Color Bars To MOVING PICTURE submen
176. DEO Pr ON HDVG VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF Figure 3 112 HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu lt I gt aw Y Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pb Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pr Turns the Pr component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AV Timing Mode Turns the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 239 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK Only HDVG7 x BLACK FORMAT m 1080 59 94 HDVG x BLACK SIGNAL m Black Group 1 HDVG x BLACK TIMING Press ENTER for menu HDVG7 x BLACK AUDIO EMBEDDED When you turn this mode on the specified audio and video signals are synchronously on for 0 5 second and off for 4 5 seconds With this signal you can measure t
177. DVG7 G Network File folder SDI File folder SEQUENCE File folder Figure 2 32 Example FTP view of the instrument file structure 5 Use Windows Explorer to drag and drop user files to or from the TG8000 generator NOTE If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the copy operation completes an error message similar to the one below is displayed Click OK to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements Po i FF An error occurred copying a file to the FTP Server Make sure you have P permission te put files on the server Details The operation timed out Figure 2 33 Example FTP error message when flash memory is full 6 After you are done transferring files close the Windows Explorer window 2 66 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Inspection and cleaning Operating basics Inspect and clean the instrument as often as your operating conditions require The collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and operational failure Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure especially under high humidity conditions CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the front panel controls Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solu
178. Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 20 bits TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 95 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Table 3 18 DVG7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings AUDIO GRP 1 Ch 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us VIDEO Y ON Pb ON Pr ON Resolution 10 bits EDH ON AV Timing Mode OFF Option BK BLACK FORMAT 525 270 BLACK SIGNAL Black BLACK AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 20 bits BLACK AUDIO CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF BLACK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us BLACK VIDEO Resolution 10 bits EDH ON TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module This section describes the module specific functions of the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module GPS7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors Se
179. E button until the HDVG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94 100 Color Bars 2 Option BK only Set the HD trilevel sync rate a Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu until HD RATE is displayed as shown below HDVG7 x HD RATE m Non integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 ed 3036 091 b Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Non integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 or Integer 60 50 30 25 24 and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The HD RATE setting affects which signal formats can be selected for output integer or non integer Press the FORMAT button to access the SELECT FORMAT submenu 9 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection gt NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs 5 If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press BACK press the BACK button TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 223 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module To select the test signal 3 224 All of the signal sets that are available in the module are alre
180. ENCE SOURCE GPS Signal LOSS LOCK Stay at current frequency ACTION HOLDOVER Stay legal RECOVERY TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 147 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Table 3 24 GPS7 module factory default settings cont Submenu Menu item name item name Settings SELECT OUTPUT Black 1 INPUT OUTPUT Output if allowed Black 2 Black 1 ony NOTE INPUT OUTPUT selection for Black 1 is Black 3 not available on earlier GPS7 modules without the REF IN input connector FORMAT NTSC Field Disable Mergrengg NOTE This setting appears for non HD formats only TIMING Vertical 0 lines offset Horizontal Coarse 0 us Horizontal Fine 0 ns TIMECODE Source Disable Offset 00 00 00 00 30 Drop Enable 30 Drop Frame VITC VITC 1 Output Disable Line Number 14 VITC 2 Output Disable Line Number 16 BLANK ON No REFERENCE UNLOCK Black 2 only HD Non integer TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE GPS SETUP Antenna Power Off Position Fixed Acquire Position Press Enter to reacquire Fixed Position Signal Warning threshold 6 Locked gt 3 148 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Table 3 24 GPS7 module factory default settings cont Submenu Menu item name item name Settings TIME SETUP SELECT TIME OF DAY menu MENU Source GPS Signal
181. ER button to confirm the selection AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital black signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the groups and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 88 3 94 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 91 VIDEO Sets the resolution and EDH insertion of the serial digital black signals Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 92 DVG7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the DVG7 Generator module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 18 DVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS 525 270 SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status
182. Figure 3 10 ATG7 module main MeNu cece cece eee eee een nen nen een EEE EEE ea 3 21 Figure 3 11 ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu 0 ccc eec eee eceeceeeeeneeee eee ees 3 23 Figure 3 12 ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu 0 cece cceee cent eee e ee eeee een eees 3 24 Figure 3 13 ATG7 module ID TEXT submenu 00 e cc ecce cence eee e eee ee eee eae enenneenaeeeees 3 25 Figure 3 14 ATG7 module TIMING submenu 00 ecc cece ee cence cece ee eee eae eneeneeneeeeees 3 26 Figure 3 15 ATG7 module APL submenu 0 0 cceeceee cece nee e cence eeeneeee eae enenneenaeneees 3 27 Figure 3 16 Front panel test signal buttons 00 ccc ec cece cece ence eee eee eee eaeenenneenaeeeees 3 32 Figure 3 17 AVG7 module main menu cece cence eee ee eee ence nee eee eee ence eee enenneenaeeeens 3 36 Figure 3 18 AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 0 0 cecceceeceeceeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 37 Figure 3 19 AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu 0 ecceccecee cee eee ee tee eae eneeneenaeeeens 3 38 Figure 3 20 AVG7 module LOGO submenu 0 0 ccc ece eee cen cence ene ee testes eneeneenaeeeees 3 39 Figure 3 21 AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 00 eee e cece eee eee e nee ne eee tee eneeneenaeeeees 3 40 Figure 3 22 AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 0 cece ccc ece cece eee ene ne tenet e nee en enna ees 3 42 Figure 3 23 AVG7 module T
183. G submenu shown below Select TIMING in the BLACK submenu A GPS7 x BLACK x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s GPS7 x BLACK x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Course 0 0000 psec lt D gt 525 Line s to 525 Line s lt gt 63 556 psec to 63 556 sec lt gt 10 00 nsec to 10 00 nsec Figure 3 58 GPS7 module BLACK TIMING submenu Use the up A or down arrow button to select a timing parameter and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the parameter Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the vertical timing For NTSC and PAL you can adjust the timing by 4 a color frame For HDTV trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 2 a field or frame progressive or interlaced signals respectively See Table 3 22 Horizontal Coarse Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the horizontal coarse timing For NTSC PAL and HDTV trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 1 ps Horizontal Fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the horizontal fine timing For NTSC and PAL signals you can adjust the timing by 10 00 ns For HD trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 7 00 ns Table 3 22 Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings ps Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 55
184. GPS x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY Internal 2010 01 21 01 00 00 Synchronize once REF IN 1 gt Synchronize now only Follow lt Edit the internal time and day 1 This menu item appears only when the TIME OF DAY Source is set is set to Internal Figure 3 63 GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu Source Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the timecode reference Internal Enables the Internal Time of Day mode When the timecode reference is set to Internal an additional menu setting appears where you can set the time manually like setting any clock and then activate the time of day change CAUTION When Internal is selected as the timecode reference the time of day will not be automatically changed See page 3 132 How to set the time of day in Internal mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module VITC Input Selects the vertical interval time code as the timecode reference VITC is only available when the Reference Source is set to a video Genlock signal NOTE The VITC and LTC inputs are not available on earlier GPS7 modules that do not have the Black 1 REF IN input connector When the VITC or LTC inputs are used as time of day sources the hh mm ss ff settings will be synchronized to the VITC or LTC source if present However the yyyy mm dad settings will be set from the most recent valid source GPS o
185. GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE 30 DROP m 30 Drop Frame Enable lt gt 30 Drop Frame Enable 30 Drop Frame Disable d GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC lt gt VITC 1 ENER To VITC submenu VITC 1 VITC 2 BACK d Y 3038 084 1 This menu item appears only when NTSC or NTSC J is selected as the signal format Figure 3 60 GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu NOTE This submenu is available only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 125 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 126 SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined by the time of day menu m Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the selected Black output NOTE In addition to enabling the timecode source at least one line must be specified and enabled to carry VITC using the VITC submenu below OFFSET Use this menu item to set an offset for the selected black output relative to the selected timecode source You can enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the video signal Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to
186. Ground Ground 7 LTC3N Ground 8 LTC2N Ground 9 No connection 10 LTC1N Ground 11 No connection 12 LTC3P 13 LTC2P H BNC 14 LTC1P V BNC 15 LTC4P E BLACK 1 REF IN Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can also configure this connector to receive analog video HD tri level sync or CW signals for use as a Genlock reference The GPS7 module will syne with CW signals at 1 3 58 4 43 5 or 10 MHz Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the reference input capability On these modules the connector is labeled BLACK 1 BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can configure this output connector to turn off if certain errors are detected The output will remain off as long as the error occurs Use this function to trigger a downstream ECO to switch to backup E BLACK 3 10 MHz Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can also configure this connector to output a 10 MHz sine wave This connector is labeled 10 MHz BLACK 3 on earlier GPS7 modules NOTE You can use the menus to independently set the format and timing of the three black outputs and to enable VITC to be applied to the output signal For HD trilevel sync signals the BLACK 1 2 and 3 outputs are a group that must all output either integer or non integer rates See page 3 124 GPS7 module HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu 2 14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manu
187. How to connect the generator to a network 2 2 0 6 c eee eee ee eee cence ents eaten nee enennees 2 47 How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface GPT cc ce eceeeccene eee eeeennees 2 49 How to upgrade the instrument firmware c cece ence eee cence eee e eee nese teense eanennees 2 51 How to backup restore presets and user data using a USB drive c ccc ccc cece ence ene eneees 2 63 How to transfer user files using FTP ccc cece ccc e eee n cence en ee eee tenet ents eee n nee enennees 2 65 Inspection and cleaning we iisss n ceseas Licnenieverrensdecetehauoescde ads pace cundeassaueceetieasronaceeious ts 2 67 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual i Table of Contents Modules AG7 Audio Generator module 2 2 0 0 0 cece een cence eee e eee e eect ete nee ne tee eee ene ene eneeeaengeneenaes 3 1 AG7 module product description 0 ccc cece cece cence een een een p EE ne Een ne nen EE Enea 3 1 How to operate the AG7 module 0 ccc snsenssssse ene enn e nee een Ene eet EEE ea 3 2 AGT module main MEN seiiher G aa aa E 3 3 AG7 module factory default settings 2 0 00 0 cc cece cece cece cence eee eet e eee eee nets eee nee en eens 3 6 AGL7 Analog Genlock module 0 ccc cece ence nee enn n nen n Ene EEE nen EE ene EEE EEE Ea 3 7 AGL7 module product description 00 cece cece eee eee rere rsrsrsr ene nee nee eee tne nee a 3 7 How to opera
188. Hz for signal formats such as 59 94p TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 19 Operating basics Frame reset signals The TG8000 uses the three frame reset signals described below to output different video formats simultaneously FRAME RESET1 This frame reset signal supports the 1 1 001 system signal and is used by the following video formats These signals are synchronized with each other NTSC 1080 23 98sF 30 fos DF LTC 525 270 1080 29 97p 23 98 fps LTC 1035 59 94i 1080 59 94i 1080 23 98p 1080 59 94p 1 720 59 94p FRAME RESET 2 This frame reset signal is used only for PAL 625 or HD LTC formats with 50 Hz or 25 Hz frame rates These signals are synchronized with each other PAL 1080 25p 25 fps LTC 625 270 1080 50i 1080 50p FRAME RESET 3 This frame reset signal is used for HD LTC formats with 60 Hz 30 Hz or 24 Hz frame rates These signals are synchronized with each other 1035 60i 24 fps LTC 1080 24p 25 fps LTC 1080 24sF 30 fps LTC 2 1080 30p 1080 60p 1 1080 60i 720 60p 1 HD3G7 HDLG7 and SDI7 with Option 3G only 2 Not drop frame Frame reset signal is not synchronized with frame reset signals 2 or 3 unless a GPS7 module is installed When a GPS7 module is installed the frame reset signal 1 synchronization is related to the frame reset signals 2 and 3 through the GPS7 epoch timing You can see which of the three frame reset signals are used by each output of each module by using the
189. IGGER OUTPUT submenu m FA V Clock ENGK ENTER HD3G7 x e OUTPUT Ed To SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu Test Pattern d BACK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS E To DIAGNOSTICS submenu eee BACK 4 ENTER HD3G7 x CALIBRATION To CALIBRATION submenu BACK 7 3036 040 4 Only available in factory mode Figure 3 83 HD3G7 module main menu Continued 3 180 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure See page 3 183 HD3G7 module STATUS menu OUTPUT MODE Selects the mapping format of the output signal to Level A direct image format mapping Level B SMPTE 372M dual link mapping as described by SMPTE 425 or HD SDI Within Level A and Level B there are also selections for 1920 x 1080 2K x 1080 and 1280 x 720 Level A only formats Also for Level B only there are selections for 2xHD 1920 x 1080 and 2xHD 1280 x 720 formats The 2xHD mode produces two standard HD streams in the same format e g 1080 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams See page 3 184 HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH When the output mode is set to a non fast progressive format the SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH menu is available There are several sample structures to choose from Press the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons to scroll
190. ILITY SDI7 x OPTION KEY 3036 063 To enter an option key perform the following steps 1 Press the ENTER button to enter the option key edit mode The underscore character _ appears under the first character of the option key 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the first character of the option key 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character to the next character in the option key 4 Enter all of the option key characters and then press ENTER button to confirm the selections OPTIONS Displays the enabled options for the selected SDI7 module None is displayed if Option 3G is not enabled 3G 3Gbps SDI generation is displayed when Option 3G has been enabled as shown below TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x OPTIONS 3G 3Gbps SDI Yeneration 3036 064 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 35 Operating basics SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu Use this menu to assign signal sets to a specific front panel test signal button and to assign a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the OTHER test signal button The following figure shows the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu Select SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN in the UTILITY submenu TG8000 TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HDVG7 aa ie lt gt gt Select a module dies ane PICTURE KEY ASSIGN lt gt Select a module 3036 065 Figure 2 23 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu TEST SIG
191. IMING submenu c ccc eececeecee cee ne ene tee tae eneeneeneeeeens 3 43 Figure 3 24 AVG7 module VIDEO submenu cc cece cece cece eee cent nee eed e nee eee ene eed 3 44 Figure 3 25 AVG7 module APL submenu 0 0 cece cece cece een ceeeeeeeteeteeenenneenaeeeens 3 46 Figure 3 26 Front panel test signal buttons 00 ccc cece cece cece e nee ene nee eee nee eee ene e ea 3 51 Figure 3 27 AWVG7 module main Menu 0 cece cece eee cece n cence eee e nee etee eae eneeneeeaeeeens 3 52 Figure 3 28 AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 0 e cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 53 Figure 3 29 AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu cecceceece ence ne eee eae eneeneeneeeeees 3 54 Figure 3 30 AWVG7 module LOGO submenu ecceccecee cence eneene testes enenneeeaeenees 3 55 Figure 3 31 AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 0 cece cence eee e nee ne eee eae eneeneeneeeeens 3 56 Figure 3 32 AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 00 eccecce cee ceeceeneeee eae eneeeeenaeeeees 3 58 Figure 3 33 AWVG7 module TIMING submenu 0 ceccece eee e cece eee e ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeas 3 59 Figure 3 34 AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu 0 ccecceceeceeceeeeene tee eae eneeneenaeeeees 3 61 Figure 3 35 BG7 module main menu 2 cece eee n cence ee eee ene en cee eeeenetee eae eneeneeneeeeens 3 65 Figure 3 36 BG7 module BLACK submenu 0 0cc
192. INEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Ramp Shallow Ramp Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field MULTI BURST Multi Burst Multiburst 1 10 MHz Multiburst 10 20 MHz Multiburst 20 30 MHz SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 1 15 MHz 100 Sweep 1 30 MHz MONITOR Monitor 75 Blue Field Convergence 75 Green Field 75 Red Field PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2730 Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie 1 ns Marker SDI a OTHER 1 The Valid Ramp signal is available in YPbPr format only TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 51 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module main menu 3 52 Use the AWVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signal Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a GBR signal is being output m Enable or disable the output signal on the CH1 CH2 and CH3 connectors Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AWVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button AWVG7 x STATUS 1080 591 YPbPr 100 Color Bars AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE To MOVING PICTURE submenu To OVERLAY submenu To TIMING submenu ENTER To VIDEO submenu BACK 3036 017 AWVG7
193. Indicates that the incoming HD SDI video stream is being converted TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 183 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu 3 184 1080 59 94i Indicates the incoming signal format If there is no input or the format is not the correct rate the following messages will appear on the second line of the LCD No Input Signal or Input Signal Error Check FORMAT YCbCr 4 2 2 10b Indicates the output sampling structure Select Level A or Level B as the serial link multiplexing method or select HD mode Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the Level A Level B or HD choices listed below Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the OUTPUT MODE submenu HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p Palins 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 rs i me A a He aa 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 HD 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 Figure 3 85 HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu Level A This is one way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 For the mapping structure 1 signals such as 1080p50 1080p59 94 and 1080p60 a Level A stream looks similar to HD video as defined in SMPTE 292 except the data rate is twice as fast In Level A the lines are sent in order consecut
194. Internal 2008 01 01 00 00 00 TIME ZONE OFFSET menu 00 00 DST SCHEDULE menu Enable Off PROGRAM TIME menu Setup Initial Time 00 00 00 JAM SYNC menu Enable ON LEAP SECOND menu Setup Scheduled Time 00 00 00 ALARM TIME menu Enable Off Setup Alarm Time 00 00 00 ALARM DELAY menu GPO Loss of Lock 00 00 10 GPO Signal Warning 00 00 10 Black 2 Blank On Unlock 00 00 10 SELECT LTC LTC 1 INPUT OUTPUT Output if allowed LTC 2 ii NOTE INPUT OUTPUT selection for LTC 1 is LTC 3 not available on earlier GPS7 modules without the LTC 4 REF IN input connector TYPE 30 fps drop frame SOURCE Time of Day OFFSET 00 00 00 00 TIMING Delay 0 00 ms OUTPUT Level 2 0 Volt LEVEL SELECT GPIO INPUT 1 Trigger Select None OUTPUT 1 Alarm Select None OUTPUT 2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 149 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 150 This section describes the module specific functions of the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module E HD3G7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 15 HD3G7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 35 E TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that th
195. K only 4 i Figure 3 42 DVG7 module main menu 3 80 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 82 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 83 AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for the embedded audio on the output test signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 234 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 91 VIDEO Enables or disables the Y Pb or Pr component of the output serial digital video signals the EDH Error Detection Handling insertion and the output mode for an audio video timing measurement You can also set the resolution of the output serial digital video signals Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to ac
196. LG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator is equipped with five BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 14 LINK LINKA Figure 2 14 HDLG7 module connectors HD SDI IN Input connector for an HD SDI 4 2 2 video signal that you want to be upconverted NOTE Each pair of connectors LINK A and LINK B output the same signal LINK A Outputs the selected HD SDI dual link video test signal or an upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector LINK B Outputs the selected HD SDI dual link video test signal or an upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector 2 16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics HDVG7 module connectors The standard HDVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC connectors to output serial digital video signals Option BK adds two additional BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals See Figure 2 15 SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL 2 BLACK 2 Figure 2 15 HDVG7 module connectors Option BK NOTE The SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal and the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal SIGNAL 2 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal BLACK 1 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only BLACK 2 Outputs the selected serial digita
197. LLY TERMINATED TERM The license granted herein is effective upon acceptance by Customer and shall remain in effect until terminated as provided herein The license may be terminated by Customer at any time upon written notice to Tektronix The license may be terminated by Tektronix or any third party from whom Tektronix may have obtained a respective licensing right if Customer fails to comply with any term or condition and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice hereof from Tektronix or such third party Upon termination by either party Customer shall return to Tektronix or destroy the Program and all associated documentation together with all copies in any form LIMITED WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the media on which the Program is furnished and the encoding of the Program on the media will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 months from the date of shipment If any such medium or encoding proves defective during the warranty period Tektronix will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective medium Except as to the media on which the Program is furnished the Program is provided as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied Tektronix does not warrant that the functions contained in the Program will meet Customer s requirements or that the operation of the Program will be uninterrupted or error free In order to obtain service under this warran
198. LTC time code into the system If the LTC input rate and the genlock video input rate are compatible then the LTC Timing Status screen will show the timing relationship between the LTC frame and the video If the LTC input rate and genlock video input rate are not compatible then the LTC Timing Status screen will show the timing between the LTC input and the internal frame pulse used to register the incoming time Depending on which internal frame rate has been allocated the LTC Timing readout may be stable or may cycle though several possible values Regardless if the display is stable or cycling this number has limited utility since it is not related to the normal LTC to video relationship If the instrument is in internal reference mode then the LTC Timing Status readout and messages are disabled The LTC Timing Status screen shows the time between the reference datums and one of the following three messages 12M OK Indicates that the timing is within the window described in SMPTE 12M OK Indicates that the timing is within the window that the GPS7 is able to consistently assign the time code to the correct video frame TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 113 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Warning Indicates that the timing is near the threshold between frames The time code may be assigned to the adjacent video frame or may shift one frame if the timing changes slightly If the LTC timing
199. Link B Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted Link A amp B Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode Dual Link A and B outputs In the case of converting 1920x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048 1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio the two lowest number embedded audio groups groups 1 and 2 will be allowed on both Link A and B Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted 4 Press the BACK button to return to the main menu NOTE When you select the converter mode the 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN setting will automatically switch to HD Test Signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 215 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module HDLG7 module main menu Use the HDLG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the sampling structure pixel depth Select the signal of the alpha channel Set the timing offset between the Link A and Link B outputs Generate a moving picture Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the HDLG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button HDLG7 x STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits amp V HDLG7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits a HDLG7 x ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel gt A V HDLG7 x LINK OFFSET HDLG7 x 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HD Test Signal HDLG x MO
200. MAT button or select the test signal using the test signal front panel buttons such as COLOR BARS or LINEARITY To learn how to set the instrument to convertor mode refer to the following page See page 3 153 To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module gt Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus For example when the OUTPUT MODE menu is displayed pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow button allows you to select between output modes such as Level A Level B HD etc Refer to HD3G7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 178 NOTE In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the HD3G7 module These signal sets are located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module The HD3G7 module has two modes of operation converter or generator To select an output signal perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected mode of operation To select the Generator Use this mode to generate either 3 Gb s SDI or 1 5 Gb s HD SDI video test signals mode on the HD3G7 Select the output mode for the sig
201. MAT submenu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 60i and then press the ENTER button Connect the BLACK 3 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed Use the following procedure to check that the ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is functional Required equipment m NTSC PAL waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable E 75 Q terminator Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 Module installation and removal 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 3 Check that no error messages appear on the display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes SIGNAL output 5 Use the 75 Q BNC cable to connect the SIGNAL connector to one of the input connectors on the waveform monitor rear panel 6 Use the 75 Q terminator to terminate the other loop through connector on the waveform monitor rear panel 7 Press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 main menu shown below appears SMPTE Color Bars 8 Press the front panel FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC or PAL 9 Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal
202. Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Table 3 47 HDVG7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings VIDEO Y ON Pb ON Pr ON AV Timing Mode OFF TIMECODE requires GPS7 module be installed in mainframe SOURCE Disable Option BK BLACK FORMAT 1080 59 94i BLACK SIGNAL Black BLACK AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 24 bits BLACK AUDIO CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF BLACK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 ms HD RATE Non integer TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 243 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module E SDI7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 18 m SDI7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 40 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified E TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands t
203. Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 75 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module How to operate the DVG7 module 3 76 After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display a After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu appears as shown below DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 5 Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output See page 3 77 To select an output signal on the DVG7 module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to DVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 79 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module To select an output signal on the DVG7 module To output a signal from the DVG7 module you need to select a signal for
204. NAL KEY ASSIGN Assigns signal sets to a specific front panel test signal button The mainframe is shipped from the factory with signal sets corresponding to each button name already assigned For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button the three types of color bars signals 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars and SMPTE Color Bars are available for output Perform the following steps to assign signal sets to a specific test signal button 1 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the module to which you want to assign signal sets and then press the ENTER button This will display the following submenu to assign signal sets The first line shows the name of the test signal button and second line shows the name of the assigned signal set TG8000 HDVG7 COLOR BAR KEY COLOR BAR 3036 066 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the test signal button to which you want to assign a signal set for example COLOR BAR KEY 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the signal set you want to assign to the selected test signal button for example COLOR BAR 4 Press the ENTER button to assign the signal set to the selected test signal button 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all signal set assignments are completed TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics FRAME PICTURE KEY ASSIGN Assigns frame picture files downloaded to the TG8000 to the
205. NTSC with or without setup or PAL black burst and HDTV trilevel sync signals Individual format and timing control for each output Black burst with field ID and NTSC PAL color bars signals output Option CB Full remote control using Ethernet interface m Timecode generator with VITC when a GPS7 module is installed the BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above NOTE PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 63 BG7 Black Generator module How to operate the BG7 module 3 64 After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe r Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display i After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the BG7 module main menu appears as shown below BG x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 5 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus
206. OAD lt gt Select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 Stream Location HD Stream 1 i Progressive formats only 2 Interlaced formats only 3 3G B and DL formats only 4 OSH formats only 1970 225 Figure 3 93 HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu Continued 3 196 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Output Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Disable Continuous and Single Packet Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Parity Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Automatic and Manual parity Automatic parity is an 8 bit mode while Manual parity allows 10 bits Ifa 10 bit word is entered while in manual parity and the module is later set to automatic parity the correct 8 bits will be sent The entire 10 bit word is in system memory though so if the module is then reset to manual parity the entire 10 bit word entered by the user will be transmitted DID Press the ENTER button to edit the Data ID word You can set the Data ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data ID and exit Data ID editing SDID Press the ENTER button to edit the Secondary ID
207. ODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the SELECT FORMAT submenu A BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE SOURCE Time of Day BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE 30 DROP ENABLE DROP FRAME BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC VITC 1 Figure 3 39 BG7 module TIMECODE submenu Time of Day lt gt Program Time Disable lt gt Set the offset A gt ENABLE DROP FRAME DISABLE DROP FRAME ENTER lt gt VITC 1 To VITC submenu VITC 2 BACK 3036 021 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 71 BG7 Black Generator module 3 72 SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined from the GPS antenna E Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the BG7 module OFFSET Use this menu item to set a time offset for the BG7 module outputs from the timecode input from the GPS7 module You can enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the video signal of the GPS timecode hours minutes seconds video frames Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit After you se
208. OTE When you change the video format synchronization shock will occur the video format changes immediately at the output as you change the format selection Select the format you want then press the front panel ENTER button to access the SELECT SIGNAL submenu where you select the output signal to use See page 3 24 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 26 ID TEXT Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the BARS connector Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the ID TEXT submenu See page 3 25 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 23 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu ATG x BLACK 1 NTSC Black Burst lt gt m BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 NTSC and NTSC No Setup ack Burst ack Burst with Field REF omposite Sync omposite Blanking ubcarrier Drive Drive eld Reference m TrHOOWDW O Q D ack Burst lack Burst No Field REF composite Sync composite Blanking ubcarrier Drive Drive ield Reference PAL Pulse n lt TM Figure 3 12 ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu Use this menu to select an output signal for the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BARS connector The following figure shows the SELECT SIGNAL submenu m BARS NTSC an
209. OTHER test signal button This operation is required to output the frame picture files as a picture natural picture or test pattern Perform the following steps to assign a frame picture file to the OTHER test signal button 1 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the module to which you want to assign a frame picture file and press the ENTER button This will display the following submenu The second line shows the folder name that was created when the frame picture file was downloaded to the TG8000 mainframe TG8000 HDVG7 OTHER KEY 1080 60i 3036 067 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the folder in which the frame picture file is saved 3 Press the ENTER button to assign the frame picture file to the OTHER button Refer to the TG amp 000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about creating a frame picture file and downloading the file from a PC to the TG8000 mainframe NETWORK INFORMATION Use this menu to display all of the current network parameters Use the left lt 4 submenu or right gt arrow button to select a network parameter and display the assigned address The following selections are available IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address MAC Address and DHCP Server The following figure shows NETWORK INFORMATION submenu Select Information in the UTILITY NETWORK menu IP Address TG8000 UTILITY NETWORK INFO is IP Address 000 000 0
210. OVERLAY submenu To TIMING submenu To VIDEO submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY AVG7 x TIMING AVG7 x VIDEO ENTER BACK ENTER To APL submenu BACK 3036 015 v Figure 3 17 AVG7 module main menu 3 36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 37 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 38 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 43 VIDEO Sets the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output and enables or disables the signal output from CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 44 APL Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the signal output When you select this menu item and then press the ENTER button you will access the APL submenu See page 3 46 AVG7 module Use this menu to scroll th
211. PICTURE submenu 3 228 Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal up down or left right or randomly Use the up A or down V arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu A Set the sample number to be scrolled Set the line number to be scrolled Set the frame period to be scrolled Random Disable Enable v Figure 3 103 HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module Use this menu
212. POS INPUT and LTC NEG INPUT are available only in modules with the BLACK I REF IN connector TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module ADC BUS This diagnostic displays the condition of the Genlock input circuit Stuck A 12 bit display showing the bits stuck high H low L or OK m Short A 12 bit display showing any shorted adjacent lines SS NOTE For all bits to move the correct signal must be applied GENLOCK INPUT This diagnostic displays the following Min The minimum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal m Max The maximum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal LTC POS INPUT This diagnostic displays the following Min Raw The minimum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input m Max Raw The maximum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input LTC NEG INPUT This diagnostic displays the following m Min Raw The minimum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input m Max Raw The maximum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input GPS7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the GPS7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 24 GPS7 module factory default settings Submenu Menu item name item name Settings REFER
213. PS7 should have a signal that is 18 dB or greater above the ambient level For example for a 35 dB antenna the allowed cable loss is 35 18 17 dB See Figure 3 53 Cables Attenuation varies significantly depending on cable type Cable loss is about 13 dB 100 ft for a miniature coaxial cable like the Belden 1855 while for a RG11 style like the Belden 7731 the loss is only 5 5 dB 100 ft This correlates to an allowable length of 130 ft for the small cable to over 300 ft for the larger cable A booster amplifier can be added if more length is needed as shown in the optional block in the signal path system See Figure 3 53 If a 20 dB amplifier is added then 20 dB more cable loss can be accommodated This equates to another 150 ft of small coax or 360 ft of large coax Although the GPS7 input and most of the other components are 50 Q either 50 Q or 75 Q cables can be used in most installations The reflections from the impedance mismatch will not cause significant changes in the system because the signal is narrow band and the cable loss is usually many dBs However you should not mix short cable lengths of different impedances as this might create reflections with the potential to cause signal degradation Amplification The GPS7 provides either 3 3 V or 5 V DC power to drive the amplified antenna and booster amplifier The power is carried on the same coax as the GPS signal and can be turned off if the antenna is powered by a
214. PS7 x TIME SETUP SELECT MENU lt gt SAMSYNG menu Sea TIME OF DAY menu el LEAP SECOND menu BACK ALARM TIME menu ALARM DELAY menu GPS7 x SELECT LTC 163 an Ix 1 gt LTC 2 To selected submenu LTC 1 e LTES LTC 4 BACK INPUT 1 ENTER GPS7 x SELECT GPIO lt gt OUTPUT 1 To selected submenu INPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 BACK ENTER ePsf TE TA To DIAGNOSTICS submenu Press ENTER for menu 3036 081 Figure 3 55 GPS7 module main menu 3 112 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module STATUS Displays the status of the GPS7 module The top line displays the selected timecode reference and signal presence When the internal reference frequency is used as the timecode reference the top line displays Internal NOTE When GPS is set as the timecode reference the top line includes the Figure of Merit FOM rating for the relative strength of the GPS signal See page 3 104 Figures of Merit FOM The bottom line displays the additional status of the GPS7 module Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to view the following status displays Genlock amplitude and VITC line number m Date and time of the currently used timecode reference TC timing and status NOTE The LTC Timing Status screen shows the relationship between the LTC frame and either the genlock video or the internal frame pulse used to latch the
215. R Pulse amp Bar 2T 4T 10T Pulse amp Bar 2T 4T 20T Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing 2 5 MHz Bowtie 500 kHz Bowtie Active Picture Timing Co Siting Pulse SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 DVG7 module main menu CCIR 331 G2 Use the DVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks m Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signals Scroll the active picture area of the output signal m Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio group m Enable or disable the video output signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 79 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the DVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars A V ENTER DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE gt To MOVING PICTURE submenu BACK A V ENTER DVG7 x OVERLAY r To OVERLAY submenu peewee BACK A V Group 1 ENTER DVG7 x AUDIO EMBEDDED Group 2 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 1 lt gt Group 3 Group 4 BACK A Vv ENTER DVG7 x TIMING gt To TIMING submenu pe BACK A V ENTER DVG7 x VIDEO To VIDEO submenu BACK A V ENTER DVG7 x BLACK OPTION To BLACK submenu BACK l Vv Option B
216. Saving Time See page 3 134 PROGRAM TIME menu Use this submenu to configure the program time parameters See page 3 136 JAM SYNC menu Use this submenu to set parameters for the Jam Sync function See page 3 137 LEAP SECOND menu Use this submenu to configure how the module handles leap seconds See page 3 138 ALARM TIME menu Use this submenu to configure a time based alarm See page 3 139 m ALARM DELAY menu Use this submenu to configure a time to defer reporting errors so that brief errors are ignored See page 3 140 SELECT LTC Selects which LTC output to configure for timecode parameters Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the output you want to configure LTC 1 LTC 2 LTC 3 or LTC 4 and then press the ENTER button to access the LTC submenu for the selected output See page 3 142 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 115 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu 3 116 SELECT GPIO Sets how the GPS7 General Purpose Interface GPT is configured Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the GPI input or output you want to configure INPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 and then press the ENTER button to access the GPI submenu for the selected input or output When you select INPUT 1 you will access the GPI submenu See page 3 144 When you select OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 you will access the GPO submenu for
217. See page 3 120 or the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu See page 3 69 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 65 BG7 Black Generator module BG7 module BLACK submenu Select the BLACK1 BLACK 2 BLACK 3 or BLACK 4 output in the main menu Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst with 10 Field ID 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 White SMPTE EG1 Color Bar 40 Flat Field Convergence Pluge and Luma Reference Shallow Ramp NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite BG7 x BLACK x TEST SIGNAL m Black Burst BG7 x BLACK x TIMING Press ENTER for menu BG7 x BLACK x TIMECODE Press ENTER for menu el Kk These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to non integer 2 These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to integer To BLACK TIMING submenu To BLACK TIMECODE submenu Use this menu to set the signal format timing and timecode parameters for the selected output The following figure shows the BLACK submenu 2 1080 59 94i 1080 60i NTSC 1080 23 98sf 1080 50i BG7 x BLACK x FORMAT lt D gt NTSC J 108029 97p 1080 24sf m NTSC el PAL 1080 23 98p 1080 30p 72059 94p 1080 25p 1080 24p 720 60p 720 50p 13 l BG7 x BLACK x FIELD REFERENCE lt 1 i m Disable el Black Burst 5 Black Burst No Field Reference 6 Black Burst 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 White 100 Color Bar Over Red 75 Col
218. TER to confirm the change and set the time NOTE The manual time of day setting is not automatically reapplied when the instrument power is cycled If the instrument powers on in Internal mode the time of day will be acquired from the real time clock in the instrument The time zone offset must be set to maintain the correct relationship between UTC and local time 3 132 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to set the time zone offset for your location in reference to UTC TIME ZONE OFFSET Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button submenu tO Select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM After you select an offset digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change The following figure shows the TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu Select TIME ZONE OFFSET menu in the main menu ENTER A Eo TIME SETUP TIME ZONE OFFSET lt gt Edit offset 00 J 1970 211 Figure 3 64 GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu NOTE When the DST event occurs the scheduled offset will be added to the time zone offset and the DST schedule will be cleared This allows for a new sche
219. Table of Contents HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level A 2K x 1080 ccc ece cece eee eee 3 153 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 c cece eee eee 3 154 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2K x 1080 cece cece cece e ees 3 154 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2 HD 1080 c cece eee eee 3 154 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level B 2 HD 720 ccc cece cece ee eee 3 154 HD3G7 module Generator mode HD SDI 1920 x 1080 cece cee ce cence eee 3 154 HD3G7 module Generator mode HD SDI 1280 x 720 ccc cece eee ence eee eenes 3 154 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 formats 3 155 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 ccc cee cece eee 3 155 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level B 2xHD 1920 x 1080 0 3 156 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons 0ccecee eee 3 159 HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters 00 cceee eee eneeneeeees 3 169 HD3G7 module factory default settings cece cece cece ence nese tense eaeennees 3 205 HDLG7 module signal formats 0 0 00 cece cece ete ene cece ene eee eee e nent ene nents 3 210 HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal buttons 3 212 HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the
220. Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 99 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module To configure the GPS7 module GPS7 module oven calibration procedures 3 100 When you first receive your GPS7 module there are a few things you need to do and a few things you should know before putting it into service This section includes information about the following Performing an internal frequency calibration Understanding the GPS antenna system Understanding signal quality m Understanding time flow Configuring module settings If you are installing a GPS7 module into an existing TG8000 mainframe it is suggested that you calibrate the mainframe oscillator oven as part of the installation and qualification process If you have received your GPS7 module already installed in a mainframe you can set the internal frequency after putting the module in its operating environment and allowing it to reach a stable operating condition Information about the Oven Calibration menu is available in the GPS7 module CAL OVEN submenu section See page 2 46 NOTE Perform the mainframe internal frequency calibration at least once a year to compensate for oscillator drift With a GPS7 module installed this calibration can be done while the instrument is in service If your GPS7 module is installed in a TG700 mainframe you need to also characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage Refer to the TG700 User Manual for mor
221. The result can be thought of as a vertically arranged sweep signal Ky parameter Display name KY V Freq Units cycles per active picture height c aph The Ky V Freq parameter sets the initial vertical frequency of the pattern it is analogous to Kx rotated 90 clockwise To see the effects of this parameter set it to a low number and adjust a waveform monitor to view one or two fields of the SDI7 output The variation in the dc voltage level from line to line will give the field waveform the appearance of a sampled sine wave especially at a Ky of around 5 to 10 c aph the sinusoid can become difficult to discern at higher frequencies Note that in the Y vertical parameters the c aph units translate directly into visible cycles down the frame The Vertical Sine zone plate is a Ky only zone plate See Figure 3 118 Figure 3 118 A Ky only zone plate 3 270 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Ky2 parameter Display name KY 2 V Sweep Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Ky V Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in vertical frequency down the frame Ky compares to Kx as Ky compares to Kx Again a good way to see the effect of Ky is to view the field on a waveform monitor With KY set to 0 0 a Ky coefficient of 10 will result in the apparent vertical sine wave changing from DC to 10 c aph from the
222. V SOTWNY 13S440 l 19 MOVIE LSd9 MOVIE O NINIL LAdLNO ANIDNA OL 15S440 OL 011 Sd9 Pon ONIWIL LAdGLNO 13S440 l ANIONA L a onog apog _ aounos apog _ Sul anos 8pod oul ANIONS AWS JOWOUyA LIA s ual o Of AW1dSI0 AVG 40 ANI 1393H SNOILVINDWO WL HOOd4 9 13S440 YsAYAS diNS 13S440 31N YAOY SdO espo NOILVWYOSNI ANOZ AWIL x OAS dV YA INGSHOS ASYL J NVH 1S0 Aldd OAS dV41 ndui J pe y 91T Jepeey OLIA ANIL ANTWA WVeoOu d LASSY LAS SWIL TWWNUYSLNI JSN iagram flow block di ime T Figure 3 54 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 106 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS RCVR The GPS signal can be selected as the source for a time of day clock used for timecode outputs and as a phase reference for video outputs The GPS signal carries the time represented as the number of weeks and number of seconds since the GPS Epoch 0 00 00 UTC January 6 1980 For example 12 00 00 UTC on November 5 2008 is represented as 1504 weeks plus 302 400 seconds An additional 14 leap seconds that have passed between January 1980 and November 2008 are also signalled in messages from the GPS satellite system Internal Time Set If you want to set Time Setup to internal mode enter the current date and t
223. VERLAY BORDER lt gt Enable Text Circle Border Enable Disable Figure 3 125 SDI7 module OVERLAY submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual To LOGO Submenu To ID TEXT Submenu SDI x x OVERLAY CIRCLE To CIRCLE Submenu Press ENTER for menu el BACK ENTER SDI x x OVERLAY BURNT IN TIMECODE To BURNT IN TIMECODE Submenu Press ENTER for menu e 3036 095 3 285 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 286 LOGO Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 287 ID TEXT Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 289 CIRCLE Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 293 BURNT IN TIMECODE Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu where you can enable or disable the burnt in timecode and set the size and position of the timecode overlay on the output signal See page 3 293 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blin
224. VING PICTURE V lt gt Figure 3 98 HDLG7 module main menu 3 216 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 GBR 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 12 bits 2K GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 10 bits 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits Use Y G Channel 50 Flat Field 0 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field To LINK OFFSET submenu HD Test Signal Projector Test Pattern To MOVING PICTURE submenu 3036 046 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field 100 Flat Field TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for each of the operating modes converter and generator Converter Mode The figure below shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the converter mode HDLG7 x STATUS CONVERTER Normal 1080 60i GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits CONVERTER Normal Indicates that the incoming HD SDI video stream is being converted in a normal mode The other choice is Y to GBR where the incoming Y data is placed on the G B and R channels on the output Y to GBR is only selectable in the GBR sampling structure 1080 60i Indicates the incoming si
225. Video Generator 3 150 HDLG7 HD Dual Link video generator 3 207 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 3 221 SDI7 2 Channel SD HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 244 N NETWORK INFORMATION submenu 2 37 NETWORK SETUP submenu 2 38 2 47 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual O Operating basics 2 1 Optional accessories 1 3 Options International power cords 1 4 Option 3G 3 Gb s SDI signal generation for SDI7 module 1 4 Option BK Serial Digital Black Output for DVG7 and HDVG7 modules 1 4 Option CB NTSC PAL Color Bars signals for BG7 module 1 4 Option D1 Calibration Test Data Report 1 4 OPTIONS submenu 2 34 P Power connector 2 6 Power supply module replacement 1 5 Preface xix PRESET submenu 2 23 Product Description 1 1 R Rackmount installation 1 6 Related Manuals xx Removal module 1 10 Restore presets and user data 2 63 S Safety Summary xii SDI7 ANC PAYLOAD submenu 3 302 Ancillary data payload example 3 307 AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 3 294 BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu 3 293 CALIBRATION submenu 3 313 character set installation 3 289 CIRCLE submenu 3 292 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 310 Entering the option key 3 247 Factory default settings 3 314 font file installation 3 289 Functional checks 1 40 ID TEXT submenu 3 289 Installing custom picture files 3 261 Installing enhanced signal sets 3 260 LOGO submenu 3 287 Main menu 3 275
226. Wide ramp that spans the legal limit range 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats for all three channels On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level the valid level and the limit level Shallow Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of shallow ramps that together span the range between legal limits 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats Each bit value is held for 16 pixels for 10 bit formats and for 4 pixels for 12 bit formats There is overlap between the end of one ramp and the start of the next ramp Color Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of ramps across the colors available in the valid RGB gamut Each set of ramps transitions between adjacent hues red yellow green cyan magenta blue red From the top of the pattern the first three rows of ramps are at 25 50 and 75 saturation The fourth row of ramps includes fully saturated colors at 100 value The next three rows of ramps are at 75 50 and 25 value The bottom row of ramps is monochrome 3 254 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description FLAT FIELD 0 Flat Field Black 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field White Full frame monochrome flat fields The factory installed patterns include 0 black
227. X X X X X X X X Table 3 32 HD3G7 module Generator mode HD SDI 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 33 HD3G7 module Generator mode HD SDI 1280 x 720 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X 3 154 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual To select the Converter mode on the HD3G7 module HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Use this mode to convert an HD SDI signal to a 3G SDI signal Choose a compatible input and output from the following three tables and then connect the input signal to the SDI IN connector on the HD3G7 module 2 Configure the output mode signal format and sample structure as described on the following pages See page 3 156 To select the output mode on the HD3G7 module 3 Press the OTHER test signal button to initiate the converter mode NOTE Press any other test signal button to cancel the converter operation and return the instrument to generator mode Table 3 34 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 formats HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 5994 60 2398 24 25 29 97 30 Output For
228. Y LOGO X Position 0 0 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position DVG x OVERLAY LOGO Y Position 0 0 APH gt Set the vertical position DVG x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF DVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Figure 3 45 DVG7 module LOGO submenu 1 gt Select OFF or a logo Save the display position for the logo X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings 3 84 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set ID TEXT submenu the displa
229. You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal TIMING submenu reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu AWVG AWVG7 AWVG7 x TIMING 1080 59i Vertical 0 Line s x TIMING 1080 59i Horizontal Coarse 0 000 msec x TIMING 1080 59i Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec lt gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps al gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps lt ee Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps Figure 3 33 AWVG7 module TIMING submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 59 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module NOTE
230. a channel is selected The channel can contain a duplicate of the Y or G channel data or a flat field signal Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Use Y G Channel or to select a 0 to 100 Flat Field in 10 increments and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection 2xHD STREAM CONTENT This menu item appears only when the signal format is set to 2xHD Selects the content for the first and second HD signals on link A and link B Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Test Signal Test Signal Test Signal Black or Black Test Signal and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 283 SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle that is overlaid on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 285 AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Once the group is selected press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 294 SDI7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu If Level B mapping is selec
231. a delay between the time when a signal warning is detected and when it is reported on the GPI output Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before a GPO signal warning message is displayed An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Black 2 Blank on Unlock Use this feature to set a delay between the time when an unlock is detected and when Black 2 is blanked Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before the BLACK 2 output is blanked for a loss of GPS signal lock An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE The BLACK 2 output must be configured to be blanked before this delay will be used See page 3 120 GPS7 module BLACK submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3
232. a nominal load Connect the second BNC T and 75 Q terminator to the antenna system to exceed the allowed antenna current TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 27 Getting started 10 Check that the LED on the module rear panel is a steady red This indicates a short circuit 11 Remove the terminators and the connection to the voltmeter Lock to GPS through antenna CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select 1 Set the antenna voltage as needed by the antenna in the test system 2 Navigate to the signal quality menu a Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select STATUS from the GPS7 module menu c Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Signal Quality 3 Connect the GPS input signal feed to the antenna input on the rear of the module 4 Check that the signal quality changes from No Signal to Low Signal to Acquiring satellites to Adjusting phase to Locked NOTE It is okay if some steps are skipped Depending on the signal level it may take from a few seconds to several minutes to leave the No Signal state 5 Make sure that the instrument has been running for at least 20 minutes before performing the next step
233. a of the signal AVG7 AWVG7 DVG7 HD3G7 HDLG7 HDVG7 and SDI7 User defined ancillary data payload HD3G7 and SDI7 Reference generator performance level Ethernet interface for remote control upgrading the instrument firmware and downloading or copying various user data such as test signal files logo files and preset files General Purpose Interface GPI port for recalling instrument presets and outputting alarm signals USB port for upgrading the instrument firmware and backing up or restoring user data such as test signal files logo files and preset files User replaceable Power Supply module A signal library software application packages and product documentation for both the TG8000 and TG700 generators are included in the TG8000 and TG700 Software Library and Documentation DVD which is provided as a standard accessory with the product You can use the contents of the DVD to execute the following operations Upload and download files such as signal files logo files and preset files Download signals from the signal library to the generator mainframe Create a logo logo file to be inserted into the test signal Create a frame picture file using the generation of a picture or test pattern TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Module compatibility between the TG8000 and TG700 mainframes Accessories Getting started Each of the modules that was designed to operate in the Tektronix TG700 TV Signal G
234. ader before the program The alarm time could be set at 00 59 55 00 to signal a five second countdown before the program start perhaps to signal a change from color bars to black within the pre program leader GPI Out The GPS7 module has two General Purpose Interface GPT outputs either of which may be configured to begin when the program time matches a specified alarm time Understanding the capabilities operating environment antenna system and other requirements of the GPS7 module can help you decide how to configure it to best meet the needs of your specific applications The GPS7 menu trees and menu descriptions can help you configure the module See page 3 111 GPS7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module main menu Use the GPS7 module main menu to perform the following tasks m View the status of the module and signal View diagnostics results for the module Select the LTC output or GPI input and output Set the antenna voltage time of day and other time related parameters m Generate a Black 1 Black 2 or Black 3 signal Set the timing reference source Internal Genlock or GPS signal E Set the Genlock Timing Set the Time Of Day source Internal VITC input or GPS signal NOTE Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the REF IN input connector shared with the BLACK 1 output connector Modules without REF IN do not support Gen
235. ady assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the HDVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 101 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A F TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE enter pars near ruarrio mucrersr sweep Q 0 MoniToR PULSE TIMING so omer Y use FORMAT Cmr EXT TIME FAULT i 3036 023 Figure 3 101 Front panel test signal buttons You can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the HDVG7 module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set Table 3 45 HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color
236. aeeas 2 18 Figure 2 17 Mainframe main menu 0 cece eee ence ence eee teen eens teen nett tenets 2 22 Figure 2 18 PRESET submenu s 3cccsisvos iceaanaiiheceateungenonseandieedhaanea ties onmeduaneneaasananteees 2 23 Figure 2 19 SEQUENCE submenu 0 ccecc eee ecee eee cee teens eee eeeneeneeeeeeeenseneeeaenaeeas 2 25 Figure 2 20 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu 0 ce cceee eee ene ence eee eeaeeeeneetaeeaeeas 2 26 Figure 2 21 UTILITY submentt 3 i scsccdvarieciundats Leniidaniad aa banaue 2 28 Figure 2 22 UTILITY submenu Continued c cece cece eee eee e nsec eens esse nese eaeennees 2 29 Figure 2 23 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu 00 ccc ecce cence eee e nee ne eee ee eneeneeneeeeees 2 36 Figure 2 24 NETWORK INFORMATION submenu 0 20 cecceeeeceeeeee eee eeeeneeneeeaeeas 2 37 Figure 2 25 NETWORK SETUP submenu ccecceeceee eee eee ee eneeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeaenaeeas 2 38 Figure 2 26 GPI ALARM SELECT submenu 00s ce ccecc ence ee eee eee eeeeeeeeaeeeeneenaeeaeas 2 40 Figure 2 27 AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu cccceec cence eee e ence ene e ea eeneeeeneennees 2 41 Figure 2 28 Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu ccccceen cence cence nesses eneee enone 2 42 Figure 2 29 Internal frequency calibration menu 0 cece cece ee ene en ene eee ea eee eneetaeeaeas 2 46 Figure 2 30 Pin connections for a crossover Ethernet cable
237. aes 3 274 SDI7 module main menu 60 cece cece cece eee ence eee eee ne tne eee ene ene eneeeenneneeneeeneenees 3 275 SDI7 module factory default settings c cece cece cece eee eee een nee e ene ene e tne eee es 3 314 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual iii Table of Contents Index Index iv TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual List of Fig ures Figure 1 1 Installing or removing the instrument into or from the rack 0 ce eeeee eee ene ees 1 7 Figure 1 2 TG8000 slot numbering 0 cece cece ence een eee eee e eee eee e ene seen nese tenets 1 11 Figure 1 3 Removing the blank panel 0 cec cece ccc n cee een e ene eee nets eae nett eae ennees 1 12 Figure 1 4 Installing a module 00 c eee ce cece eee ene cede tne eee eae ene ene eeaeeaeneeneeteeeaeeas 1 13 Figure 1 5 Securing a module 00 cece cece eee eee eee e cette eee eee eases eneeeeeeaeneeneeneenaeeas 1 13 Figure l 6 Removing a Module escassier re dedccibslee rand nedea s EE EEEE EE cant bei tedoceene os 1 14 Figure 2 1 TG8000 front panel 0c ccc cece ener e nen nen ne sedin EEE en srr EES 2 1 Figure 2 2 TG8000 rear patel ccssceeevesndcecscceasessnasegeedesuceeeeseasdeaeesaddseeeenenasooens 2 6 Figure 2 3 AG7 module connectors 0 ccc cece eee cece cee n cence ee eee eae eneeneeeaeeeneeteeteeenenneed 2 7 Figure 2 4 Location of J452
238. ainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe ad Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display 9 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94i 100 Color Bars Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output See page 3 223 To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module g S Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to HDVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 225 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module To output a signal from the HDVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the front panel MODUL
239. al Operating basics HD3G7 module connectors The HD3G7 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module provides four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 13 HD3G7 6 eam SZ SIGNAL 2 TRIGGER 1970 181 Figure 2 13 HD3G7 module connectors SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected HD SDI serial digital video test signal or an upconverted version of the input signal on the SDI IN connector SIGNAL 2 The Signal 2 output can be configured to output a test pattern where it produces the same output as the Signal 1 output or to output a Black signal in the same format as the Signal 1 output See page 3 201 HD3G7 module SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu SDI IN Input connector for an HD SDI 4 2 2 video signal that you want to be upconverted TRIGGER Outputs a selected signal The available choices for output are system clock 148 5 MHz frame field pulse once per video frame or field or a line pulse once per video line When an interlaced format is selected the frame field pulse selection produces a frame rate square wave trigger output which is low during field one and high during field two The frame pulse selection produces the once per field pulse for all other formats NOTE When the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection is set to Test Pattern the SIGNAL I and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 15 Operating basics HDLG7 module connectors The HD
240. al Link Generator module HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module This manual is composed of the following sections Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your TG8000 system and provides an Incoming Inspection procedure The section also describes the mainframe options and how to install modules Operating Basics provides an overview of the front panel controls and rear panel connections Modules provides operating information for each of the modules that can be added to the TG8000 mainframe TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xix Preface Product documentation The following table lists the user documents for the TG8000 and its related modules Table i TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation Availability Document Tektronix Part Number Description Print Web CD User Manual 071 3036 xx English Describes how to install operate and v v v 071 3037 xx Japanese configure the instrument V V 071 3038 xx Russian Vv v PC Tools Technical Reference 077 0684 xx Describes how to use the PC tools software v v that is supplied with the instrument Specifications and 077 0685 xx Lists the product specifications and v v Performance Verification provides procedures for verifying the performance of the instrument Programmer Manual 077 0686 xx Provides programming information for the v v mainframe and related modules Service M
241. al button to return to generator mode operation See page 3 155 To select the Converter mode on the HD3G7 module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 163 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal 3 164 sets In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the FLAT FIELD button on the HD3G7 module These signals are located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument Perform the following steps to install the enhanced signal sets 1 Install the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD into the DVD drive on your computer 2 Using the DVD browser navigate to the following directory Test Signals gt HD3G7 Signal Library gt Enhanced Signal Set The Enhanced Signal Set directory contains the following files Monochrome Fields xml includes all monochrome flat fields from 0 to 100 in 10 increments Color Fields xml includes color fields for six primary and secondary colors at both 100 and 75 values SMPTE RP431 2 Color Patches xml includes full field patterns for each of the Black White and Black Dark Gray steps plus the 1 and _2 color patches 3 Use FTP to locate and copy the desired signal set file s from the DVD to the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory on your TG8000 generator Instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transf
242. alue from 1 to 1 frame of the selected signal format in 1 line steps Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line of the selected signal format in 1 clock 18 5 ns steps Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset You can set the value from 10 ns to 10 ns in 0 1 ns steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 43 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module VIDEO submenu 3 44 Use this menu to perform the following tasks Set the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output Enable or disable the signal output of each channel Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a GBR signal is being output Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu AVG x VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 a AVG Zs VIDEO GBR SYNC TAO ON All Channels AVG a VIDEO G ON o VIDEO B a de VIDEO R AVG 4 VIDEO SCH PHASE 0 deg V Figure 3 24 AVG7 module VIDEO submenu lt l gt lt gt Ie ee ee lt I gt CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite CH1 2 3 Composites Sync ON Green Sync ON All Channels ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 180 deg to 180 deg
243. ame Number Asynchronous 3 186 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module STATUS Use this menu to enable or disable the embedded audio output for the selected group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection CHANNEL Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to choose channel 1 2 3 or 4 and then press the ENTER button to enter the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu The CHANNEL submenu allows you to set the frequency amplitude click rate and channel origin ID for the selected audio channel The following figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select CHANNEL in the AUDIO submenu HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Status Active lt gt Set the status ENTER gt lt gt Set the frequency V HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Frequency 1000 Hz HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x lt gt Set the amplitude Amplitude 20 dBFS HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Audio Click OFF lt gt Set the click rate ENTER HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x a z gt Set the channel origin Channel Origin A1 1 J 3036 043 Figure 3 88 HD3G7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Status Use this menu to set the status of the individual channel Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select between Active
244. ame formats this produces a frame rate square wave that is low during field one and high during field two In progressive formats the output is high during the vertical blanking period producing a field rate pulse Line Pulse The trigger pulse output is high during the horizontal blanking period producing a line rate pulse 1 The Frame Field Pulse and Line Pulse signals are derived from the EAV and SAV XYZ byte H V and F bits just prior to the parallel data entering the serializer therefore these pulses can be used to approximate the signal timing HD3G7 module Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between a Test Signal or a SECONDARY OUTPUT Black output for the secondary Signal 2 BNC connector and then press the submenu ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When set for a Test Signal the Signal 2 output is the same as the Signal 1 output When set to Black the black signal is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 1 output TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 201 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 202 Use this menu to view operation parameters for the HD3G7 module Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Selection by the DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS PLL STATUS Jit Unlk
245. an be used to reduce error in measuring attenuation at a given frequency Set the Horz Frequency parameter to a low value and measure the amplitude of the entire line Next calculate the 3 dB point 0 707 x the low frequency amplitude Finally increase the Horz Frequency parameter until the system response for the whole line is at the calculated 3 dB level and read the 3 dB frequency directly from the instrument display Since the ZP Amplitude parameter is adjustable for each of these signals you can measure the response at 100 60 or any other level as needed These same techniques can be used to measure vertical or diagonal response by selecting the appropriate zoneplate signal 3 274 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 module main menu SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Use the SDI7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the video signal output mode Change the sample structure and color space Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Control the embedded audio characteristics frequency amplitude click rate and sampling rate Set the timing offset of the outputs relative to an internal reference signal or an external reference signal Enable or disable ancillary timecode and set timecode parameters Enable or disable the discrete components of the video output sig
246. anual 077 0687 xx Describes how to service the mainframe to v the module level such as circuit boards and fuses and provides information about servicing generator modules Declassification and Security Instructions 077 0688 xx Describes how to clear or sanitize the data v storage memory devices in the product for customers with data security concerns Release Notes 077 0689 xx Describes the new features improvements v and limitations of the instrument firmware Video Sync Pulse Generator and Electronic Changeover Unit System Integration Technical Reference 077 0563 xx Provides information for system Vv Vv integrators who are designing systems for high definition HD and standard definition SD digital video content where Tektronix electronic changeover units and video sync pulse generators are to be deployed XX TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Getting started This section contains the following information to get you started using the TG8000 generator Product description Product description List of instrument accessories and options Initial product inspection procedure Installation instructions mainframe and modules Functional check procedures The TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator is a multiformat TV signal generator platform supporting both analog and digital video standards The TG8000 consists of a mainframe and up to four plug in modules
247. arning appears which means that the FPGA firmware might need to be upgraded TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 311 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Selection by the DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu SDI x x DIAGNOSTICS PLL STATUS Flex0 Lock Flex1 Lock SDI x x DIAGNOSTICS DDS STATUS DDSO Phase Lock DDS Phase Lock SDI x x DIAGNOSTICS TEMPERATURES Board Temp 44C FPGA Temp 46 C SDI x x DIAGNOSTICS FPGA VERSION Current 1 1 Expected 1 1 Ok SDI7 xx DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 1 1 2V 1 2V OK 1 2A 1 2V OK SDI7 x x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 2 3 3V 3 4V OK 3 3VA 3 1V OK SDI7 lt x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 3 1 5V 1 6V OK 3 0VA 3 1V OK SDI7 xx DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 4 1 8V 1 9V OK Dref 1 0V Ok A 1970 226 V Figure 3 139 SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 312 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module VOLTAGE MON 1 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 2 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 3 This diagno
248. arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A Cc N TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE Ca enter Bars unear FLarFLo mutrersr sweep Monor Pulse TIMING so omer Y use FORMAT Cmr EXT TIME FAULT Figure 3 41 Front panel test signal buttons You can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the signal sets that are assigned to each test signal button and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 17 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set 525 270 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 3 Channel Ramp 5 Step B Y Valid Ramp Limit Ramp Modulated Ramp Oversize Ramp R Y Valid Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Y Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 5
249. at output signal and timing offset relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 When you select any of these and press the ENTER button you will access the OUTPUT submenu to set the parameters of the selected output See page 3 12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 9 AGL7 Analog Genlock module AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu Use this menu to select the genlock source for the mainframe and the installed modules set the timing offset and set the instrument actions when lock is lost Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the GENLOCK submenu Select GENLOCK in the main menu AGL7 1 GENLOCK SOURCE Internal Internal 525 SYNC lt bes NTSC Burst 625 SYNC NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID HD SYNC PAL Burst CW To TIMING submenu Except when Internal is selected 1 gt Go Internal Frequency Stay Current Frequency 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group 6 250 Hz PAL and 50 Hz Group 1 gt 15 000 Hz 60 Hz Group 2 997 Hz 23 98 Hz Group 3 000 Hz 24 Hz Group Keep Composite Timing AGL7 1 GENLOCK FRAME RESET CW 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group 3036 011 Figure 3 5 AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu SOURCE Selects the signal source to genlock the mainframe and the installed modules Use the left lt 4
250. ater than f 2 dividing the displayed value by the sampling frequency will give the number of complete DC f 2 DC cycles per line For example in a standard with sampling frequency of 74 25 MHz a horizontal sweep frequency of 148 5 MHz will result in approximately two complete frequency sweeps across the picture V Sine Vertical Frequency c aph The vertical frequency is actually the Ky coefficient The maximum frequency c aph corresponds to the number of active video lines in a field of the active video standard For example when an 1125 line system is output which has 1080 active lines Ky can be any value between 540 and 540 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency maximum c aph or The vertical sweep frequency is actually the Ky 2 coefficient multiple For numbers greater than maximum dividing the displayed value by that maximum will give twice the number of complete DC max DC sweeps per field sweeps Ky2 Ky 2 For example in a standard with 1080 lines per field a vertical sweep frequency of 2160 c aph2 would result in one complete frequency sweep down the picture 3 266 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters Zone plate amplitude parameter Below the pattern control parameter in each of the parameter menus are the dependent parameters The dependent parameters are the same for all the zone plate patterns
251. ating To 3 000 m 9 842 feet Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 C each 300 m above 1 5 km Nonoperating To 15 000 m 49 212 feet Leave space for cooling by ensuring standard side clearance for rack mounting or 2 inches 5 1 cm of side clearance for benchtop use Also ensure sufficient rear clearance approximately 2 inches so that cables are not damaged by sharp bends For complete specifications for the instrument refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference provided on the DVD that shipped with your instrument TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Power connection The TG8000 operates from a single phase power source with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground The line conductor is fused for over current protection A protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the locking power cord is essential for safe operation A CAUTION The instrument does not have a power switch When you connect the power cable to the AC line connector the instrument powers on AC power requirements Check that your location provides the proper electrical power requirements as listed in the following table See Table 1 4 Table 1 4 AC line power requirements Parameter Description Line Voltage Range 100 240 VAC WARNING To reduce the risk of fire and shock ensure that the mains supply voltage fluctuations do not exceed 1
252. ator User Manual 3 193 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu 3 194 The ancillary data payload can carry non video information such as an Active Format Description AFD Closed Caption information or other metadata NOTE The ancillary inserter can place the data packet anywhere in the field and can overwrite any of the ancillary or video data with a few exceptions the inserter will not overwrite embedded audio or CRC Use care to not overwrite important information Use this menu to set the ancillary data payload structure The ancillary data payload can include information to supplement the video stream including the Data Identifier DID Secondary Data Identifier SDID Data Count DC User Data Words UDW and a Checksum CS The Data Identifier DID and Secondary Data Identifier SDID indicate the type of data contained in the packet The Data Count indicates the number of User Data Words to follow and the User Data Words UDW comprise the actual payload carried in the ancillary data The HD3G7 module addresses User Data Words 000 through 254 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module The following figures show the ANC PAYLOAD submenu Select ANC PAYLOAD in the MAIN menu HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Parity Automatic lt gt Set the payload output lt gt S
253. aveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH B button on the waveform monitor Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH C button on the waveform monitor TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 15 16 17 18 19 20 Getting started Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor Press the test signal button again to output another test signal in the same signal set Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes You do not need to perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Disconnect the BNC cable from the upper or lower CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors and then connect the BNC cables to the lower or upper CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Repeat steps 10 through 18 for the lower or upper output channels BG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the BG7 Black Generator module check is functional Required equipment NTSC PAL waveform monitor HDTV waveform monitor m 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe S
254. ays the following Flex0 Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator for output channel 1 SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors This readout should show Lock locked An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe Flex Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator for output channel 2 SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors This readout should show Lock locked An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module DDS STATUS This diagnostic displays the following DDSO Phase Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with the internal frame pulse for output channel 1 SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors This readout should show Lock locked An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe DDSI Phase Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with the internal frame pulse for output channel 2 SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors This readout should show Lock locked An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe TEMPERATURES This diagnostic displays the temperature of the SDI7 module board and FPGA FPGA VERSION This diagnostic displays the current and expected FPGA versions If there is a discrepancy between the two a w
255. blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 229 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module 3 230 HDVG7 module LOGO submenu Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the display position of the logo Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG8000 Select Lago in the OVERLAY submenu Select OFF or a logo HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF l HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO X Position 00 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO lt I Y Position 00 APH Set the vertical position HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Save the display position for the logo Figure 3 105 HDVG7 module LOGO submenu Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled X Position Sets t
256. button TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 26 Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode 27 Press the BACK button to return to the STATUS menu which should now look like the one below HD3G7 x CONVERTER 3G A 1080 59 941 YCbCr 422 10b 28 Check that the STATUS display shows 1080 59 54i as the input 29 Press the up A arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu 30 Press the ENTER button to access the DIAGNOSTICS menu and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button if necessary to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS PLL STATUS page 31 Check that the Jit reading shows Lock 32 Press the right arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds 33 If there are CRC errors press the right arrow button until you see the Clear CRC Errors menu and then press the ENTER button to clear the errors 34 Press the right gt arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that the voltage readings show OK 35 Check that a 1080 59 94p ramp signal is displayed on the waveform monitor HDLG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video check Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV digital video generator HDTV waveform monitor Three 75 Q BNC cables Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10
257. c and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 seconds around the click For example if you select 3 sec for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 seconds the click occurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any of the four output channels TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 5 AG7 Audio Generator module AG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the AUDIO TIMING submenu internal reference signal frame reset signal NOTE The AUDIO TIMING delay can be adjusted only if a valid subframe pulse is present and the AUDIO VIDEO SYNC selection in the AG7 main menu is set to Frame Reset 1 or Frame Reset 2 The following figure shows the AUDIO TIMING submenu G7 x AUDIO TIMING i Hiin msec lt 1 gt gt 160 ms to 160 ms Figure 3 3 AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 160 ms to 160 ms in 1 ms steps A minus timing value is set as Delay and plus is set as Advance NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 or right
258. ce The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Use the mainframe UTILITY menu to determine if Option 3G is enabled on the SDI7 module Some of the steps in this procedure depend on whether the option is enabled or not a Press the MODULE button until TG8000 PRESET is displayed b Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button c Press the up A or down arrow button until TG8000 UTILITY OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed d The second line of the display indicates the option status SDI7 slot number None indicates that Option 3G is not enabled SDI7 slot number 3G indicates that Option 3G is enabled NOTE If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to display the option status of the desired SDI7 module If Option 3G is not enabled and you have the option key you can enter the option key to enable the option See page 3 247 To enter the option key on the SDI7 module e Press the BACK button to return to the mainframe menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the SDI7 main menu for channel appears as shown in the following figure SDI7 x 1 STATUS 100 Color Bars HD 1080 59 94i 1970 333 NOTE The SDI7 module p
259. cess the VIDEO submenu See page 3 92 BLACK OPTION This menu selection is available only with Option BK and sets the parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 94 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 81 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 82 Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal up down left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s 1 gt Set the number of samples to be scrolled DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s lt gt Set the number of lines to be scrolled DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Period Famels 1 D Set the period in frames to be scrolled DVG x MOVING PICTURE Disable Random Disable Enable Figure 3 43 DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu H step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame
260. ch as a color bar signal and then press the SWEEP button again the last displayed zone plate signal will be shown as the default and will again be the output signal To modify a zone plate There are times when a specific test case requires a modified zone plate signal signal on the HD3G7 By making and saving changes to the zone plate parameters you can create a new module signal that is based on the selected signal and then save that new signal Changes you make affect only the new signal the standard zone plate signal used as a basis for the new signal is not changed Before making changes make sure you are familiar with both the zone plate pattern control parameters below and zone plate pattern dependent parameters See page 3 170 HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters Perform the following steps to change a zone plate signal s parameters 1 Press the SWEEP button to enter the zone plate signal menu 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal H Sine H Sweep V Sine and V Sweep or two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate 3 166 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 When the desired zone plate signal is displayed press the ENTER button to enter the zone plate parameter menu If Circle Zoneplate was displayed for example
261. ck Burst Same as BLACK2 is selected 1080 60i 1080 59 941 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p Black Burst Same as BLACK 2 TIMING Adjusts the timing offset for the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the TIMING submenu where you will select the timing offset See page 3 14 You cannot set the timing offset under the following conditions m When HD SYNC Same as BLACK 3 is selected as a format for the BLACK 2 output m When Black Burst Same as BLACK 2 is selected as a format for the BLACK 3 output AGL7 module Use this menu to select the black burst signal for the NTSC NTSC No Setup and SIGNAL submenu PAL formats Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the black burst signal and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the SIGNAL submenu From SELECT FORMAT submenu for BLACK 1 or BLACK 2 NTSC and NTSC No Setup PAL i mi TENISE lt gt Black Burst Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst No Field REF Figure 3 7 AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 13 AGL7 Analog Genlock module The available choices described below depend on which format you select m When the NTSC or NTSC No Setup format
262. ck to incoming video or a master source using the GPS reference This menu selection is available only when BLACK 1 is selected for configuration and the GPS7 module has the BLACK 1 REF IN connector FORMAT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the signal formats in the following table Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Table 3 21 GPS7 module output signal formats Common Non integer HD trilevel Integer HD trilevel sync sync rate 1 rate 1 NTSC 1080 59 94i 1080 60i NTSC J 1080 23 98sf 1080 50i PAL 1080 29 97p 1080 24sf CW 10 MHz 1080 23 98p 1080 30p 720 59 94p 1080 25p 1080 24p 720 60p 720 50p 1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting non integer or integer which is set using the Select Output selection in the GPS7 module main menu See page 3 111 GPS7 module main menu 2 The CW 10 MHz format is available on the BLACK 3 output only FIELD REFERENCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to Enable or Disable the field reference in the output signal Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE This submenu is available only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 121 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 122 BLACK TIMING Press the ENTER button to access the BLACK TIMIN
263. cle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal TIMING submenu reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu AVG x TIMING NTSC lt gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps V Vertical 0 Line s AVG x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Coarse 0 000 msec lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps AVG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Eine 0 00 nsec lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps Figure 3 23 AVG7 module TIMING submenu NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the v
264. cquire position No Signal Low Signal Acq Satellites Bad Position Acq Position Adj Phase Locked Locked gt gt Locked gt gt Locked gt gt gt gt 10 Locked gt gt gt gt gt 11 Locked gt gt gt gt gt gt ONDA WN co Figure 3 62 GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu ANTENNA POWER The ANTENNA connector on the rear panel can supply DC power for a connected GPS antenna Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the following antenna power settings CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select m OFF No power is supplied to the GPS antenna E 3 3 V Supplies 3 3 V DC to power the GPS antenna m 5 V Supplies 5 V DC to power the GPS antenna 3 128 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module When the ANTENNA connector is configured to provide power to the antenna the rear panel POWER indicator lights as follows Blinks green to indicate an open circuit This occurs if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used m Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted
265. ctive picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 25 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 module TIMING submenu 3 26 Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 18 characters for the text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down V arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file being output SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER b
266. cts when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES W2 15AUG04 IMPORTANT READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT This software is provided under license from Tektronix Inc Retention of this program for more than thirty 30 days or use of the program in any manner constitutes acceptance of the license terms CAREFULLY READ THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT If you cannot agree to the license terms promptly contact the nearest Tektronix Field Office for return assistance TEKTRONIX SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM OR PROGRAMS ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN EQUIPMENT IS FURNISHED SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETENTION OF THE PROGRAM FOR MORE THAN THIRTY DAYS OR USE OF THE PROGRAM IN ANY MANNER WILL BE CONSIDERED ACCEPTANCE OF THE AGREEMENT TERMS IF THESE
267. cy amplitude click rate and channel origin ID for the selected audio channel The following figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select CHANNEL in the AUDIO submenu SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x CH x Status Active SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x CH x a zj gt eins et the frequenc Frequency 1000 00 Hz cali fA vp SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x CH x Amplitude 20 0 dBFS lt gt Set the status lt gt Set the amplitude SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x CH x Audio Click OFF lt gt Set the click rate ENTER gt SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x CH x x ees lt gt Set the channel origin Channel Origin A1 1 V 3036 059 Figure 3 131 SDI7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Status Use this menu to set the status of the individual channel Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select between Active Inactive and Mute Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection m Frequency Use this menu to set the frequency of the Embedded Audio signal from 10 0 Hz to 20 kHz in steps of 0 5 Hz Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode then use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button again to confirm the new frequency TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 295 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module
268. d NOTE The preset file names use the format MSTATEX YY In this example X denotes the slot name YY denotes the preset number there are 13 possible presets Separate presets are stored for each individual mainframe slot Only presets that have content are copied or written by the backup restore processes This is because only presets that have been saved have files associated with them and the backup restore process copies only those files Any preset that has never been saved will not have an associated file and therefore will not be copied All user data When all of the user data is copied every user file except for the FPGA configuration files will be copied User files are defined as any file that exists in the app FO directory on the instrument The files in this directory can include presets signal files frame picture files logo files sequence files and for the SDI7 module can also include text and font files The user data files do not include the application software or any Linux files TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 63 Operating basics Memory requirements To backup restore presets or user data using a USB drive 2 64 It is recommended that you use the FLASH MEMORY readout in the UTILITY menu to determine how much memory is available on the instrument before you perform a restore operation Here is how much memory is required If you are backing up or restoring only presets you wi
269. d Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt AO North America power standard Al Universal EURO power A2 United Kingdom power A3 Australia power A5 Switzerland power A6 Japan power A10 China power A11 India power no locking cable A12 Brazil power no locking cable A99 No power cord TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Firmware and hardware Firmware upgrades Tektronix releases product updates to add new features and upgrades to fix problems with the software or firmware You can find the latest firmware for your product at the Tektronix Web site www tektronix com downloads See page 2 51 How to upgrade the instrument firmware Hardware upgrades You can order any of the modules listed at the front of this manual to install in the TG8000 generator mainframe See page xix Supported products In addition you can order a replacement Power Supply module for the TG8000 mainframe by purchasing a TG800UP PW upgrade Initial product inspection Perform the following product inspection procedure when you receive your instrument 1 Inspect the shipping carton for external damage which may indicate damage to the instrument 2 Remove the TG8000 generator from the shipping carton and then check that the instrument has not been damaged in transit Prior to shipment the instrument is thoroughly inspected for mechanical defects The ex
270. d Disable and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection No Signal Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when no genlock signal is detected Loss of Lock Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when a loss of genlock condition is detected Near Loss of Lock Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when a loss of genlock condition is detected This can happen when the frequency of the input signal is too far from the correct frequency TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 41 Operating basics Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS Use this menu to view diagnostic readouts and to execute the diagnostic routines submenu for the mainframe and installed modules The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Select DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu TUNE A CAL PLL TG8000 UTILITY DIAGS TUNE TEMP Tune 0 00e 6 2097152 gt 2097152 lt gt VOLTAGE FAN SPD PS HRS TG8000 UTILITY DIAGNOSTICS Factory Press ENTER to Proceed Runs diagnostics Mode Only 3036 093 Figure 2 28 Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu TUNE Displays how far the TG8000 system is deviating from the calibrated internal frequency of the mainframe oscillator in order to lock to an external reference input One value of this readout is to determine if the instrument oscillator needs to be calibrated If the instrument is locked to a traceable reference then any tune value indicates
271. d NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar 40 Flat Field Other 1 Other 2 PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar 100 Color Bar Over Red 75 Color Bar Over Red 40 Flat Field Other 1 Other 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to scroll through the selections Press the ENTER button to enable the selected signal Which signals are available depend on the selected output connector and the video format The following table lists the available signals for each output connector and video format Table 3 6 Test signals in the ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu Format Test signals BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Composite Sync Composite Blanking Subcarrier H Drive V Drive Field Reference PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF Composite Sync Composite Blanking Subcarrier H Drive V Drive Field Reference PAL Pulse BARS connector NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar 40 Flat Field Other 1 SNG Color Bars Other 2 Monitor Setup Matrix PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar 100 Color Bar Over Red 75 Color Bar Over Red 40 Flat Field Other 1 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Other 2 Monitor Setup Matrix
272. d check that the voltage readings show OK NOTE The SDI7 module provides additional diagnostics for checking the DDR2 and SRAM memory that can be accessed only in factory mode See the TG8000 Service Manual for information on using the factory mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics Operating basics This section introduces you to the basics of operating the TG8000 Common module functions are discussed here while module specific functions are discussed in the module specifc sections of this manual This section contains the following topics Front panel controls Rear panel connectors E About the frame reset signals Note for format settings Front panel controls The following figure shows the locations of the front panel controls A brief discussion of each feature follows the illustration MODULE Menu control Test signal FRONT PANEL button buttons buttons ENABLE button a Tektronix TG8000 Test Signal Generator Ne mr Q 4 J 3036 001 LCD Display FORMAT Reference and FAULT USB port button timecode indicators indicator Figure 2 1 TG8000 front panel LCD display The LCD display is a two line 40 character per line display Almost all menus have two lines of text where the first line shows the current position in the current me
273. d example by the SDI7 module is the Active Format Description AFD AFD is a method of identifying the active area of the video picture to be displayed Using AFD the aspect ratio of the picture can be automatically optimized for the display being used AFD is defined in SMPTE 2016 1 and mapping AFD and bar data is defined in SMPTE 2016 3 The packet format appears as shown here DID 0x41 SDID 0x05 DC 8 UDW 000 0 AFD Code AR 0 0 UDW 001 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 UDW 002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDW 003 T B L R 0 0 0 0 UDW 004 First bar data b8 b15 UDW 005 First bar data b0 b7 UDW 006 Second bar data b8 b15 UDW 007 Second bar data b0 b7 CS automatic calculation TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 307 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 308 Where AR aspect ratio 1 16 9 0 4 3 T top bar data flag B bottom bar data flag L left bar data flag and R right bar data flag Note that these are all eight bit values for the respective User Data Word The SDI7 module will automatically calculate the parity bits when Parity is set to Automatic which is the default Most AFD codes do not require bar data information only the first user data word needs to be defined For example one common AFD code for a 16 9 coded frame is 1001 9 which indicates a 4 3 image horizontally centered with pillarboxes as sh
274. d generates the actual timecode bits needed for each output LTC The GPS7 module has four independent linear timecode outputs Each output can be set independently with regard to timecode format module timing and timecode delay Analog Black The GPS7 module has three analog sync outputs Each output can be configured as NTSC or PAL black burst with optional VITC insertion or HD trilevel sync The BG7 module has four analog sync outputs which can be similarly configured HD SDI The standard HDVG7 module has one HD SDI test signal generator with two outputs for which ancillary timecode ATC can be added If Option BK is available then there are two independent HD SDI test signal generators available Program Time As an alternate to the local time of day a program time counter can be used as a timecode source for any output This counter can represent elapsed time such as the timecode associated with program content during the editing process for example Reset Value The program time counter will start counting from the specified reset value Program time can be reset to this value at any time using either the user interface or a general purpose interface GPI input Alarm Time An alarm can be set to generate when the program time counter matches a predefined value For example you can specify the start timecode of your program content at 01 00 00 00 The program time can be initialized to 00 59 00 00 to start a one minute le
275. d product TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Compliance information Pollution degree A measure of the contaminants that could occur in the environment around description and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Products in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Pollution degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only Installation overvoltage Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage categor
276. dary ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Secondary ID and exit Secondary ID editing DC Press the ENTER button to edit the Data Count word to show the number of User Data Words to follow You can set the Data Count from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down Y arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data Count and exit Data Count editing UDW Use this menu selection to set a User Data Word Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select the User Data Word you wish to edit from word 000 through word 254 and then press the ENTER button to edit that User Data Word You can set the User Data Word from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up 4 and down F arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the User Data Word and exit User Data Word editing for that word NOTE To make this process easier you can use the PC based TG Setup app
277. de a jam sync may occur if the timing has drifted more than 20 us E Stay Legal Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal while staying within the specified frequency offset and frequency rate of change specifications for NTSC and PAL reference signals NOTE It can take a long time for the module to recover in this mode since it takes about 300 seconds to correct each 64 us line of timing error Jam Phase Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal immediately but will typically cause a sync shock to the system Fast Slew Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal at a rate 25 times faster than the legal rate without jumping TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 119 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 120 GPS7 module Use this submenu to configure the selected black output for signal format timing BLACK submenu and timecode parameters The following figure shows the BLACK submenu Select the BLACK1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 output in the main menu y Y Output if allowed REF IN and 1 gt Black 1 only m Input el Input NTSC GPS7 x BLACK x FORMAT lt ts a oe CW 10MHz 9 tA V Y 4 GPS7 x BLACK x FIELD REFERENCE rae Disable Disable el Enable I A V GPS7 x BI Press E LACK x TIMING TER for menu GPS7 x BI Press E LACK x TIMECODE
278. de to input the address 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character _ and use the up A or down arrow button to enter the address value 3 After you enter the address value press the ENTER button to enable the address TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 39 Operating basics 2 40 GPI ALARM SELECT submenu Use this submenu to select which GPI alarms are enabled or disabled When the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled the GPI interface triggers a ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered The following figure shows the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu Select GPI ALARM SELECT in the main menu TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Fan Fault Disable TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT No Signal Disable TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Loss of Lock Disable TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Near Loss of Lock Disable 3036 070 Disable K gt Enable Disable lt gt Enable Disable lt gt Enable Disable lt gt Enable Figure 2 26 GPI ALARM SELECT submenu For each of the following alarms use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection Fan Fault Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a fan fault is detected No Signal This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 mo
279. definition of a zone plate the phase of any point is determined by the equation Pryt kg kx x ky y kr t kxr at kyr yt kxy zy 1 1 1 5 kx x ahr y ahr t where x y and t are the coordinates of the point in question and ke kx ky Kr kxr kyr kxy kx2 ky2 and kr2 are constants All SDI7 zone plate patterns are defined with coefficients of ten parameters that correspond to the constants in the above equation Note that while the possibilities are virtually endless most common zone plates are defined with only one or two parameters while the coefficients of the remaining parameters are kept at zero The SDI7 Generator module generates six standard zone plate signals circle frequency diagonal frequency horizontal sine frequency horizontal sweep frequency vertical sine frequency and vertical sweep frequency Each standard zone plate signal has a pattern control parameter See Table 3 60 This pattern control parameter is unique to the zone plate signal it is associated with TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 265 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module When you first enter the zone plate parameters menu for a signal the pattern control parameter for that signal is displayed The pattern control parameter controls the basic pattern frequency by adjusting the dependent parameters For example if you change the CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency the generator ad
280. deo Generator module 3 90 Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the frequency The selection items are as follows Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected the audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the amplitude You can set the value from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps Audio click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 second around the click For example if you select 3 see for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 second the click occurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF
281. dge shaping filter to be enabled or disabled on the video Also allows the A V timing mode to be invoked Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 192 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu ANC PAYLOAD Use this menu to define and control the user defined ANC payload insertion Press the ENTER button to access the ANC Payload submenu See page 3 194 HD3G7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to Enable or Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The SMPTE 352M payload identifier is a required element for a compliant 3 Gb signal stream In most cases the SMPTE 352M payload setting should be Enable TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module TRIGGER OUTPUT Allows you to select a line rate frame rate or the module system clock as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope See page 3 201 HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu SECONDARY OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between a Test Signal or a Black output for the secondary bottom BNC connector See page 3 201 HD3G7 module SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics shows operation parameters for the module and allows you to clear the counts of CRC errors t
282. djust the X position SDI7 x x OVERLAY BURNT IN TIMECODE Y Position 5 0 APH el lt gt Adjust the Y position 3036 097 Figure 3 129 SDI7 module BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu Mode Enables or disables the burnt in timecode Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable Small and Large Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X Position Sets the horizontal position of the timecode The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 0 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the timecode The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 0 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 293 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu Use this menu to select the audio group for subsequent audio channel configuration and to configure audio group parameters You may select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 for all SD HD and 3G Level A formats For 3G Level B formats you may select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 for both Link A and Link B Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to make the selection When the desired audio group and Link are display
283. djustment anywhere in the frame for the output m Timecode generator with ATC LTC or ATC VITC Full remote control using Ethernet interface SMPTE 352M payload identifier User defined ancillary data packet How to operate the SDI7 module After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe 2 Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display 3 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 For first time operation only if you ordered Option 3G as an upgrade to your existing SDI7 module you must enter the option key that was supplied with the upgrade in order to enable the 3G software option See page 3 247 To enter the option key on the SDI7 module NOTE Ifyou ordered Option 3G at the same time you ordered the SDI7 module the module was shipped from the factory with the option already enabled TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 245 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 5 Press the front panel MODULE button unti
284. domly when in generator mode Use the up A or submenu down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu shown below Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s lt d gt Set the sample number to be scrolled HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s La HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE lt Set the frame period be scrolled Period 1 Frame s lt Set the Line number to be scrolled HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE lt gt Disable Random Disable N Enable J 1970 232 Figure 3 86 HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu NOTE Moving picture mode is not available with zone plate signals However zone plate signals may be defined with motion in the zone plate parameters See page 3 166 To modify a zone plate signal on the HD3G7 module H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use
285. duct description ccc ccc e cece eee e een ee ne nee eed t nee een e nee ed 3 75 How to operate the DVG7 module ccc cece cece eee nee ene ne etn terete ees 3 76 To select an output signal on the DVG7 module ccc cccc ec ee eee e eee ee tent eee tenn enee es 3 77 DVG7 module main MeNU 06 c cece cece cece e eee eee ented eee e eens eteeeaeeneeneene nee eee eee 3 79 DVG7 module factory default settings 0 ccc cc cece eee ence ee ene eee eee ene e eaten eee ea eens 3 95 ii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Table of Contents GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 0 0 sce cece ene eneeneeeeeeeeeeeneeteenaeeas 3 97 GPS7 module product description 0c cece cece e eee eee een ene n ne nnn e ene nen EE ene 3 98 How to operate the GPS7 module 0 0 cece cece nce n een a EEE 3 99 To configure the GPS7 module cece e aip een een ened ne Ene ent nee ai 3 100 GPS 7 module main Menus sees ei Naa ee age Fa SR es BS a SS 3 111 GPS7 module factory default settings 0 0 0 0 6c ccc cece cee eee ene eee ee ee eee e eee nee e nee ne enaes 3 147 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 0 2 cece cence nee e cence eee te eee eae eneeees 3 150 HD3G7 module product description ccc cece cece eee eee eee e ene nee ene ene n sent nnaes 3 151 How to operate the HD3G7 module 0 cece ccc een ene ene nee n n
286. dule to be set up for any time in the future TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 133 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu Use this menu to schedule when Daylight Savings Time changes are implemented Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the DST SCHEDULE submenu Select DST SCHEDULE menu in the main menu OFF lt 1 gt once RECURRING A 1 gt Edit offset V GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH ONCE A 7 Scheduled Time 2008 01 01 01 00 00 lt gt Edit time GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH RECUR a DST START Second Sun in Mar 020000 L lt gt Edittime GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH RECUR A DST END First Sun in Nov 02 00 00 lt gt Edittime Only available when ONCE or OFF is selected 970 200 z Only available when RECURRING or OFF is selected Figure 3 65 GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the DST schedule function to OFF ONCE or RECURRING Use ONCE to schedule a specific calendar date and time to apply or remove the daylight savings time offset For example 2011 03 06 02 00 00 Use RECURRING to set up relative dates and times to apply and remove the DST offset For example lst Sun of Oct 02 00 00 3 134 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual
287. dule is installed Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when no genlock signal is detected Loss of Lock This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is installed Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a loss of genlock condition is detected Near Loss of Lock This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is installed Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a loss of genlock condition is detected This can happen when the frequency of the input signal is too far from the correct frequency TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics AGL7 ALARM SELECT This menu item appears only when an AGL7 module is installed Use this submenu submenu to select which AGL7 alarms are enabled or disabled When the AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled the AGL7 module blanks one of the black outputs when an enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered The following figure shows the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu Select AGL7 ALARM SELECT in the main menu TG8000 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT No Signal Disable TG8000 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT Loss of Lock Disable TG8000 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT Near Loss of Lock Disable 3036 071 Disable K gt Enable Disable lt D Enable Disable gt Enable Figure 2 27 AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu For each of the following AGL7 alarms use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable an
288. dule orientation See Figure 1 4 Push the module into the slot until the connector board of the module is firmly engaged with the Main board of the mainframe Figure 1 4 Installing a module 5 Tighten the two screws to secure the module to the mainframe See Figure 1 5 Figure 1 5 Securing a module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 13 eee aes To remove a module To remove a module from the mainframe perform the following procedure CAUTION To facilitate module removal attach terminations or BNC cables to the module connectors The connector may be damaged if too much force is applied to it during module removal 1 Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the mainframe rear panel 2 Attach 75 Q terminations or BNC cables to the BNC connectors on the module to be removed Module removal becomes easier if the terminations or cables are attached to the connectors at the left and right ends 3 Use a screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws securing the module to the mainframe CAUTION Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you remove the module from the mainframe 4 Pull the module slowly toward you while supporting the terminations or BNC cables attached to the connectors See Figure 1 6 Figure 1 6 Removing a module 1 14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 5 If th
289. e GPI Changing the Input Output configuration The CW connector is configured at the factory to be an input for CW signals You can reconfigure the connector to output a 48 kHz word clock signal by changing the position of an internal cable CAUTION To prevent damage to the mainframe and the module be sure to disconnect the power cord before removing the module 2 8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics To output a 48 kHz word clock signal from the CW connector 1 Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector labeled J040 on the AGL7 module See Figure 2 6 2 Reconnect the cable to the connector labeled J960 on the AGL7 module 3 Place the 48 kHz CLOCK label provided with the module on the rear panel below the CW connector NOTE The word clock signal automatically follows the format of the Black 1 signal Rear Panel C gt i z See 5 of i O A 0 N z 5 l J040 Figure 2 6 Location of J
290. e corresponding test signal buttons When the AWVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 26 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A C N TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE enter ears unear Farro murarsr sweep J ENABLE Q 0 Monitor PULSE J TIMING so omer J ll p usB FORMAT ce BACK CT ExT TIME Figure 3 26 Front panel test signal buttons You can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the AWVG7 module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the AWVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set Table 3 10 AWVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars L
291. e for the whole line is at the calculated 3 dB level and read the 3 dB frequency directly from the instrument display Since the ZP Amplitude parameter is adjustable for each of these signals you can measure the response at 100 60 or any other level as needed These same techniques can be used to measure vertical or diagonal response by selecting the appropriate zoneplate signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 177 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module main menu 3 178 Use the HD3G7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the video signal output mode Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Change the sample structure and color space Control the Embedded Audio characteristics frequency amplitude click rate and sampling rate Set the timing offset of the outputs relative to an internal reference signal or an external reference signal Enable or disable the Timecode and set the timecode parameters Enable or disable the discrete components of the video output signal Enable or disable the user defined ancillary data payload and set the payload structure Enable or disable the SMPTE 352M Payload identifier Set the line frame or clock rate as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope Select between a test signal or a black signal for the secondary SIGNAL 2 output View diagnostics operation parameters and CRC
292. e lower half of the field OTHER Frame Picture Picture rendered from user supplied BMP files stored in the PICTURE directory of the TG8000 mainframe memory Use the left or right arrow button to select a test signal from the list See page 3 261 To install custom picture files BMP format TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 259 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 3 260 module In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the FLAT FIELD button on the SDI7 module These signals are located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument Perform the following steps to install the enhanced signal sets 1 Install the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD into the DVD drive on your computer 2 Using the DVD browser navigate to the following directory Test Signals gt SDI7 Signal Library gt Enhanced Signal Set The Enhanced Signal Set directory contains the following files Monochrome Fields xml includes all monochrome flat fields from 0 to 100 in 10 increments Color Fields xml includes color fields for six primary and secondary colors at both 100 and 75 values SMPTE RP431 2 Color Patches xml includes full field patterns for each of the Black White and Black Dark Gray steps plus the 1 and _2
293. e page 2 12 GPS7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 25 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 97 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module product description 3 98 The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module provides the following features m Integrated GPS receiver that can serve as the system timing reference Three analog black video outputs for NTSC PAL or trilevel HD sync signals REF IN input shared with the BLACK 1 output connector to apply analog video trilevel HD sync or CW signals to use as a generator lock Genlock reference Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the Genlock features NOTE The menus and menu discussions in this manual represent the newest features and software available including all Genlock features and the REF IN input Earlier instruments without the REF IN input have similar menu structures but not identical menu content Timecode output available as VITC on the black outputs and from four independent LTC outputs LTC input shared with LTC output connector to use as an optional time reference Timecode
294. e 2 0 0 0 cc cece cece nee ener n nen e nen ene ete Eten ees 3 270 Figure 3 119 A Ky only zone plate 00 ccc cece cence een een en eee nee cnet ene e eaten i 3 271 Figure 3 120 SDI7 module main menu 2 cece cence nee ee eee eee ene ene eee eee eeeeteenaeeaeeaees 3 276 Figure 3 121 SDI7 module main menu Continued 0 0c eee cece cence ences eee eee eeeeeeenees 3 277 Figure 3 122 SDI7 module STATUS menu in Generator mode cceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeene es 3 281 Figure 3 123 SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu 00 eee eec cece eee ee eeeeeneenees 3 281 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Figure 3 124 Figure 3 125 Figure 3 126 Figure 3 127 Figure 3 128 Figure 3 129 Figure 3 130 Figure 3 131 Figure 3 132 Figure 3 133 Figure 3 134 Figure 3 135 Figure 3 136 Figure 3 137 Figure 3 138 Figure 3 139 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Table of Contents SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 0 ccc erennere rererere ereere 3 283 SDI7 module OVERLAY submenu 0 ccc cece ence eee ene cnet e eee eens eae eea 3 285 SDI7 module LOGO submenu 0 0 cece cece e cece eee ne ence ee ee eee ene eae eea 3 287 SDI7 module ID TEXT submenu 0 cece ec ee eee ence cnet ee ee eae eens ea eeea 3 290 SDI7 module CIRCLE submenu 00 0 ccc cce ec ee ence nee eee eee eee eaten enna ena 3 2
295. e ANC insertion feature after changing video modes or formats to be sure the ANC data is programmed as desired If the line number or sample offset are left at values outside the allowed range for a given format the packet will not be inserted in the stream Alternatively if these parameters are left at values near the end of active or ANC space the packet may overwrite other elements of the stream such as EAV and SAV Line Use this menu selection to set the line to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right P arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in progressive formats Field Use this menu selection to set the Field to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Field 1 Only Field 2 Only or Field 1 and 2 This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 1 Line Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 1 to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 2 Line Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 2 to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI V
296. e active picture area of the output signal up down MOVING PICTURE left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll submenu _ through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu A Set the number of samples to be scrolled Set the number of lines to be scrolled Set the period in frames to be scrolled Random Disable Enable v Figure 3 18 AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 37 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo AVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK i a v H step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 60 to 60 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 15 to 15 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Disable and Enab
297. e cece cece cence ence etee tae eneeneeneeneees 3 66 Figure 3 37 BG7 module HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE subment ccceceeeeeeeee ees 3 69 Figure 3 38 BG7 module TIMING submenu 0 0 c cece cece eee ce eee cence tee eee eneeneenaeeeees 3 69 Figure 3 39 BG7 module TIMECODE submenu 0 eccecce cence ence ne eee eee eneeneenaeeeees 3 71 Figure 3 40 BG7 module VITC submenu 00 cece cece cece en cee eee eeeetee tae eneeneenaeeeees 3 73 Figure 3 41 Front panel test signal buttons 00 cece cece cece en cee eee eeeetee eae eneeneenaeeeens 3 78 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Table of Contents DVG7 module main MENU cece ccc ccc ence e cence eens eee Or eet eee bas 3 80 DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 0 0 00 ccc cece cee e eee e c
298. e ene nets nee nnaes 3 152 To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module ccc ccc cece cece ene eee eee eneennaes 3 153 HD3G7 module zone plate signals 0 cece cece ence eee eee ene nee e ne ene e nee nee nna es 3 165 HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters cece cee ce eee eeeeeneeneeeeeees 3 168 HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters 0 cece cece nee e eee e eee ee tenes eneennaes 3 170 How to use zone plate signals on the HD3G7 module 00 c cece cence ee ee sssr 3 177 HD3G7 module main Men neos ees acasage r neo eaa mentees ondeseeterenmatene ony 3 178 HD3G7 module factory default settingS ccc ccc cece cence cence ee eee en se cnet neat ene ennaes 3 205 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module 0 cece cece cence ene eee eee nee e nae eneennaes 3 207 HDLG7 module product description 0 ccc ccc cece cent en ee e een eee eee ene e nee nnaes 3 207 How to operate the HDLG7 module 0 een eee e eden nent cnet nee ne ennaes 3 208 To select an output signal on the HDLG7 module 0 cece cece cece sesers essere 3 209 HDLG7 module main menu 00 c cece cee n ene cee E EEEE E AASE ETE e 3 216 HDLG7 module factory default settings 0 ccc cece cece cence eseese eses sesser eee ena nena eens 3 220 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module 0 ccc cce cece eee ene eee e ease nee eeaeene
299. e following figure shows the OUTPUT submenu Select SELECT OUTPUT in the main menu AGL7 1 BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC Select the format ENTER ee lt gt for BLACK 1 BLACK 2 0 submenu BLACK BACK Except when BLACK 3 is selected To TIMING submenu 3036 012 Figure 3 6 AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu SELECT FORMAT Selects the format for the signal output from the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 connector Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the format The available choices described below depend on which output connector you select NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs m When BLACK 1 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu where you will select a black burst signal See page 3 13 NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL When BLACK 2 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu where you will select a black burst signal See page 3 13 NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL HD SYNC Same as BLACK 3 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock module When BLACK 3 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to enable the selected trilevel sync signal or the black burst signal when Bla
300. e information Tektronix part number 071 1970 XX WARNING Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG8000 mainframe Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures Failure to use appropriate precautions can result in injury or death TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module To calibrate the internal frequency Perform the following procedure to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator This adjustment stores the current frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS signal It is stored for used when the instrument is set to Internal mode This procedure can be done without any disruption to operation and is best performed in the operating environment of the instrument SP Nr OU OBO ON 10 11 12 13 14 15 Connect the power cord to the TG8000 mainframe Check for error messages as the instrument starts Connect a GPS signal to the rear of the module Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes Press the MODULE button until GPS7 STATUS appears Check that the signal status shows Locked Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine a Press the up A arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS b Press the ENTER button c Press the right arrow button to select TUNE d Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display Press the MODULE button until TG8000 ap
301. e is installed in the instrument 30 DROP Use this menu to enable or disable the 30 Drop Frame Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable 30 Drop Frame and Disable 30 Drop Frame Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only for non integer frame rates ATC LTC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Linear Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection ATC VITC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Vertical Interval Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 191 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 192 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component on or off individually generator mode only and to disable the edge filter and the AV Timing mode Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu NOTE The items in this menu modify the signal output to make it non standard To indicate that the signal is non standard an asterisk is inserted at the beginning of the signal name when a parameter has been changed in this
302. e module is functioning as specified E TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module product description The HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module can be operated in either of the following two modes Generator The module can output 3 Gb s SDI and 1 5 Gb s HD SDI video test signals in a variety of formats including both Level A and Level B mapping structures for 3G SDI signals See page 3 153 To select the Generator mode on the HD3G7 module Converter The module can convert a number of HD SDI input signal formats to a variety of 3G SDI output signal formats with up to 32 channels embedded digital audio and ancillary data copied from input signal to output signal See page 3 155 To select the Converter mode on the HD3G7 module The module provides the following features Two serial digital outputs for 1 5 Gb s and 3 Gb s signals One HD SDI input for use as the converter input One clock frame line trigger output Generates test signals in many formats with both 3G SDI Level A and Level B mapping structures supported Standard test signals including SMPTE color bars and SDI pathological test patterns Zone plate test signals with full control of all parameters Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal
303. e number of errors detected on the Y portion of the active picture area of the input signal E YANC The number of errors detected on the Y portion of the ancillary data space in the input signal C The number of errors detected on the C portion of the active picture area of the input signal m CANC The number of errors detected on the C portion of the ancillary data space in the input signal CLEAR CRC ERRORS Press the ENTER button to clear the CRC error counters TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 203 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module CALIBRATION submenu 3 204 TEMPERATURES This diagnostic displays the temperature of the HD3G7 module board and FPGA FPGA VERSION This diagnostic displays the current and expected FPGA versions If there is a discrepancy between the two a warning appears which means that the FPGA firmware might need to be upgraded VOLTAGE MON 1 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 2 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 3 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the i
304. e stored in the SDI7 LOGO directory Press the ENTER button confirm the selection The default logo is the first file in the SDI7 LOGO directory as sorted by the date of the logo file oldest first If the factory provided logo files are installed the default logo is Tektronix_logo_500x125 bmp However if the user has removed the factory provided logo files and added their own custom files then the default logo will be the oldest file installed in the SDI7 LOGO directory NOTE The position of the logo overlay is referenced from the lower right of the active raster area X Position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 1 0 in 0 1 steps Press the ENTER button confirm the selection Y Position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 1 0 in 0 1 steps Press the ENTER button confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to create text or to select a text file that will be overlaid on the ID TEXT submenu output test signal and to set the display position of the tex
305. e the PC based TG Setup application This application also allows you to import and export User Data Words as CSV files TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 197 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 198 CLEAR UDW Use this menu selection to clear the entire User Data Word Press the ENTER button to enter the CLEAR UDW mode which will present the following dialog Clear entire UDW Yes ENTER No CANCEL Press the ENTER button to clear the User Data Word and exit CLEAR UDW or press the BACK button to exit without clearing the User Data Word CS Use this menu selection to set the Checksum Press the ENTER button to edit the Checksum You can set the Checksum from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Checksum and exit Checksum editing Auto Calculate CS Use this menu selection to enable or disable checksum auto calculation Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Enable or Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the choice NOTE Different video modes and formats have different ranges of lines and pixels in their active and ANC spaces Users should be careful to change the line field and sample offset parameters of th
306. e to use the Restore All User Data from USB option in the restore procedure a Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET b Press the up A or down V arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button c Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE d Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Restore All User Data from USB and then press the ENTER button to start the restore process e A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation f During the first stage of the copy process the display shows the names of the files as they are copied Depending on the size of the files being copied this may take a couple of minutes g When all of the files have been copied the message Finishing copy is displayed while the file system buffers are emptied This message may appear for a couple of minutes h When the restore operation is complete the message Backup completed successfully or Restore completed successfully is displayed before the menu display returns to normal NOTE If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the restore operation completes an error message is displayed Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements TG8000 Multiformat
307. eated by the Frame Picture Generator application m Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module How to operate the AWVG7 module After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into to the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe N Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display B After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AWVG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars 5 Select the signal format and the signal you want to output See page 3 50 To select an output signal on the AWVG7 module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to AWVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the
308. eature after changing video modes or formats to be sure the ANC data is programmed as desired If the line number or sample offset are left at values outside the allowed range for a given format the packet will not be inserted in the stream Alternatively if these parameters are left at values near the end of active or ANC space the packet may overwrite other elements of the stream such as EAV and SAV Line Use this menu selection to set the line to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right P arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in progressive formats Field Use this menu selection to set the Field to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Field 1 Only Field 2 Only or Field 1 and 2 This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 1 Line Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 1 to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 2 Line Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 2 to carry the ancillary data payload Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video G
309. ect JAM SYNC menu in the main menu A GPS7 x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC APPLY Press ENTER to synchronize now GPS7 x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC ENABLE OFF GPS7 x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC SETUP Bs Scheduled Time 00 00 00 lt gt Edit time 3036 034 Initiates JAM synchronization eae Figure 3 67 GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu APPLY Press the ENTER button to immediately synchronize the module timecode with the GPS signal timecode ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the Jam Sync function SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Jam Sync schedule to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE A daily Jam Sync should be performed on systems running at non integer frame rates TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 137 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu 3 138 Use this menu to schedule when leap seconds are implemented For many applications it might be fine to apply the leap second at midnight UTC but for some time zones this might cause a disrupti
310. ection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay m Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals AVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the LOGO submenu display position of the logo Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG8000 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu a aaa i aa E lt gt Set the horizontal position AVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO as Y Position 0 0 APH lt gt Set the vertical position oe i 1 gt Select OFF or a logo AVGY7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Save the display position for the logo Figure 3 20 AVG7 module LOGO submenu X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 39 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module
311. ed amp Pluge White Window 4 Level Ped amp Pluge PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie SDI OTHER 525 YPbPr format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Valid 5 Step Modulated Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Chroma Noise PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar T Pulses TIMING Timing 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module Table 3 8 AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Signals in the signal set Test Matrix 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid 5 Step Valid Ramp Button name Signal set SDI OTHER Other 625 YPbPr format COLOR BAR Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst 60 Sweep Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 L
312. ed press the ENTER button to access the menu for that group In each group you can enable or disable the embedded audio select a specific channel and set the sampling mode Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items Press the ENTER button to select a specific channel While in the Audio Channel submenu you can set the embedded audio frequency amplitude and click rate for the channel The following figure shows the AUDIO EMBEDDED Audio Group submenu See Figure 3 130 Select AUDIO in the main menu SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x Status Disable SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x Channel x SDI7 x x AUDIO GRP x Sampling Frame Disable gt Enable ad ENTER 1 gt elect audio To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu channel BACK Frame gt Frame without Frame Number Asynchronous Figure 3 130 SDI7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 3 294 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module STATUS Enables or disables the embedded audio output for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Enable or Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection CHANNEL Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to choose channel 1 2 3 or 4 and then press the ENTER button to enter the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu The AUDIO CHANNEL submenu allows you to set the frequen
313. ee page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Set the TG8000 to the factory default settings a Press the front panel MODULE button until TG8000 PRESET is displayed b Press the front panel ENTER button to enter the PRESET menu c Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Factory Default d Press the front panel ENTER button to load the factory default presets e When the presets have finished loading press the BACK button to exit the PRESET menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 23 Getting started DVG7 module functional 1 24 check 6 Press the front panel MODULE button until the BG7 main menu shown below appears BG x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 7 Press the front panel ENTER button The BLACK FORMAT menu selection shown below appears BG7 x BLACK 1 FORMAT 9 m NTSC el 3036 098 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select NTSC or PAL and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the le
314. eeeaeeeenees 3 229 Figure 3 105 HDVG7 module LOGO submenu 0 cc eeeee eee en eee eens eeeeteeeeeeeeaees 3 230 Figure 3 106 HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 00 c ccc eeec eee e cece ee eee eteeeeeeneenees 3 231 Figure 3 107 HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 0 cc cccecceee eee e cent eee eeeeeeeeneenees 3 233 Figure 3 108 HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu 0 ce cceee eee eee ene eneeeeeeaees 3 234 Figure 3 109 HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu ceccee eee eneeneeeeeeaees 3 235 Figure 3 110 HDVG7 module TIMING submenu ccceceec ence eee ee ee eee eteeeeeeeeaees 3 237 Figure 3 111 HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu 0 cee cece eee e cece eee e te eeeeeeenees 3 238 Figure 3 112 HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu cccc eee ne ence eee eee eeeeteeeeeeaeenees 3 239 Figure 3 113 HDVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only ccecceee eens teenies 3 240 Figure 3 114 Front panel test signal buttons 0 cece cee ee ence nee n cent eases eeeeteeneeeaeenees 3 253 Figure 3 115 Optical zone plates enlarged 0 0 cece cece sesser nee eee ene teenies 3 262 Figure 3 116 A Kx only zone plate 0 0 00 ccc cece ence eee eee enn e ne nnn nee enn nee ten ne es 3 268 Figure 3 117 A Kx 2 only zone plate 00 ccc ccc cece cece nee nent n ee nnn n eet nee ett nee 3 269 Figure 3 118 A Ky only zone plat
315. eference Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the REFERENCE submenu See page 3 116 3 114 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module SELECT OUTPUT Selects which BLACK output to configure for signal format timing and timecode parameters or selects the HD trilevel sync rate for the three BLACK outputs Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the output you want to configure BLACK 1 BLACK 2 BLACK 3 or HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 120 or the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu See page 3 124 GPS SETUP Sets GPS signal parameters and sets the level at which a warning message will be generated if the GPS signal quality deteriorates Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the GPS SETUP submenu See page 3 128 TIME SETUP Provides access to several submenus for setting timing parameters for the module Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the following submenus and then press the ENTER button to access the selected submenu E TIME OF DAY menu Use this submenu to set the module time of day reference See page 3 130 m TIME ZONE OFFSET menu Use this submenu to set the time zone offset for your location See page 3 133 DST SCHEDULE menu Use this submenu to configure how the module handles Daylight
316. el arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus See page 3 3 AG7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AG7 Audio Generator module AG7 module main menu Use the AG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Select the audio channel whose parameters are to be changed Select the audio data resolution Select the frame reset signal to be synchronized Select the timing offset for the audio signal outputs Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 ENTER AG7 x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Channel 4 To CHANNEL submenu Channel 1 lt gt Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 BACK Channel 8 AG7 x RESOLUTION 24 bits 20 bits lt 1 apis AG7 x AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Free Run AG7 x AUDIO TIMING V Free Run A gt Frame Reset 1 Frame Reset 2 To AUDIO TIMING submenu 3036 009 Figure 3 1 AG7 module main menu CHANNEL PARAMETERS Selects the channel for which the parameters are to be set from Channel 1 to Channel 8 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection Press the front panel ENTER button to access the CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu where you can set frequency amplitude and audio click insertion See page 3 4 RESOLUTION Sets the resolution of
317. elated to time zones You can also use this setting to set the internal time to calculate backwards to the Master Time When the input time source is set to VITC the instrument works similar to how it works in internal mode pre correcting the master time of day by the time zone offset This pre correction assumes that the incoming time code has the correct local time and causes the outgoing time codes to nominally match the incoming ones regardless of time zone offset This means that when switching from GPS to VITS mode the time zone offset usually does not need to change However if the time code synchronization mode is set to Synchronize now or Synchronize once and the time zone offset is changed after the time code sync has occurred then the time zone change offsets the incoming and outgoing time codes until the user reasserts the time synchronization 3 108 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Leap Second Apply Leap seconds when required are added on June 30 and or December 31 at 23 59 60 UTC That is the minute preceding midnight has 61 seconds instead of 60 numbered 0 60 instead of 0 59 This might be an inconvenient time to make a local clock adjustment For example this is during prime time for the North American Eastern Time Zone Therefore the GPS7 gives the option of deferring the leap second adjustment if any on these dates for up to 24 hour
318. elected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 3 14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock module Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously Table 3 2 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 5556 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 10 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24p 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 10 00 720 60p 375 22 2222 10 00 720 59 94p 375 22 2444 10 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 10 00 Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 5556 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 7
319. ely accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product The following symbol s may appear on the product A CAUTION Protective Ground Refer to Manual Earth Terminal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xiii Service safety summary Service safety summary xiv Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service safety summary and the General safety summary before performing any service procedures Do not service alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect power To avoid electric shock switch off the instrument power then disconnect the power cord from the mains power Use care when servicing with power on Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Compliance information This section lists the EMC electromagnetic compliance safety and environmental standards with which the instrument complies EMC compliance EC declaration of Meets intent of Directive 2004 108 EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility conformity EMC Compliance was d
320. emonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities EN 55103 1 2009 Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use E Environment E2 commercial and light industrial m Part 1 Emission EN 55022 2006 Class B radiated and conducted emissions EN 55103 1 2009 Annex A Radiated magnetic field emissions m Part 2 Immunity JEC 61000 4 2 2001 Electrostatic discharge immunity IEC 61000 4 3 2007 RF electromagnetic field immunity JEC 61000 4 4 2004 Electrical fast transient burst immunity IJEC 61000 4 5 2005 Power line surge immunity TEC 61000 4 6 2006 Conducted RF Immunity JEC 61000 4 11 2004 Voltage dips and interruptions immunity EN 55103 2 2009 Annex A Radiated magnetic field immunity EN 55103 2 2009 Annex B Balanced ports common mode immunity EN 61000 3 2 2006 AC power line harmonic emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 Voltage changes fluctuations and flicker European contact Tektronix UK Ltd Western Peninsula Western Road Bracknell RG12 IRF United Kingdom TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual XV Compliance information EMC compliance Australia New Zealand declaration of conformity EMC Safety compliance EC declaration of conformity low voltage U S nationally recognized testing laboratory listing Canadian certification Additional com
321. ems in the main menu and submenus to select the signal format and test signal you want to output from the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 and BARS connectors and to set the other output parameters Refer to ATG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu and the submenu items See page 3 21 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module To select an output signal on the ATG7 module To select the signal format To select the test signal The SIGNAL connector on the ATG7 module provides the capability to output test signals assigned to the front panel test signal buttons To output a signal from the connector you need to select a signal format and an output signal as described below Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe ATG7 module menu is not displayed press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 module main menu appears as shown below ATG x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows ATG x SELECT FORMAT NTSC Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock occurs All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding te
322. enaes 3 221 HDVG7 module product description cc ccc cece eee eee eee nee eee n ne eee t nee n ee nnaes 3 221 How to operate the HDVG7 module 0 cece ccc cece ene needed enn e ented etna enna es 3 222 To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module 0c cece cece ence ne eee e eee eeneennaes 3 223 HDVG7 module main Menu 6 0 cece e cece ee ne eee eee EEE E A E E ER E E ESS 3 225 HDVG7 module factory default settings 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee eee cnet ents eee ene eeneennees 3 242 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 00 cc cece cece eee ee eee een eees 3 244 SDI7 module product description c cece cece ene EEE EEE EEE Ea 3 244 How to operate the SDI7 module 0 ccc cece ccc ene ene e eden ene ene e ne ene nna 3 245 To enter the option key on the SDI7 module cece cece cece cence eee e eee nee e eee eneennaes 3 247 To select an output signal on the SDI7 module 00 ccc cece cece ce ence e eee eee eeaeeneennaes 3 249 SDI7 module zone plate signals 0 cece cece ec enn A EAER E EEE EE Ea 3 262 SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters 0 ec eceecee cence eee eee eee teeeneenees 3 265 SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters 0 cece cece eee e eee e ee resne eee eae e eee ene ees 3 267 How to use zone plate signals on the SDI7 module 0 ccce cece cece cence ence eee eeneenn
323. enerator Platform will also operate in the TG8000 mainframe GPS7 module The adjustment of the mainframe oscillator depends on the mainframe in which the GPS7 module is installed TG8000 mainframe You need to set only the internal frequency of the mainframe oscillator See page 3 100 GPS7 module oven calibration procedures TG700 mainframe You need to set the internal frequency of the mainframe oscillator and characterize the mainframe oscillator frequency as a function of voltage Refer to the TG700 User Manual for more information Tektronix part number 071 1970 XX SDI7 module The behavior of the Moving Picture function depends on the mainframe in which the SDI7 module is installed TG8000 mainframe When Moving Picture is enabled the circle and text overlays remain static regardless of the signal type standard test signal or frame BMP picture However the logo overlay remains static for only standard test signals but continues to move when used with a frame BMP picture TG700 mainframe When Moving Picture is enabled the circle and text overlays remain static and the logo overlay moves regardless of the signal type standard test signal or frame BMP picture The following table lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the TG8000 mainframe and modules Table 1 1 Standard and optional accessories Tektronix Accessory Std Opt part number TG8000 Multiformat Te
324. enerator module Sample Offset Use this menu selection to set the sample number where the ancillary data header will be This is the first word of the ancillary data packet NOTE Be sure to change the sample offset when you change the raster size Otherwise the ANC insertion may occur in an unexpected place or even be outside the raster structure The sample offset is set relative to SAV in order to use standard sample numbering However this means that the most normal location at the start of HANC varies as a function of raster size Video Channel Use this menu selection to set the video channel to Luma or Chroma Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it Link Location Use this menu selection to set the link location to Link A or Link B Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it This menu selection is available only in 3G B formats Stream Location Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only in 2xHD formats NOTE This is an example only Inserting an AFD packet will not affect the video produced by the SDI7 module SDI7 module ancillary data As an example one of the ancillary data payloads that can be easily generated payloa
325. ent NET An Interworld Highway LLC Company TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual FOUCAULT Tektronix 071 3036 02 S TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual This document supports software version 1 1 and above www tektronix com Tektronix 071 3036 02 S Copyright Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14150 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support In North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Warranty Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defec
326. ent YCbCr format R component GBR format or Z component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Edge Filter Enables or disables the Edge Filter on serial digital video signals that have a filter This control has no effect on signals without a filter Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When the edge filter is enabled certain data transitions between two levels are run through a low pass filter to set rise times pulse widths and to prevent ringing If the filter is disabled the edges will not be filtered The filter should not be disabled in broadcast environments Edge filtering is not necessary in certain environments such as digital cinema applications and several types of picture monitors and projectors In these cases disabling the edge filtering will result in instantaneous level changes for adjacent color bars AV Timing Mode Turns the AV Timing Mode on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection In the AV Timing mode the video and audio are continuously cycled between being on as configured for 1 second then set to black and muted for 4 seconds Use this signal to measure the AV delay th
327. enu and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select User Custom 1 or User Custom 2 7 Press the ENTER button to save the modified signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 167 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters NOTE Zone plate variations can be sinusoidal square or triangular These discussions of zone plated parameters will refer to sinusoidal variations for convenience Zone plate patterns are made up of sinusoidal variations in luminance with the peaks of the sine waves resulting in white areas on the video screen and the wave troughs shown as gray or black The cycles can occur in all three of the video dimensions horizontally or along each line of the picture vertically or down the video frame and temporally with time The three dimensions are often referred to by the shorthand designations of X Y and T The luminance of any point in the picture physically on the screen and in time is determined by the value of sine at that particular point the value of sine follows from the phase of the cycle at that point and by the definition of a zone plate the phase of any point is determined by the equation bayt ke kx x ky y kr t kxr at kyr yt kxy xy 1 1 1 5 kx x ahr y ahr t where x y and t are the coordinates of the point in question and ko kx ky kr kxr
328. eo in the frame picture file has fast transitions that exceed the normal video limits then the final output may ring excessively and therefore not be appropriate for transmission In most cases the picture file should be processed to limit the edge speed before it is downloaded to the SDI7 m Ifthe video in the frame picture file is not shaped at the edges of the raster then there may be ringing if the signal is put in motion If this is a concern then the picture file should be processed to have gradual transitions at the edges before it is downloaded m Ifthe frame picture file is used at a raster that is smaller than the native size of the file then it will be truncated at the output raster size which may create unshaped edges These will be masked for normal operation but will be exposed if the signal is set in motion If this is a problem then the user should create a second version of the picture file that has the desired native raster size and has shaped edges Ifa frame picture file is used at a raster size greater than the native size of the file then the two edges will inherently end up somewhere inside the output raster image If the file has unshaped edges then the output may have excessive ringing even when not in motion If this is a concern then the picture file should be processed to have gradual transitions at the edges before it is downloaded TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 261 SDI7 Dual Cha
329. ep or from the two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate The zone plate signal whose name is displayed will continue to be output until a different signal is selected even if you press the BACK button If you select a different signal such as a color bar signal and then press the SWEEP button again the last displayed zone plate signal will be shown as the default and will again be the output signal To modify a zone plate There are times when a specific test case requires a modified zone plate signal signal on the SDI7 module By making and saving changes to the zone plate parameters you can create a new signal that is based on the selected signal and then save that new signal Changes you make affect only the new signal the standard zone plate signal used as a basis for the new signal is not changed Before making changes make sure you are familiar with both the zone plate pattern control parameters below and zone plate pattern dependent parameters See page 3 267 SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters Perform the following steps to change a zone plate signal s parameters 1 Press the SWEEP button to enter the zone plate signal menu 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal H Sine H Sweep V Sine and V Sweep or two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate
330. equency of the mainframe internal oscillator without removing the instrument from service This menu item appears only when the mainframe has software version 5 1 or above installed and when there is GPS7 module installed in the mainframe Select CAL OVEN and then press the ENTER button to access the CAL OVEN submenu See page 2 46 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 33 Operating basics OPTIONS submenu SDI7 module only This submenu is available only if an SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe Use this menu to view the unique module ID of the selected SDI7 module to view or enter the option key for Option 3G and to view the status of whether the 3G option has been enabled The following figure shows the OPTIONS submenu NOTE If you ordered Option 3G as an upgrade to the SDI7 module you must enter the option key to enable the option Select OPTIONS in the main menu TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x MODULE ID XXXXXXXXXXXX TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x OPTION KEY d TG8000 UTILITY SDI7 x OPT NONE 3036 092 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics MODULE ID Displays the unique ID of the selected SDI7 module You will need to provide this ID number when you order Option 3G OPTION KEY Displays the option key assigned to the selected SDI7 module When Option 3G is not enabled the option key string is blank as shown below TG8000 UT
331. er 59 94 29 97 23 98 J gt Integer 60 50 30 25 24 m Non Integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 3036 086 Figure 3 37 BG7 module HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu BG7 module Use this submenu to adjust the timing offset of the selected BLACK output TIMING submenu relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal Use the up A or down arrow button to select between Vertical and Horizontal offset The following figure shows the TIMING submenu From SELECT FORMAT submenu BG x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s lt gt Adjust vertical timing BG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal 0 0000 msec lt gt Adjust horizontal timing Figure 3 38 BG7 module TIMING submenu NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously The horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments You can match the timing of the AGL7 module to the BG7 module by adjusting the fine timing controls on the AGL7 module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 69 BG7 Black Generator module Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the vertical timing For NTSC and PAL you can adjust the timing by 2 a color frame For HDTV trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 2 a field or frame progressive or interlaced signals respectively See Table 3 15 Horizontal
332. er cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument Avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning Use only enough liquid to dampen the cleaning cloth 1 Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint free cloth 2 Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened with a 75 isopropyl alcohol and water solution Do not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with a 75 isopropyl alcohol and water solution 2 68 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Modules AG7 Audio Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the AG7 Audio Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about the module AG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 7 AG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 15 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module AG7 module product description The AG7 Audio Generator module can output serial digital audio signals that comply with the AES EBU standard The module contains the following features 8 channels 4
333. er files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 NOTE If you load the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml enhanced signal sets on your TG8000 generator you can delete the Flat Fields xml file from the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory since it contains a duplicate copy of a subset of the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml patterns 4 After you load the new signal set file s on the TG8000 generator you must either reboot the TG8000 or perform the following SCPI command before the new signals will be available OUTPut 1 2 SYNThesizer SIGNal BUILd This command rebuilds the XML signal library and will detect any newly added signals To reinstall the factory default signal sets To reinstall the factory default signal sets perform the previous procedure to install the signal set files from the following directory on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD Module Test Signal Library gt HD3G7 Signal Library gt Standard Signal Set After you reinstall the standard signal sets delete the enhanced signal set file s from the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory and then reboot the instrument TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module zone plate signals Zone plate video test patterns or simply zone plates have become important tools for the evaluation of modern video processing systems and techniques They are called zone plates because the cla
334. er second signal is located with respect to video framing Frame Engine The frame engine supplies frame pulse signals based on the SMPTE Epoch to each video output This ensures that they are properly aligned with respect to the calculated phase for the selected video format of each output Output Timing Each video output has an independent offset that can be specified to shift that output in order to align the video and LTC signals in the studio This time adjustment does not affect the timecode that is applied to that output the signal and timecode stay together as the timing is changed The timing offset range and resolution depend on the signal See the specific output menu for details Leap Second Information The GPS signal indicates the number of leap seconds between GPS time and UTC As of December 31 2008 a total of 34 leap seconds are required for the adjustment between TAI and UTC This information only stays current when a GPS signal is connected On instrument boot up stored leap second information is used and an asterisk appears next to the time in the status screen until the leap second information from the GPS signal is received Time Zone Offset The GPS7 has a selectable offset between UTC and the local time usually representing the local time zone This offset can be specified in hours minutes seconds allowing specification of time zones that do not align with the usual hours only offset or for other applications not r
335. erator User Manual 2 59 Operating basics 11 Perform the firmware upgrade a On the PC double click the transfer exe file to launch the transfer program b Type the IP address or DNS name of the instrument you are upgrading and then press Enter This starts the firmware upgrade process CAUTION To prevent upgrade failure do not close the transfer exe window until the transfer utility asks for another IP address When the firmware upgrade completes the instrument should reboot c The transfer utility displays done when the software upgrade completes and asks for the address of another instrument When the software upgrade completes the instrument should reboot Please enter DNS name or address of target instrument 128 181 221 2 Opened TCP connection to 128 181 221 2 77 Reading Firmware Data done Erasing Flash done Programming Flash done Verifying Flash Programming done done Please enter DNS name or address of target instrument Figure 2 31 Example transfer exe window after the network upgrade is complete 12 If the instrument did not reboot at the completion of the firmware upgrade remove and reapply power to the instrument to cause it to reboot 2 60 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics 13 After the upgrade process is complete and the instrument reboots restore the user created files CAUTION To prevent the loss of your user files be sur
336. ered text string or the selected text file Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select text string to be entered from the front panel or a text file stored in the SDI7 TEXT directory Press the ENTER button confirm the selection EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to move the underscore character __ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down V arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode NOTE The position of the text overlay is referenced from the top left of the active picture X Position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 99 0 in 0 1 steps Press the ENTER button confirm the selection Y Position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right
337. espond to digital cinema Table 3 42 HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars Color Bar Patch 1 Color Bar Patch 2 LINEARITY Linearity Step Black White Step Black Dark Gray Horizontal Gradient Vertical Gradient FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Flat Field White Flat Field Black to White Step 1 Black to White Step 2 Black to White Step 3 Black to White Step 4 Black to White Step 5 Black to White Step 6 Black to White Step 7 Black to White Step 8 Black to White Step 9 Black to White Step 10 Black to Gray Step 1 Black to Gray Step 2 Black to Gray Step 3 Black to Gray Step 4 Black to Gray Step 5 Black to Gray Step 6 Black to Gray Step 7 Black to Gray Step 8 Black to Gray Step 9 Black to Gray Step 10 MULTI BURST SWEEP a MONITOR Monitor Red 1 Field Red 2 Field Green 1 Field Green 2 Field Blue 1 Field Blue 2 Field Cyan 1 Field Cyan 2 Field Magenta 1 Field Magenta 2 Field Yellow 1 Field Yellow 2 Field Grid Checkerboard Aspect Ratio PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window TIMING SDI SDI Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Use this button to select the converter mode of operation and Embedded audio selection menu See page 3 214 To select the Converter mode on the HDLG7 module To set the gradient starting point When you select Horizontal Gradient or Vertica
338. ess tenes 3 82 DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu 00 cece cece cence cence eens teense enna 3 83 DVG7 module LOGO submenu 0 c cece ence cence ence eens eee ee eee AEEA 3 84 DVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 0c ccc ccc cence cence cence eens eee ee enna 3 85 DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 00 ccc ccc e cece cence eens eens teens eeeeaes 3 87 DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu cc ccc cece cence eee e eee eeeeeeeneaes 3 88 DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 0 0 00 ccc ce cee ee ene ee eee eeeeees 3 89 DVG7 module TIMING submenu 00 ccc cece cence cence eens eee ne tenet eeeeaes 3 91 DVG7 module VIDEO submenu ccc cece cece eee ne eens cent eee eneeenees 3 92 DVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only ce cceeee cece eens eee e ees 3 94 Simplified GPS antenna system 0 cece eee e cece e ene eee e ee eee eee e nae enae ees 3 102 Time flow block diagram 06 ccee cece EEE EEE Eee 3 106 GPS7 module Mam MENU cesses Gives We dvoddoRea wane si eleeey ede oede Avene ces ban eeo lie ede as 3 112 GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu 0 cc cece ccc e eee eee eea scenes enenes 3 116 GPS7 module BLACK submenu ccc cece cece cece ee ence eens eeeeae enna 3 120 GPS7 module BLACK TIMING submenu 0 c ccc cence cence eens eens 3 122 GPS7 module HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu
339. ess the front panel OTHER button The menu display changes as follows HDLG7 x CONVERTER Normal GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the OTHER button repeatedly to select between Normal and Y to GBR Normal The incoming YCbCr signal is converted to a normal dual link output Y to GBR The incoming Y data is applied to the G B and R outputs This allows higher bandwidth data such as multiburst or sweep to be placed on all three channels If the sampling structure is for a YCbCr or XYZ output the Y to GBR selection is not available 3 Press the up A or down arrow button to select Embedded Audio selection menu Then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the following Link A Only Places the incoming embedded audio on the converter mode Dual Link A output Conforms to the SMPTE 372M standard In the case of converting 1920x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048 1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio 8 channels two groups will be placed on the Link A output and the other 8 channels two groups will be placed on the Link B output Link B Only Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode Dual Link B output In the case of converting 1920 1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio the two lowest number embedded audio groups groups 1 and 2 will be allowed on
340. est Signal Generator User Manual 3 131 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module How to set the time of day in Internal mode Perform the following steps to set the Time of Day in Internal mode 1 Set the Time of Day source to Internal a From the GPS7 module main menu use the up A or down V arrow button to select TIME SETUP SELECT MENU b Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select TIME OF DAY menu and then press the ENTER button c In the TIME OF DAY submenu use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Source Internal Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select INTERNAL lt time gt 3 Press the ENTER button to enter the date and time edit mode 4 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the time offset to change An underline character appears under the selected time digit The date and time digits take the following form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS 5 After you select an offset digit use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time rN CAUTION When you press the ENTER button this applies the start time and date offset Typically this causes a disruption to the syncs so care should be taken to verify the date and time are correct before activating Internal mode time of day setting 6 Press the EN
341. et the payload parity Set the data ID DID 0x01 ak V A V ENTER g lt gt Set the secondary ID V BACK HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD SDID 0x01 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD DC 0x01 1 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD UDW 000 0x00 1 E Set the data count ENTER lt gt Set the UDW HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Clear entire UDW Clear UDW Clear entire UDW rAd BACK ENTER HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD CS 0x00 Auto 0x202 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Auto Calculate CS Enable HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Line 9 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Select field structure Field 1 Only lt gt Kye Continued on the next page 3036 045 g lt q gt Set the checksum BACK lt gt Enable Disable checksum auto calculation x E Select line for ANC Payload Figure 3 92 HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 195 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module From previous page p A A HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Field 1 Line 9 A V iei lt gt Select field structure A V HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Field 2 Line 9 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Sample Offset 1928 HANC HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD zj gt Video Channel Luma lt gt Select field structure lt gt Set sample offset Select Luma or Chroma HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Link Location Link A lt gt Select Link A or Link B HD3G7 x ANC PAYL
342. evel Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 100 Red 75 Red 2T Pulse amp Bar T Pulses 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie Test Matrix 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars Oversize Ramp Luminance Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix 5 Step SWEEP Sweep MONITOR Monitor PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing SDI OTHER Other 625 GBR format COLOR BAR Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst 100 Sweep Convergence Pattern Grey Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge White Window 4 Level Ped amp Pluge Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Bowtie SWEEP Sweep MONITOR Monitor PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing SDI OTHER TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module main menu Use the AVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signal Set the APL settings on the output signal Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button A AVG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars To MOVING PICTURE submenu To
343. ference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module HDVG7 module product description The HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module provides 1 485 Gb s serial digital video signals in various formats The module provides the following features Two serial digital video outputs Two serial digital black outputs Option BK Supports SMPTE 274M 1080 SMPTE 240M 1035 and SMPTE 296M 720 m Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal m Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal m Generates timecode with ATC when a GPS7 module is installed Upto 16 channels of Embedded Audio Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 221 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Generates video signals with 24 or 20 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz The module supports the following audio frequencies Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz How to operate the HDVG7 module 3 222 After the module is installed in the mainframe and the m
344. ference inputs the loopthrough inputs and the terminated CW input The AGL7 module can genlock the following signals m NTSC black burst signal burst lock or syne lock m PAL black burst signal burst lock and sync lock HDTV trilevel sync signal m CW 1 3 58 NTSC sub carrier 4 43 PAL sub carrier 5 and 10 MHz Alarm output capability The AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3 x or above to support outputting an alarm signal NOTE The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable See page 2 49 How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules There are three rear panel output connectors that can output black burst signals and HDTV trilevel sync signals TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 7 AGL7 Analog Genlock module How to operate the AGL7 module After the AGL7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display ag After the initial
345. file transfer 2 65 Functional checks 1 15 AG7 1 15 AGL7 1 16 ATG7 1 18 AVG7 1 20 AWVG7 1 22 BG7 1 23 DVG7 1 24 GPS7 1 25 HD3G7 1 35 HDLG7 1 37 HDVG7 1 39 SDI7 1 40 G General Purpose Interface Mainframe See GPI GPI Mainframe 2 49 GPI port 2 6 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module See GPS7 GPS7 10 MHz connector 2 14 ALARM DELAY submenu 3 140 ALARM TIME submenu 3 139 ANTENNA connector 2 13 Antenna power 3 128 Antenna system 3 102 BLACK 1 connector 2 14 BLACK 2 connector 2 14 BLACK 3 connector 2 14 BLACK submenu 3 120 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 146 DST SCHEDULE submenu 3 134 Factory default settings 3 147 Functional checks 1 25 GPI submenu 3 144 GPO submenu 3 145 GPS SETUP submenu 3 128 HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu 3 69 3 124 JAM SYNC submenu 3 137 LEAP SECOND submenu 3 138 LTC submenu 3 142 LTC TIMING submenu 3 144 LTC GPI connector 2 13 Main menu 3 111 Operating procedure 3 99 Oven calibration 3 100 POWER indicator 2 13 3 129 Product description 3 98 PROGRAM TIME submenu 3 136 Rear panel connectors 2 12 REF IN connector 2 14 REFERENCE submenu 3 116 TIME OF DAY submenu 3 130 TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu 3 133 TIMECODE submenu 3 125 VITC submenu 3 127 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index H Hardware installation 1 5 HD Dual Link Video Generator See HDLG7 HD3G7 ANC PAYLOAD submenu 3 194 Ancillary data pa
346. for the HDLG7 module 3 Select the converter mode to provide a dual link signal 4 Press the front panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu Use this mode to generate either HD SDI video test signals or projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only 1 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 210 To select the signal format on the HDLG7 module 2 Select the test signal that you want to generate See page 3 211 To select the test signal on the HDLG7 module 3 Press the front panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 209 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module To select the signal format on the HDLG7 module 3 210 The following table lists the available signal formats NOTE Framing resynchronization occurs when the signal format is changed Selecting the 1080 50p 1080 59 94p or 1080 60p format forces the sampling structure to be set to YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits Selecting a 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 format will limit the sampling structure to either RGB or XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits Refer to SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH for more information See page 3 217 Table 3 40 HDLG7 module signal formats 1980 x 1080 format 1080 23 98sF 1080 24sF 1080 23 98p 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 29 97p 1080 30p 1080 50i 1080 59 94i 1080 60i 1080 50p 1080 59 94p 1080 60p 2048 x 1
347. ft lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 59 94i and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection Disconnect the BNC cable from the NTSC PAL waveform monitor and then reconnect it to the HDTV waveform monitor Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed Repeat steps 6 through 14 for the BLACK 2 BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs Use the following procedure to check that the DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is functional Required equipment Serial digital waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 main menu shown below appears DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 6 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a format then press the ENTER button 7 Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal 8 Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the serial digital waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable 9 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal
348. g a preset The TG8000 mainframe provides a dedicated RJ 45 connector on the rear panel to serve as a General Purpose Interface GPI With the mainframe GPI you can recall one of the seven available presets and output an alarm signal This section describes how to use the mainframe GPI and its available features The following figure shows the pin assignments of the GPI connector Use pins 1 2 and 3 to input signals for recalling a preset Use pin 4 to output an alarm signal Frame ground is used for the ground return When using a shielded LAN cable shielded twisted pair cable you can use the shield of the cable as ground Table 2 5 Pin assignments of the mainframe GPI connector Pin number Function Level 1 2 and 3 Input High gt 2 4 V or open connected to an internal 10 kQ pull up resistor Low lt 0 8 V or ground input impedance 10 kQ Timing Ignores pulses lt 40 ms and always detects pulses gt 60 ms 6 Output Low lt 0 4 V or ground when sinking 100 mA maximum on resistance 4 Q You can recall one of the seven presets by combinations of signal levels for pins 1 2 and 3 of the GPI connector The following table shows the combinations of signal levels for the pins and the preset number to be recalled Table 2 6 Signal level combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe GPI Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Preset number High High Low 1 High Low High 2 High Low Low 3 Low Hig
349. ght gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices PROGRAM TIME Uses the program time counter as the timecode m TIME OF DAY Uses the time of day as determined by the GPS7 module This selection is available only if a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument Press ENTER to apply initial time Press the ENTER button to apply the initial time Initial time is set in the next menu item This selection is available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed this function is controlled from the GPS7 module main menu Initial Time Use this menu selection to set the Initial Time Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adjust the time Press the ENTER button to confirm the time This selection is available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed this function is controlled from the GPS7 module main menu Offset Use this menu selection to set a Timecode Offset for the SDI7 module outputs This is an offset from the timecode source Time of Day or Program Time from the GPS7 module Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adj
350. gital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the serial digital video signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between 10 bits and 8 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection EDH Turns the insertion of the EDH Error Detection and Handling information on or off on the serial digital video signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AV timing mode Turns the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When you turn this mode on the specified audio and video signals are synchronously on for 0 5 second and off for 4 5 seconds With this signal you can measure the time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of the television signal during signal transport The time delay can be measured by a video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when you use this mode m Audio signal CH1 and CH2 of Group 1 10000 Hz 20 dBFS m
351. gnal Generator User Manual Operating basics d Press the ENTER button to upgrade the module e The upgrade will take approximately three minutes After it is complete remove power from the TG8000 and then reapply power to reboot the system NOTE If you are upgrading the FPGA of multiple HDLG7 modules you need to upgrade them separately and reboot the instrument after each upgrade For example if you have three HDLG7s the FPGA upgrade process sequence will be select and upgrade a module then reboot then select and upgrade another module then reboot select and upgrade the final module then reboot You do not need to upgrade the modules in any particular order 20 Verify that the firmware version in the instrument is the same version you just installed a Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET b Press the up A or down V arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button c Press the up A or down arrow button to select VERSION INFO F W d In the second line of the display readout verify that the CPU 0 version number is the same version number as the upgrade file you installed To upgrade the firmware 1 Connect the TG8000 generator and a PC to your local Ethernet network See using an Ethernet network page 2 47 How to connect the generator to a network 2 Download the upgrade files to the PC See page 2 52 Before you begin the upgrade Power on the ins
352. gnal format If there is no input or the format is not the correct rate the following messages will appear on the second line of the LCD No Input Signal or Input Signal Error Check FORMAT GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure Generator Mode The figure below shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the generator mode HDLG7 x STATUS 100 Color Bars 1080 24sF GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 100 Color Bars Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated As different generator signal is selected its name will be displayed 1080 24sF Indicates the output format GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH Selects the sampling structure and pixel depth of the output signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the formats listed in the table below Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Table 3 43 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats 1920 x 1080 formats 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 GBR 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 217 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module 3 218 Table 3 43 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats cont 1920 x 1080 formats 2K
353. h High 4 Low High Low 5 Low Low High 6 Low Low Low 7 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 49 Operating basics All of the input signals are active low When the signal level s for the specified pin s goes from High to Low the corresponding preset is recalled For example when the signal level for pin 3 goes from High to Low preset 1 is recalled NOTE Since the signal transition cannot be detected on the edge of the signal the signal level needs to be held low for about 0 5 seconds before the preset signal is recognized The time required to change the instrument settings depends on the contents of the selected preset Outputting an alarm signal The TG8000 can output an alarm signal from pin 6 on the GPI port connector when an internal error occurs Since the output signal is an active low the signal level for pin 6 goes from High to Low when any errors occur In addition you can specify a BLACK output on the AGL7 module as an alarm output When an enabled AGL7 alarm occurs the output signal from the selected connector turns off for about 60 ms NOTE The AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3 x or above to support outputting an alarm signal The alarm signal is output when one of the following internal errors occurs The fan stops working GPI alarm only NOTE The following genlock alarms are available only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is installed A genlock signal is not connected
354. h the upgrade or press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade 16 Monitor the progress of the upgrade operation a During the upgrade process the display shows the progress of the upgrade and shows messages such as Reading Firmware Data and Erasing Application FS Partition This may take a several minutes b When the upgrade has completed the message Tektronix Generator Booting is displayed while the instrument reboots before the menu display returns to normal 17 After the upgrade process is complete and the instrument reboots restore the user created files a Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET b Press the up A or down V arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button c Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE d Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Restore All User Data from USB and then press the ENTER button to start the restore process TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 55 Operating basics e A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation f During the first stage of the copy process the display shows the names of the files as they are copied Depending on the size of the files being copied this may take a couple of minutes g When all of the files
355. hange VITC may have DST shift already applied To avoid duplicating DST shifts disable the DST SCHEDULER if the time of day reference has DST applied Task Scheduler The task scheduler is responsible for triggering scheduled events at the appropriate time This includes DST changes deferred leap second adjustments and triggered alarm outputs NTP Server The GPS7 includes an implementation of the Simple Network Time Protocol using the network interface of the TG8000 mainframe The NTP server is automatic when the Master time is set to GPS and the GPS7 acquires a valid time the server will respond with valid NTP packets to time requests from NTP clients When the Master time is set to GPS the server always responds with UTC time only It is the responsibility of the NTP client PC workstation file server etc to be configured with the correct time zone offset The NTP Server will also respond with valid NTP packets when the Master time is set to Internal mode When using VITC input as the time reference the NTP service is not available TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 109 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module To configure GPS7 module 3 110 settings TC Offset Every timecode output has an independent offset hours minutes seconds frames that can be added to the value of the selected timecode source TC Engine The timecode engine runs at the rate specified through the user interface an
356. hase reading show Lock 14 Press the right arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds 15 Press the right arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that the voltage readings show OK 16 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal 17 Check that the signal appears as expected Check for errors on the video session screen of the waveform monitor 18 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector 19 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 59 94p then press ENTER 20 Check that the signal appears as expected on the waveform monitor and check for errors on the video session screen Converter function 21 Set the HDTV video generator as indicated below Output signal Ramp Format 1080 59 941 22 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown below appears HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94 YCbCr 422 10b 23 24 25 Connect the output connector on the HDTV video generator to the HD SDI IN connector on the HD3G7 using the 75 Q BNC cable Connect the SIGNAL 1 output connector on the HD3G7 to an SDI input connector on the waveform monitor using a 75 Q BNC cable Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 59 94p and then press the ENTER
357. hat are detected in the input signal This menu provides status information only and does not affect operating behavior Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 202 HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu CALIBRATION Provides a variety of special signals to help measure amplitude and rise time and allows you to adjust serial output amplitude This menu is accessible in factory mode only See page 3 204 HD3G7 module CALIBRATION submenu HD3G7 module Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample STATUS menu structure Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for each of the operating modes generator and converter Generator Mode The following figure shows an example STATUS display when the module is in generator mode HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 Figure 3 84 HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode 75 Color Bars 100 White Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated 3G A Indicates the 3 Gb s signal and the level currently being generated 1080 59 94p Indicates the output format YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure Converter Mode The following figure shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the converter mode HD3G7 x CONVERTER 3G A 1080 59 941 YCbCr 4 2 2 10b 1970 233 m Converter 3G A
358. he drive from the instrument TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics BACKUP RESTORE Backs up or restores the instrument presets or all user data to or from a connected USB drive Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the type of backup or restore operation and then press the ENTER button to perform the operation See page 2 63 How to backup restore presets and user data using a USB drive FLASH MEMORY Displays the total amount of flash memory that is installed in the mainframe and displays the amount of memory that remains free available The flash memory is used by the test signal files that you install in the mainframe When the amount of available memory is low you may need to delete test signals from memory before you can install new test signals DIAGNOSTICS Displays the results of diagnostic tests or executes the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and installed modules Use the up A or down Y arrow button to display diagnostic results or to choose to run the diagnostic routines When diagnostic results are displayed use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between the various diagnostic results When you select DIAGNOSTICS and then press the ENTER button you access the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 2 42 Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu CAL OVEN This menu item is available only when a GPS7 module is installed in the mainframe Calibrates the fr
359. he horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module Use this menu to edit a text overlaid on the output test signal and to set the ID TEXT submenu display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu A HDVG x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 0 0 APH Disable SJL Enable gt Set the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT EDIT HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 106 HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu Set the vertical position lt a gt Edit text V ENTER Save the text to the signal file Status Enables or disab
360. he parties with respect to the use reproduction and transfer of the Program Neither this Agreement nor the license granted herein is assignable or transferable by Customer without the prior written consent of Tektronix This Agreement and the license granted herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of Oregon All questions regarding this Agreement or the license granted herein should be directed to the nearest Tektronix Sales Office Table of Contents Generali safety SUMMALY lt 4 53 0002 ind renret a tecece tis saseebaedeviwadecentad Soenreebed dauneede ig seaaeraenteesan xii Service safety SUMMALY er reiii E ea sa saad onrieded Sonnsencdaseaqetameddidddeeeesadeal adhe daddauesteekasawaas xiv Compliance informati n essnee non ti een EAEE EEE EEE EEEE EERE ST ONN EERE XV EMC comp lane ss rrer ooien E a senses hedeaeids cords ddeneereons taues dele sianenierdeveens XV Safety COMPNANGe cececsrsaccccw ds sovnussen sderendgadae sense AE EERE EE E ERREAREN ARTENA xvi Environmental considerations 0 cc cece eee e eee rses srs nen e nee eee e ene eee tne teen ene eS xviii Prefa Cerese rieiorenie i mina E E E EE T E T E O E E E E xix Supported Products ccvsreescccwaseehawsead oaviedeaed nag dgaag rules ananassae REEERE AER RRRA A xix About this manu l siseses inii EEE NE E E E REEE N E EE xix Product documentation o isccescrer rori o E E ER OE O eA N nA XX Getting started Getting Started ii wrosasccoatoddiatad E E REE
361. he test signal output from APL submenu the SIGNAL connector Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the APL submenu Select APL in the main menu APL OFF High APL ATG x APL MODE Low APL ARCORE lt gt APL Bounce ATG7 x APL PERIOD 1 0 sec 1 gt Set the bounce period Figure 3 15 ATG7 module APL submenu MODE Sets the output mode of the APL signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the mode and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The choices are m APL OFF Outputs the selected signal without making any changes High APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 100 flat field signal and then outputs them Low APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 0 flat field signal and then outputs them TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 27 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module APL Bounce Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately for the period set in the PERIOD menu item Bounce Outputs the 100 flat field signal and 0 flat field signal alternately regardless of the selected signal for the period set in the PERIOD menu item PERIOD Sets the
362. he time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of the television signal during signal transport The time delay can be measured by a video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when you use this mode m Audio signal CH1 and CH2 of Group 1 10000 Hz 20 dBFS Video signal 100 Flat Field NOTE The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset Use this menu to set the parameters of the serial digital signals output from the BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the BLACK submenu Select BLACK OPTION in the main menu a 2 2 108059 94i 108060 720 60p 1080 23 98sf 108050i 720 50p 1080 29 97p 1080 24sf 720 30p 108023 98p 108030p 720 25p lt J gt gt 10355994 1080 25p 720 24p 72059 94p 1080 24p 72029 97p 1035 60i 720 23 98p Black lt gt 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Group 1 ENTER lt gt Group 2 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 3 Group 4 BACK 3036 089 1 These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to non integer 2 These menu items appear only when the HD tri level sync is set to integer Figure 3 113 HDVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only 3
363. he value from 0 5 seconds to 2 0 seconds in 0 5 second steps 3 46 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 module factory default settings AVG7 Analog Video Generator module The following table shows the factory default settings for the AVG7 Generator module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 9 AVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 ns VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 Composites GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels GIY ON B Pb B Y ON R Pr R Y ON SCH PHASE 0 deg APL MODE APL OFF PERIOD 1 0s TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 47 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about t
364. his module AWVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 11 AWVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 22 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified E TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module AWVG7 module product description 3 48 The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is a 30 MHz bandwidth video signal generator which provides wideband analog component video signals for HDTV systems The module provides the following features Supports the following system formats 1080 601 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 S0p 720 24p and 720 23 98p NOTE Signals for the following system formats are preinstalled in the mainframe 1080 60i 1080 59 94i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 720 60p and 720 59 94p Signals for additional system formats are included on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that is supplied as a standard accessory Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to download signal files from the DVD to the TG8000 Six analog component video outputs Outputs a frame picture cr
365. hrough 254 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module The following figures show the ANC PAYLOAD submenu Select ANC PAYLOAD in the MAIN menu SDI7 x x ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable SDI7 x x ANC PAYLOAD Parity Automatic lt gt Set the payload output lt gt Set the payload parity SDI7 x x ANC PAYLOAD ENER X X DID 0x01 lt Setthe data ID A J BACK ENTER gt lt gt Set the secondary ID BACK 1 gt Set the data count ENTER Ea gt Set the UDW Clear entire UDW Clear entire UDW BACK ENTER SDI x x ANC PAYLOAD CS 0x00 Auto 0x202 E lt q gt Set the checksum BACK lt q gt Enable Disable checksum auto calculation x E Select line for ANC Payload SDI7 x x ANC PAYLOAD Select field structure Field 1 Only lt gt Continued on the next page 3036 061 i Figure 3 135 SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 303 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 304 WK From previous page I X X ld 1 A SDI x x ANC PAYLOAD Stream Location HD Stream 1 1970 330 va SDI7 x x ANC PAYLOAD i lt gt Select field structure Fie Line 9 lt gt Select field structure 1 gt Set sample offset gt Select Luma or Chroma lt J
366. ications NOTE This submenu is available only when BLACK 2 is the selected output TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 123 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this submenu to select whether an integer or non integer clock will be used HD TRI LEVEL SYNC for the HD tri level sync rate for the BLACK outputs Use the left lt 4 or right RATE submenu P arrow button to select Integer 60 50 30 25 24 or Non Integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The clock rate selected here affects which signal formats are available for the BLACK outputs The following figure shows the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu Select the HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE output in the main menu BLACK 1 3 HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE Non Integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 lt gt Integer 60 50 30 25 24 m Non Integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 3036 082 Figure 3 59 GPS7 module HD TRI LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu 3 124 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The TIMECODE submenu following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the BLACK submenu GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE SOURCE J gt U M Time of Day RAA GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 1 gt Set the offset
367. ich AGL7 alarms to enable AGL7 ALARM SELECT This menu item is available only when an AGL7 module is installed in the mainframe When the AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled the AGL7 module blanks one of the black outputs when an enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered Select AGL7 ALARM SELECT and then press the ENTER button to access the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu See page 2 41 AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu FIRMWARE UPGRADE Selects the type of firmware upgrade USB or Network to be performed and initiates the upgrade process Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select USB or Network and then press the ENTER button to start the upgrade process See page 2 51 How to upgrade the instrument firmware USB status Displays the current status of the USB port Not Connected is displayed when no USB drive is connected to the instrument Not Mounted is displayed when a USB drive is connected to the instrument but is not mounted Press the ENTER button to mount the drive Normally a USB drive will automatically mount when the drive is initially connected to the instrument Mounted is displayed when a USB drive is connected to the instrument and is mounted Press the ENTER button to safely unmount the drive The message You May Now Safely Remove USB Drive appears when it is safe to remove the drive CAUTION To prevent the loss of data on the USB drive be sure to unmount the USB drive before you remove t
368. ideo Generator module Sample Offset Use this menu selection to set the sample number where the ancillary data header will be This is the first word of the ancillary data packet Video Channel Use this menu selection to set the video channel to Luma or Chroma Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it Link Location Use this menu selection to set the link location to Link A or Link B Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it This menu selection is available only in 3G B formats Stream Location Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only in 2xHD formats NOTE This is an example only Inserting an AFD packet will not affect the video produced by the HD3G7 module HD3G7 module ancillary As an example one of the ancillary data payloads that can be easily generated by data payload example the HD3G7 module is the Active Format Description AFD AFD is a method of identifying the active area of the video picture to be displayed Using AFD the aspect ratio of the picture can be automatically optimized for the display being used AFD is defined in SMPTE 2016 1 and mapping AFD and bar data is defined in SMPTE 2016 3 The packet format appears as
369. ient of 9 0 will cause the waveform to increase to DC in one aph The frequency will continue to increase to approximately 7 0 c aph by the end of the line Use this formula to calculate Kx and Kx terms for a sweep with the DC point at mid screen Kx 4Raspect x Kx where Raspect 1s the aspect ratio width height of the active format The Horizontal Sweep zone plate H Sweep is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 79 Figure 3 79 A K x2 only zone plate TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Kxy parameter Display name KXY V Ch H Freq Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kxy V Ch H Freq parameter sets the change in horizontal frequency as a function of the vertical position in the video frame To see the effects of this parameter set the waveform monitor to view one selected line only Then with Kxy set to approximately 25 all other coefficients left at 0 0 look at line waveforms from top to bottom of the frame The horizontal frequency increases slightly on each succeeding line reaching 25 c aph on the last line of active video The result can be thought of as a vertically arranged sweep signal Ky parameter Display name KY V Freq Units cycles per active picture height c aph The Ky V Freq parameter sets the initial vertical frequency of the pattern it is analogous to Kx rotated 90 clockwise T
370. ies with the applicable European Union requirements according to Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and batteries For information about recycling options check the Support Service section of the Tektronix Web site www tektronix com Perchlorate materials This product contains one or more type CR lithium batteries According to the state of California CR lithium batteries are classified as perchlorate materials and require special handling See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for additional information This product is classified as an industrial monitoring and control instrument and is not required to comply with the substance restrictions of the recast RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU until July 22 2017 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Preface This manual describes how to install and operate the TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Supported products The information in this manual applies to the following Tektronix products About this manual TG8000 mainframe includes the replaceable Power Supply module AG7 Audio Generator module AGL7 Analog Genlock module ATG7 Analog Test Generator module AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module BG7 Black Generator module DVG7 Digital Video Generator module GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HDLG7 HD Du
371. ignal See page 3 249 To select an output signal on the SDI7 module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to HDLG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 216 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module To select an output signal on the HDLG7 module To select the Converter mode on the HDLG7 module To select the Generator mode on the HDLG7 module The HDLG7 module has two modes of operation converter or generator To select an output signal perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected mode of operation Use this mode to convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital video stream carrying a SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital dual link video signal 1 Connect an HD SDI signal to the HD SDI IN connector 2 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 210 To select the signal format on the HDLG7 module NOTE To avoid an input signal error select the output signal format that matches the input signal If the input signal format does not match the selected output format the following message appears Input Format mismatch Check FORMAT on the STATUS menu Refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for a listing of the supported input and output format combinations
372. ill flip by 180 the sine wave will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC when the cycle will begin again Display name KYT V Ch V Freq Units c aph per second c aph s The Kyr V Ch V Freq parameter controls the change in vertical sine frequency over time Setting Kyr to 1 0 for example causes the vertical frequency to increase by one c aph each second If KY is initially 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal will flip by 180 the frequency will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC in a repetitive cycle Display name KT T Freq Units cycles per second c s The Kv T Freq parameter if used alone does not create a pattern Rather the entire screen will cycle sinusoidally between white and black The effect will be similar on either line or field display of a waveform monitor Typically a small Kr coefficient is set to add apparent motion to a standard circle sine wave or sweep pattern To see the picture effects of this parameter select any of the standard zone plates and vary Kx Note that the Kr coefficient may be positive or negative the sign will determine the direction of the pattern s motion Display name KT 2 T Sweep Uni
373. ime and then set the Time Setup to Internal in order to transfer that time to the Master Time The time zone offset and leap second information is used to convert local time to a master time that is equivalent to GPS time This allows the Epoch and NTP processes to work the same for both internal and GPS time modes Set the local time zone offset before setting the internal time VITC Reader When the GPS7 is genlocked to NTSC or PAL the Vertical Interval Timecode on the genlock reference input can be decoded and used as the time source This time can be viewed on the status bar and is used as the time source for all the time code outputs Since the phase of the video signals are set by the genlock the epoch system does not operate from the VITC input LTC Reader When the GPS7 reference source is set to INTERNAL NTSC PAL or HD SYNC the LTC signal applied to the LTC 1 input can be used at the time source This time can be viewed on the status bar and is used as a time source for all the time code outputs Since the LTC reader does not provide date and time information the epoch system does not operate from the LTC input Time Setup Selection The possible Time code sources depend on the selected Reference source If GPS signal is the selected reference source then GPS or internal time is available If Genlock is the selected reference source then VITC or internal time is available If Internal is the selected reference source then internal t
374. ime is the time code source If VITC is the time code source then the time synchronization Mode needs to be set There are three choices Synchronize now sets the time when the user presses the ENTER button if the incoming time is valid and stable Synchronize once sets the time once when a valid and stable time code is detected Follow sets the time every time a new stable and valid time is detected Master Time The Master Time is the basis for all timecode outputs and for the phase reference of all video outputs Leap Seconds Leap second information is stored and then updated by satellite every 20 to 30 minutes Offset to TAI TAI is the International Atomic Time represented as the number of seconds since the epoch of 0 00 00 January 1 1958 Proposed standard SMPTE 404M defines the SMPTE Epoch at that same moment There are exactly 8040 days and 19 leap seconds between the SMPTE Epoch TAI and the GPS Epoch TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 107 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Epoch Calculations The number of seconds since the SMPTE Epoch is used to precisely align video frames with the Master Time clock For example an NTSC system operates at 29 97 frames per second 30 fps 1 001 so there are precisely 30 000 frames every 1001 seconds By knowing the total number of seconds since the SMPTE Epoch when all video frames were perfectly aligned the GPS7 module can determine where the GPS pulse p
375. iming to either Serial OH or Analog DAC TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 297 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to set ancillary timecode ATC parameters for the selected output TIMECODE submenu Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the MAIN menu SDI7 x x TIMECODE SOURCE Disable SDI x x TIMECODE INITIAL TIME Press ENTER to Apply Initial Time SDI x x TIMECODE INITIAL TIME Initial Time SDI7 x x TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 SDI7 x x TIMECODE 30 DROP Enable 30 Drop Frame SDI7 x x TIMECODE ANC LTC Disable A y Program Ib Time of Day 2 lt q gt Set the timecode offset is lt gt Enable Disable 30 Drop Frame lt gt gt Enable Disable ATC LTC timecode SDI7 x x TIMECODE ANC VITC bal lt gt Enable Disable ATC VITC timecode Disable A V 1 Only available with no GPS7 module when a GPS7 module is installed the initial time set function is controlled from the GPS7 menu 2 Only available with GPS7 module 3 Non integer frame rates only 3036 060 Figure 3 133 SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu 3 298 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or ri
376. ing messages Setting a delay allows short errors and warnings to be ignored For example with the holdover capability a short GPS unlock will not cause any disruption in the syncs so there is no reason to immediately register an error and trigger an ECO to change Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ALARM DELAY submenu Select ALARM DELAY menu in the main menu GPS7 x TIME SETUP DELAY GPO Loss of Lock 00 00 00 A V GPS7 x TIME SETUP DELAY GPO Signal Warning 00 00 00 A Yy GPS7 x TIME SETUP DELAY Black 2 Blank on Unlock 00 00 00 V 3036 037 gt lt gt Editdelay LP a lt Edit delay gt lt lt Edit delay lt q Figure 3 70 GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu GPO Loss of Lock Use this feature to set a delay between the time when loss of lock is detected and when it is reported on the GPI output Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before a GPO loss of lock warning message is displayed An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change GPO Signal Warning Use this feature to set
377. ion Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the nominal range LTC GPI 15 pin D sub connector that carries four differential LTC signals one ground closure input and two ground closure outputs You can use the menus to independently set the format and timing of the four LTC signals and to select the function of the ground closure input and outputs You can configure LTC1 to be an LTC input instead of an output The supported LTC input signal formats include 23 98 24 25 29 97 drop frame and 30 Hz as per SMPTE 12M The LTC GPI connector provides full functionality when you use the LTC DSUB to XLR breakout cable that is available as an optional accessory with the GPS7 module The LTC GPI connector provides partial functionality when you use a standard RGBHV VGA to BNC breakout cable See Table 2 4 NOTE You do not need the optional LTC and GPI breakout cable if you are using only VITC and or ATC as a timecode signal For correct operation if you use a VGA to BNC breakout cable pins 6 7 8 and 10 must be internally grounded together in the cable and to the connector shell TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 13 Operating basics Table 2 4 GPS7 module LTC GPI connector pin assignments Pin Function VGA cable 1 GP01 Red BNC 6 2 GP02 Green BNC 1o 7 olu 3 GPI Blue BNC o z 4 No connection a O F j 5 LTC4N 10 6
378. iplexing method to Level A or Level B Option 3G only Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the choices listed below Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the OUTPUT MODE submenu SD lt gt wp 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 wine 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 3G Level A 1280 x 720 3G Level A 2K x 1080 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 SDI7 x x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 Available with Option 3G only Figure 3 123 SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu SD The output isa SMPTE 259 compliant signal that runs at 270 Mbps HD 1920 x 1080 The output is a 1080 line SMPTE 274M compliant signal HD 1280 x 720 The output is a 720 line SMPTE 296M compliant signal Level A Option 3G only This is one way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 For the mapping structure signals such as 1080p50 1080p59 94 and 1080p60 a Level A stream looks similar to HD video as defined in SMPTE 292 except the data rate is twice as fast In Level A the lines are sent in order consecutively For other mapping structures the video is at a lower frame rate but has more bits and or includes more channels Refer to the SMPTE 425 standard for details on the Level A mapping method 3 281 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 282
379. iption 3 1 Rear panel connectors 2 7 RESOLUTION submenu 3 3 SILENCE connector 2 7 AGL7 BLACK 1 connector 2 8 BLACK 2 connector 2 8 BLACK 3 connector 2 8 CW connector 2 8 Factory default settings 3 16 Functional checks 1 16 GENLOCK submenu 3 9 3 10 Main menu 3 9 Operating procedure 3 8 OUTPUT submenu 3 12 Product description 3 7 Rear panel connectors 2 8 REF connector 2 8 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 9 SIGNAL submenu 3 13 STATUS submenu 3 9 TIMING submenu 3 14 Alarm status 2 31 Analog Genlock See AGL7 Analog Test Generator See ATG7 Analog Video Generator See AVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator See AWVG7 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Antenna Amplification 3 103 Cabling 3 103 Location 3 103 Requirements for GPS7 3 102 System for GPS7 3 102 ATG7 APL submenu 3 22 3 27 BARS connector 2 10 BLACK 1 connector 2 10 BLACK 2 connector 2 10 Bounce submenu 3 28 Factory default settings 3 28 Functional checks 1 18 ID TEXT submenu 3 22 3 25 Main menu 3 21 Operating procedure 3 18 Product description 3 17 Rear panel connectors 2 10 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 23 SELECT SIGNAL submenu 3 24 SIGNAL connector 2 10 STATUS submenu 3 22 TIMING submenu 3 22 3 26 Audio Generator See AG7 Index 1 Index AVG7 Adjusting the SCH phase 3 45 APL submenu 3 37 3 46 Bounce submenu 3 46 CH 1 connector 2 10 CH 2 connector 2 10 CH 3 connector 2 10
380. is accessed only when the instrument is powered on and initializes FAN SPD Displays the current fan speed in RPM followed by the status OK is displayed as the status when the fan operation is within range WARN is displayed when the fan operation is out of range PS HRS Displays the number of hours that the power supply has been active The instrument uses a log to track the number of hours that the power supply has been powering the instrument For critical applications you may want to replace the power supply periodically to prevent down time The expected life of the power supply varies with the temperature and load For a fully loaded instrument in a 25 C room the power supply is specified to last at least 15 years 131 400 hours For a lightly loaded instrument with only one or two modules running a 25 C the power supply should last 20 years 175 000 hours At the maximum room temperature the expected life of the power supply is significantly less For example for a fully loaded instrument operating at 50 C room temperature the expected life of the power supply is 5 years 43 800 hours Use these guidelines to help you decide when to replace the power supply 2 44 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics RUN Runs the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and the installed modules The instrument must be in Factory mode in order to access this menu selection UN CAUTION Before you execu
381. is empty slot will not be used you must attach a blank panel to the mainframe to control instrument cooling and EMI emissions a Align the blank panel with the open slot of the mainframe b Tighten the two screws to secure the blank panel to the mainframe A blank panel is available as an optional accessory for the TG8000 mainframe Refer to Accessories See page 1 3 6 Ifyou want to install another module into the slot from which the module is removed perform Installing a Module starting at step 4 See page 1 10 Module installation and removal Functional checks Use the following procedures to check that the TG8000 modules installed in your instrument are functional AG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AG7 Audio Generator module check is functional Required equipment Digital audio monitor Oscilloscope m 75 Q BNC cable E 75 Q Termination Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AG7 main menu as shown below appears AG7 x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Channel 1 6 Connect the 1 2 connector to the digital audio monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable TG8000 Multifo
382. is functional See page 1 37 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module HDLG7 module product description The HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module can be operated in either of the following two modes m Dual link converter The module can convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital video stream carrying a SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital dual link video signal Dual link generator The module can output either HD SDI video test signals or projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only Refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for information about which dual link outputs can be converted from each input signal format Refer to To select the HDLG7 module Converter mode for information about the available types of conversions See page 3 214 The module provides the following features Two pairs of dual link outputs that include SMPTE 352 payload Supports a wide variety of output formats 1920 x 1080i 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080PsF 2K x 1080p 2K x 1080PsF and 2K x 1556PsF TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 207 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module Supports the following sampling structures
383. ith your instrument See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module 3 246 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To enter the option key on the SDI7 module If you ordered Option 3G as an upgrade to your existing SDI7 module you must enter the option key that was supplied with the upgrade in order to enable the 3G software option NOTE Ifyou ordered Option 3G at the same time you ordered the SDI7 module the module was shipped from the factory with the option already enabled Each option key applies to only one SDI7 module You will need to enter the option key only once After the option key is entered the option key stays with that SDI7 module enabling Option 3G even when the module is moved to another TG8000 mainframe or to a TG700 mainframe that is running software version 5 6 or above Locate the option key document and then perform the following steps to enter the option key NOTE This procedure uses the instrument front panel to enter the option key You can also use the TG Setup utility to remotely enter the option key Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for information about using TG Setup to enter the option key 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the mainframe main menu is displayed as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 2 Press the up A or down arrow button until TG800
384. ively For other mapping structures the video is at a lower frame rate but has more bits and or includes more channels Refer to the SMPTE 425 standard for details on the Level A mapping method Level B This is an alternate way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 A Level B stream looks similar to dual link as defined in SMPTE 372M The serial data is constructed by interleaving the two links of the dual link video signal As a result some formats will have the serial data take two lines worth of time to propagate This has implications for the effects of the pathological signals and can confuse the definition of timing adjustments Refer to the SMPTE 372M and SMPTE 425 standards for more information 2K x 1080 Available in both Level A and Level B mapping this selection provides 2048 x 1080 resolution signals primarily for digital cinema applications 2xHD Available in Level B mapping 2xHD signals provide two standard SMPTE 292 HD streams in the same format for example 10801 59 94 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams HD Available when the HD mode is selected The output is a 1 485 Gb s SMPTE 292 compliant signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal MOVING PICTURE up down or left right or ran
385. ization process the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AGL7 module main menu appears as shown below AGL7 1 GENLOCK STATUS Internal 5 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus See page 3 9 AGL7 module main menu 3 8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock module AGL7 module main menu Use the AGL7 module main menu to select the genlock source and the output whose parameters are to be changed Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AGL7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button AGL7 1 GENLOCK STATUS 1080 59 94i Internal AGL7 1 GENLOCK AGL7 1 SELECT OUTPUT BLACK V ENTER To GENLOCK submenu BACK ENTER 1 gt ae i To OUTPUT submenu BLACK 3 BACK 3036 010 Figure 3 4 AGL7 module main menu STATUS Displays the genlock source and status The following status messages may appear Locked Loss of Lock and No signal GENLOCK Selects the genlock source and sets the timing offset of the genlock signal relative to the internal reference signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the GENLOCK submenu See page 3 10 SELECT OUTPUT Selects the output for you to change the signal form
386. justs four of the dependent parameters to keep the circle round Table 3 60 SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Parameter definition Circle Circle Frequency maximum c aph The circle frequency is actually the equivalent of the maximum vertical sinusoid frequency at the very top and bottom of the screen see the discussion of the Ky 2 parameter Adjusting the circle frequency has the simple effect of increasing or decreasing the maximum frequency at the outer edges of the pattern However this adjustment actually changes the coefficients of four of the zone plate parameters to keep the pattern round and centered on the screen Diagonal Diagonal Frequency equivalent c aph The diagonal frequency is 2 times the vertical and horizontal frequencies c aph Adjusting the diagonal sine frequency changes both the KX and KY coefficients H Sine Horizontal Frequency MHz The horizontal frequency reported on the display is the real time frequency of the sine wave that causes the vertical bar pattern The maximum frequency is half of the clock frequency used by the generator for the active video standard for example 74 25 MHz 2 37 125 MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency maximum MHz or For horizontal sweep frequencies up to half of the video multiple standard s sampling frequency fs the displayed value is the maximum or swept to frequency of the sine wave For numbers gre
387. k modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Disable Disables the blinking function of the overlay E Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals BORDER Displays a black border around the text and circle overlays when enabled Select this menu item and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Enable or Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE Turn on the border to provide cleaner transitions between the overlay and the test signal This is especially useful for 4 2 2 format signals which may have some ringing when the border is turned off TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the LOGO submenu display position of the logo Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file bmp and use FTP to copy the file to the SDI7 LOGO folder on the TG8000 mainframe The instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 Refer to the TG amp 000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about
388. kyr kxy kx2 ky2 and kr2 are constants All HD3G7 zone plate patterns are defined with coefficients of ten parameters that correspond to the constants in the above equation Note that while the possibilities are virtually endless most common zone plates are defined with only one or two parameters while the coefficients of the remaining parameters are kept at zero The HD3G7 Generator module generates six standard zone plate signals circle frequency diagonal frequency horizontal sine frequency horizontal sweep frequency vertical sine frequency and vertical sweep frequency Each standard zone plate signal has a pattern control parameter See Table 3 38 This pattern control parameter is unique to the zone plate signal it is associated with 3 168 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module When you first enter the zone plate parameters menu for a signal the pattern control parameter for that signal is displayed The pattern control parameter controls the basic pattern frequency by adjusting the dependent parameters For example if you change the CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency the generator adjusts four of the dependent parameters to keep the circle round Table 3 38 HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Parameter definition Circle Diagonal Circle Frequency maximum c aph Diagonal Frequency equivalent
389. l Black or Black Test Signal and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 185 HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Once the group is selected press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 186 HD3G7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu If Level B mapping is selected all four groups are available in both Link A and Link B for a total of eight groups TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal This allows you to adjust the timing of this module relative to another module or to an external reference such as Genlock or GPS Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 189 HD3G7 module TIMING submenu TIMECODE Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 190 HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu VIDEO Enables or disables the individual components of the output serial stream such as YCbCr RGB or XYZ and allows the e
390. l frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 237 TIMECODE Sets the timecode parameters for the module outputs when a GPS7 module is installed To support this capability the module hardware must be version 2 0 or above Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 238 VIDEO Enables or disables the Y Pb or Pr component of the output serial digital video signals and the output mode for audio video timing measurement Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 239 BLACK OPTION This menu is only available with Option BK and sets the parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 240 HD RATE This menu item is only available with Option BK and sets the HD trilevel sync rate for the signal outputs Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Non integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 or Integer 60 50 30 25 24 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The HD trilevel sync rate selection affects which signal formats can be output from the module integer or non integer TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 227 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 module MOVING
391. l Gradient in the Linearity projector test pattern set use the up A or down arrow button to set the starting point of the gradient The available values are as follows Horizontal Gradient 16 to 1913 in 1 level steps Vertical Gradient 16 to 2880 in 1 level steps 2048 x 1080 format 16 to 2404 in 1 level steps 2048 x 1556 format TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 213 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module To select the Converter mode on the HDLG7 module 3 214 Select from the following converter modes when you want to convert the SMPTE 292M 4 2 2 serial digital signal applied to the HD SDI IN connector into a dual link output format 60 59 94 or 50 Hz Progressive Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input interlace signal 601 59 941 or 501i to a progressive signal by doubling the frame rate The input signal is copied to both Link A and Link B but the payload identifier is modified to indicate a dual link signal The results are a 4 2 2 YCbCr 10 bit signal at the faster progressive rate 60p 59 94p or 50p 4 4 4 YCbCr Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr signal by up interpolating the chroma channel data samples This is accomplished by using several incoming data samples before and after the data samples to derive the extra sample point If 10 bit sample structure is selected the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled
392. l black signal Option BK only TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 17 Operating basics SDI7 module connectors The SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module provides five BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 16 SIGNAL 2B SIGNAL 1B TRIG OUT 1970 223 Figure 2 16 SDI7 module connectors NOTE When the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection is set to Test Pattern for channel I the SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors will output the same test signal The same is true for the channel 2 connectors when Test Pattern is set as the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection for channel 2 SIGNAL 1A Outputs the selected SDI serial digital video test signal for channel 1 SIGNAL 1B This output can be configured to output one of the following signals Test Pattern Black Black No Audio Black Mute Audio Test Pattern No Audio or Test Pattern Mute Audio When set to any of the Test Pattern selections the Signal 1A and Signal 1B connectors will output the same test signal When set to any of the Black selections the Signal 1B black signal is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 1A output See page 3 275 SDI7 module main menu SIGNAL 2A Outputs the selected SDI serial digital video test signal for channel 2 SIGNAL 2B This output can be configured to output one of the following signals Test Pattern Black Black No Audio Black Mute Audio Test Pattern No Audio
393. l the SDI7 module main menu appears for the desired SDI7 channel channel or channel 2 SDI7 x 1 STATUS 100 Color Bars HD 1080 59 94i 1970338 NOTE The SDI7 module provides two channels of output The display indicates which SDI7 channel is selected For example a display of SDI7 3 1 indicates that the SDI7 module is installed in slot 3 and that channel 1 is selected A display of SDI7 3 2 indicates that channel 2 is selected Press the MODULE button to advance from channel 1 to channel 2 You can press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to switch between channels 1 and 2 of the selected SDI7 module when the STATUS menu is displayed as shown above 6 Select the frame rate using the FORMAT button or select the test signal using the test signal front panel buttons such as COLOR BARS or LINEARITY 7 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus For example when the OUTPUT MODE menu is displayed pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow button allows you to select between output modes such as Level A Level B SD HD etc Refer to SDI7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 275 NOTE In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the SDI7 module These signal sets are located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied w
394. lay returns to normal NOTE If the USB drive fills up before the backup operation completes an error message is displayed Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements 11 After the backup operation is complete press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY FIRMWARE UPGRADE 12 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select USB Upgrade and then press the ENTER button to start the upgrade process 2 54 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics 13 A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the upgrade operation The old and new firmware version numbers are displayed Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation NOTE If the instrument displays a message indicating that a USB device containing the firmware was not detected verify that the USB drive is properly mounted and has the correct directory path TgUpgrd firmware pkg 14 A second confirmation message is displayed to remind you that the upgrade will delete all user created files on the instrument CAUTION If you did not backup your user files as described in step 10 it is recommended that you press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade and then backup your user files before performing the upgrade You will restore the user files after the upgrade 15 Press the ENTER button to proceed wit
395. le 11 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal 12 Check that the signal appears as expected Check for errors on the video session screen of the waveform monitor 13 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1A connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 1B connector TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 41 Getting started 1 42 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the appropriate format for your SDI7 module as listed below When the desired format is displayed press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Option 3G enabled select the 1080 59 94p format Option 3G not enabled select the 1080 59 94i format Check that the signal appears as expected on the waveform monitor and check for errors on the video session screen Press the BACK button to exit the OUTPUT MODE submenu Repeat steps 5 through 16 for Channel 2 of the SDI7 module To test channel 2 connect the SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B outputs to the waveform monitor Press the up A arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu Press the ENTER button Press the right arrow to scroll through the Diagnostics readouts Check that the PLL Status Flex0 and Flex1 readings show Lock Check that the DDS Status DDSO Phase and DDS1 Phase readings show Lock Press the right arrow button to scroll through the menus an
396. le Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description PULSE BAR 2T Pulse and Bar Two pulses of 2T half amplitude width and full scale amplitude A positive pulse is added to a base level at the minimum valid value and a negative pulse is added to a bar level at the maximum valid value The 2T pulse is used for Short Time response testing and the bar is used for Line Time response testing The type of 2T pulse depends on the signal format m For SD 525 format this is a 2T4 pulse For SD 625 format this is a 2T5 pulse For HD and slow progressive 3G formats this is a 2T30 pulse m For 3G fast progressive formats this is a 2T60 pulse m For 4 2 2 formats chroma pulses are at half the bandwidth Color Pulses Eight color pulses of 2T half amplitude width upon black and white backgrounds The upper half of the pattern has positive pulses on a black background testing each combination of the three color channels The lower half of the pattern has a white background so negative pulses are used to result in the same line colors For example the yellow pulse in the upper half is 100 red plus 100 green resulting in yellow on a black background At the same horizontal location in the lower half a pulse of 100 blue added to the white background also results in a yellow line TIMING Co siting Pulse One single sample wide pulse in the center of the
397. le Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu Logo side To LOGO submenu lt q ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle BACK To CIRCLE submenu 3036 016 lt gt Fast Figure 3 19 AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay m Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 39 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 40 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the sel
398. le s 1 gt Set the number of samples to be scrolled AWVG Kj MOVINGPICTURE 1 gt Set the number of lines to be scrolled V Step 0 Line s AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Period 1 Frame s AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Random Disable Figure 3 28 AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu 1 D gt Set the period in frames to be scrolled Disabl lt gt Enable H step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 60 to 60 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 15 to 15 in 1 line steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 53 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo AWVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK OFF v Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Use this menu to select an i
399. le 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description MULTIBURST Multiburst pattern consisting of five or six sine wave packets each of fixed frequency This pattern is typically used for frequency response testing for one or three video channels The packets have a 60 amplitude range upon a 50 level therefore range between 20 and 80 levels For comparison to these peak limits flat pedestals at 80 and 20 levels are present on the left side of the pattern The set of packet frequencies used in each pattern is determined by the maximum bandwidth of the output format For 4 2 2 YCbCr formats one multiburst pattern consists only of a Y channel signal up to the maximum frequency limit and the second multiburst pattern is identical for all three channels up to half of the Y channel frequency limit For 4 4 4 formats each multiburst pattern is identical for all three channels Multiburst 0 5 2 75 MHz SD formats only Three channel pattern with packet frequencies of 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 and 2 75 MHz Y Multiburst 0 5 5 75 MHz SD formats only Y channel pattern with packet frequencies of 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 and 5 75 MHz Multiburst 1 15 MHz HD and 3G formats only Three channel pattern with packet frequencies of 1 3 6 9 12 and 15 MHz Y Multiburst 15 30 MHz HD formats only Y channel pattern with packet frequencies
400. le in individual patterns from 10 to 90 in 10 increments These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets 75 Red Field 75 Green Field 75 Blue Field 75 Cyan Field 75 Magenta Field 75 Yellow Field Full frame color flat fields available in individual patterns of 75 value for each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and yellow These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 37 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description Black to White 1 Black to White 2 Full frame monochrome flat fields representing the individual Black to White 3 Black to White 4 steps in the SMPTE EG 432 1 step scale patterns available under Black to White 5 Black to White 6 the MONITOR button Black to White 7 Black to White 8 These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You Black to White 9 Black to White 10 must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals Black to Gray 1 Black to Gray 2 See page 3 1
401. lect Format submenu Disconnect the Black 2 signal from the module and the WFM8300 Connect the Black 3 signal from the module to the reference input of the WFM8300 Set Black 3 to a PAL signal on the GPS7 module a Use the right arrow button to select Black 3 b Press the ENTER button c Use the right gt arrow button to select PAL d Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM8300 shows PAL on the reference input Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 24p Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM8300 shows 1080 24p on the reference input Press the BACK button to exit the Select Formats menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Black output VITC 1 E al Sa 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the module to the CMPST A input on the WFM8300 and terminate the loop through with a 75 Q terminator Activate the input by pressing the C input button on the front panel of the monitor On the WFM8300 press the CONFIG button and select VITC as the timecode source On the TG8000 press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears Use the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Black 1 Press the ENTER button Use the up 4 or down arrow button to select FORMAT Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to se
402. lect NTSC Press the ENTER button Use the up A or down arrow button to select Timecode 11 Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Time of Day as the Timecode Source Press the ENTER button Use the up A arrow to select the VITC submenu and press the ENTER button to select VITC 1 Press the right arrow to select Output Enable Press the ENTER button Use the down arrow to select Line number Press the left lt 4 arrow to select Line number 14 Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM8300 Timecode display Repeat the procedure for Black 2 and Black 3 signals TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 31 Getting started LTC output 1 8 9 Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module Construct an adapter by soldering wires between a female XLR and a 9 pin DSUB male header with solder cups with this pin out a XLR pin 1 to DSUB pin 1 b XLR pin 2 to DSUB pin 2 c XLR pin 3 to DSUB pin 3 Connect the LTC 1 output on the breakout cable to the XLR adapter you just made Connect the DSUB end of the adapter you just made to the remote connector on the WFM8300 Configure the WFM8300 to use LTC as the Timecode source Configure the LTC 1 output of the GPS7 module for 30 fps drop frame a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A
403. lect a format and then press the ENTER button Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal Press the BACK button to display the main menu Press the up A or down arrow button to select VIDEO from the main menu and then press the ENTER button The VIDEO submenu shown below appears AVG7 x VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 Composites 10 20 21 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select CH1 2 3 Composites and then press the ENTER button Connect the upper or lower CH 1 connector to the waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 2 connector Check that the signal appears as expected Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 2 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 3 connector Check that the signal appears as expected Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 3 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 1 connector Press the test signal button again to output the another test signal in the same signal set Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes You need not perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 co
404. lect an offset digit use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change 30 DROP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to enable or disable the 30 Drop mode Use this mode to correct for frame rate error in NTSC rate signals or to allow the timecode to run continuously and drift away from the correct time VITC Allows inserting the same VITC signal on 1 or 2 lines of the vertical interval Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line Select the VITC signal you want to configure and then press the ENTER button to enter the VITC submenu for the selected signal See page 3 73 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 module VITC submenu GPS7 module only BG7 Black Generator module Use this menu to enable or disable the output of the VITC signal and to select the video line on which the VITC signal will be inserted Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the VITC submenu Select VITC 1 or VITC 2 in the TIMECODE submenu BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 OUTPUT DISABLE BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 Line number 14 ENABLE ly DISABLE lt 1 gt Set the line number 3036 022 Figure 3 40 BG7 module VITC submenu OUTPUT Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a
405. lect the preset you want to rename 2 Press the ENTER button twice to begin editing the preset name The underscore character _ appears under the first letter of the preset name 3 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character to the letter you want to modify 4 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the new character The available characters include the full alphabet numerals from 0 to 9 and many standard ASCII symbols The text strings may contain up to 32 characters 5 Enter all of the desired characters then press ENTER button 6 Press the BACK button twice to exit the PRESET submenu This returns to the top of the mainframe main menu 7 Press the ENTER button to reenter the PRESET submenu 8 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the SAVE menu item 9 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the preset name edited in step 2 10 Press ENTER button to save the preset with the new name DELETE Deletes the contents of the specified preset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the preset you want to delete and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection You cannot delete the following presets Power on Default User Default and Factory Default 2 24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics SEQUENCE submenu Use this menu to select and run a sequence that is already loaded into
406. les the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X Position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 231 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module 3 232 EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s i U ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 U 3 U se the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select EDIT and then press the se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change se the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode
407. lication This application also allows you to import and export User Data Words as CSV files TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 305 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 306 CLEAR UDW Use this menu selection to clear the entire User Data Word Press the ENTER button to enter the CLEAR UDW mode which will present the following dialog Clear entire UDW Yes ENTER No CANCEL Press the ENTER button to clear the User Data Word and exit CLEAR UDW or press the BACK button to exit without clearing the User Data Word CS Use this menu selection to set the Checksum Press the ENTER button to edit the Checksum You can set the Checksum from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Checksum and exit Checksum editing Auto Calculate CS Use this menu selection to enable or disable checksum auto calculation Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Enable or Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the choice NOTE Different video modes and formats have different ranges of lines and pixels in their active and ANC spaces Users should be careful to change the line field and sample offset parameters of the ANC insertion f
408. ll need up to 1 MB of free space on the USB drive or in the flash memory of the instrument If you are backing up or restoring all of the user data in the instrument you will need up to 96 MB of free space on the USB drive or in the flash memory of the instrument If the backup or restore operation runs out of memory on the USB drive or the flash memory on the instrument before the operation is complete the operation will copy as much data as it can and will then display an error message stating that the backup or restore operation was incomplete because the drive or device is full Connect a USB drive to the TG8000 generator Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button Verify the status of the USB drive a Press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB lt status gt b Verify that the USB status is Mounted c Ifthe status is Not Mounted press the ENTER button to mount the USB drive Press the up A or down arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the following Backup Presets to USB Backup All User Data to USB Restore Presets from USB Restore All User Data from USB Press the ENTER button to start the selected backup or restore operation A warning message is displayed asking yo
409. lock Menus illustrated in this manual represent the newest features GPS7 modules without the REF IN input have similar menu structures but not identical menu content TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 111 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the GPS7 module main menu Antenna Power lt status voltage gt Gnlk Sig Amp lt line gt VITC lt status gt REF IN VITC Input lt 00 00 00 00 status gt only Selection by the MODULE button LTC Timing lt 00 00 ms status gt TOD 00 00 00 00 lt source gt LTC Input lt 00 00 00 00 status gt A LTC Sig Amp lt line gt LTC lt status gt Program Time 00 00 00 00 GPS7 x STATUS ref source No Sig lt 1 gt GPS Signal Quality 0 0 Sats 0 0 Antenna Power OFF GPS 2010 04 10 0 00 00 00 Source GPS 2010 04 10 0 00 00 00 Local A V Internal 2010 04 10 00 00 00 00 ENTER GPS7 x REFERENCE To REFERENCE _ O submenu Press ENTER for menu el BACK BLACK 1 To BLACK submenu BLACK submenu BLACK 2 BACK GPS7 x SELECT OUTPUT lt gt BLACK 3 BLACK 1 el HD TRI LEVEL _ENTER To HD TR LEVEL SYNC RATE SYNC RATE Back submenu A y ENTER GPS7 x GPS SETUP To GPS SETUP eed Pe Press ENTER for menu el BACK A v TIME OF DAY menu TIME ZONE OFFSET menu DST SCHEDULE menu ENTER PROGRAM TIME menu G
410. m 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps Audio Click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 second around the click For example if you select 3 see for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 second the click occurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel s of the four output channels TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 module TIMING submenu HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu HDVG7 x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s lt q gt Set the vertical timing HDVG7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 msec lt gt Set the horizontal timing
411. m the selection NOTE The position of the circle overlay is referenced from the center of the active picture X Position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 0 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 0 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 0 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 module BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Use this menu to overlay a timecode on the output test signal and set the display position of the timecode Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the BURNT IN TIMECODE submenu Select BURNT IN TIMECODE in the OVERLAY submenu SDI7 x x OVERLAY BURNT IN TIMECODE m Mode Disable SDI7 x x OVERLAY BURNT IN TIMECODE X Position 5 0 APW e Disable 1 gt Small Large 1 gt A
412. main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 52 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 49 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module To select an output signal on the AWVG7 module To output a signal from the AWVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe AWVG7 module menu is not displayed press the front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AWWVG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows AWVG7 x SELECT FORMAT 1080 59i Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock occurs 4 Ifyou change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press BACK press the BACK button 3 50 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to th
413. mance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module AVG7 module product description The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is an analog video signal generator which provides analog composite and component video signals in various formats The module contains the following features Supports the following system formats NTSC NTSC no setup PAL 525 GBR 525 YPbPr 525 Beta 625 GBR and 625YPbPr Six analog composite or component video outputs Outputs a frame picture created by the Frame Picture Generator application Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 29 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module How to operate the AVG7 module After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process i
414. mat and output signal as described below To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu appears as shown below DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows DVG x SELECT FORMAT 525 270 Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs 4 If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press BACK press the BACK button TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 77 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module To select the test signal 3 78 All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the DVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 41 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right P
415. mat 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf30psf Output sample structure YCbCr 4 4 4 12b 10b Not available YCbCr 4 2 2 12b 10b X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b 10b Not available GBR A 10b Table 3 35 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 2398 24 25 29 97 30 Output Format 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf Output sample structure YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X YCbCr A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 155 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 35 HD3G7 module Converter mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 cont HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 2398 24 25 29 97 30 Output Format 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf30psf GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 36 HD3G7 module Converter
416. menu Select VIDEO in the main menu A HD3G7 x VIDEO ON A V HD3G7 x VIDEO ON ON lt D ore HD3G7 x VIDEO Cr ON HD3G7 x VIDEO Edge Filter Enable d HD3G7 x VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF J 1970 256 lt Enable Disable ON lt I gt oF Figure 3 91 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu Y Turns the Y component YCbCr format G component GBR format or X component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Cb Turns the Cb component YCbCr format B component GBR format or Y component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Cr Turns the Cr component YCbCr format R component GBR format or Z component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Edge Filter Enables or disables the Edge Filter on serial digital video signals that have a filter This control has no effect on signals without a filter Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow
417. menu 3 92 Use this menu to perform the following tasks Turn each serial digital video component Y Pb or Pr on or off individually Turn the insertion of the EDH Error Detection and Handling on or off Set the resolution of the serial digital video signals to 8 or 10 bits Turn the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu A DVG7 x VIDEO Pb ON DVG7 x VIDEO A DVG7 x VIDEO Y ON A V DVG7 x VIDEO Pr ON Resolution 10 bits EDH ON V DVG7 x VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF V lt gt de lt D IE de gt de gt Figure 3 51 DVG7 module VIDEO submenu ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 10 bits 8 bits ON OFF OFF ON TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Y Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pb Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pr Turns the Pr component of the serial di
418. minutes TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Genlock function 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AGL7 main menu shown below appears AGL7 1 GENLOCK STATUS Internal 6 Press the up A or down arrow button to select GENLOCK from the main menu and then press the ENTER button Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Internal and then press the ENTER button Check that INT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal Connect one of the TV signal generators output connectors to the AGL7 REF connector using the 75 Q BNC cable Terminate the other side of the REF connector with the 75 Q termination Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the menu item corresponding to the input signal and then press the ENTER button Check that EXT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is locked to the input signal Disconnect the BNC cable from the REF connector Check that EXT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel blinks This shows that the external reference signal is not being input to the REF connector Black signal outputs Press the front panel BACK button Press the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT from the main menu Press the lef
419. module then reboot You do not need to upgrade the modules in any particular order TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics How to backup restore presets and user data using a USB drive You can use the UTILITY menu to backup or restore the instrument presets and all user data using a USB drive that is connected to the instrument See page 2 27 UTILITY submenu You can use the backup and restore functions to duplicate settings and signal files between different TG8000 generators How the backup and During the backup operation files are copied to a directory named TgBackup restore operations work in the root directory of the USB drive The restore operation expects to copy files from this same directory All of the copy operations will create new directories files on either the TG8000 or the USB drive as needed If a file with the same name exists in the destination location it will be overwritten However if a file exists in the destination location and not in the source location the file will be left alone Therefore the restore and backup operations act as an overlay and do not guarantee that there will not be additional files left in the destination location that did not exist in the source location Presets When presets are copied only the MSTATEX YY files and enough directory structure to hold them in their correct locations for example HDVG7 PRESET MSTATE0 01 will be copied or create
420. n 0 0 APH et the horizontal position DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 47 DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 87 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks AUDIO GROUP submenu Enable or disable the embedded audio of the selected audio group Select which audio channel to enable Se
421. n and then acquire and save a new averaged position Note that the signal quality might indicate low or no signal during this process NOTE The module must make 60 I second GPS readings with at least four satellites to acquire the position How long this takes depends on various conditions If there are less than four satellites a reading cannot be taken SIGNAL WARNING This function provides a warning that the antenna signal has degraded Set this level below the normal range experienced as a function of time of day weather or other variables To configure the output warning see the GPO submenu See page 3 145 GPS7 module GPO submenu Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the FOM quality of the GPS signal value that will trigger warning indicators See page 3 104 Figures of Merit FOM TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 129 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module TIME OF DAY submenu 3 130 GPS7 module Use this menu to set the source for the time of day setting and to set the date and time that will be used when the GPS reference is set to internal The following figure shows the TIME OF DAY submenu Select the TIME OF DAY menu in the main menu Internal GPS7 x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY Source Internal VITC Input REF IN lt gt LTC Input ee only GPS Signal GPS x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY Mode Synchronize once
422. n of equal size squares with a dot at the center of each square Each line and dot is implemented as a single horizontal line or single sample pulse This pattern is used to verify convergence of RGB channels and no color fringing should be visible on the white lines and dots when the channels are aligned 3 162 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 37 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description PULSE BAR 2T Pulse and Bar Two pulses of 2T half amplitude width and full scale amplitude A positive pulse is added to a base level at the minimum valid value and a negative pulse is added to a bar level at the maximum valid value The 2T pulse is used for Short Time response testing and the bar is used for Line Time response testing Color Pulses Eight color pulses of 2T half amplitude width upon black and white backgrounds The upper half of the pattern has positive pulses on a black background testing each combination of the three color channels The lower half of the pattern has a white background so negative pulses are used to result in the same line colors For example the yellow pulse in the upper half is 100 red plus 100 green resulting in yellow on a black background At the same horizontal location in the lower half a pulse of 100 blue added to the white background also results in
423. n the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 The original Deja Vu Sans file can be recovered from the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD if necessary TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 289 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 290 The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items Select ID TEXT in the OVERLAY submenu SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT Source lt User Entered String gt SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT EDIT SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT X Position 5 0 APW lt lt ENTER SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT Y Position 5 0 APH SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT Font Size 8 0 APH 1970 327 Figure 3 127 SDI7 module ID TEXT submenu Disable Enable Select user entered text string or text file A lt gt Edit text V lt gt Set the horizontal position 1 gt Set the vertical position Set the font size TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Status Displays the status of the ID Text overlay display Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Source Displays the user ent
424. nal Enable or disable edge filtering on the video output signal Enable or disable the AV Timing mode Enable or disable the user defined ancillary data payload and set the payload structure Enable or disable the SMPTE 352M video payload identifier Set the line frame or clock rate as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope Select between a test signal or a black signal for the secondary SIGNAL 1B or SIGNAL 2B output View diagnostics operation parameters and CRC error counts from the video input Access output calibration only available when in factory mode Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figures show the SDI7 module main menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 275 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Selection by the MODULE button SDI x x STATUS 100 Color Bars HD 1080 59 94i SDI x x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94i HD 1920 X 1080 SDI7 x x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH m RGB 444 12b To SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH submenu SDI7 x x ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel d To MOVING PICTURE submenu To OVERLAY submenu SDI7 x x AUDIO EMBEDDED To AUDIO submenu GROUP 1 To TIMING submenu To TIMECODE submenu BACK T VX N Continued on the next page 1 Not available in SD HD SDI or 3G fast progressive modes 2 Only available in
425. nal See page 3 156 To select the output module mode on the HD3G7 module 2 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 157 To select the signal format on the HD3G7 module 3 Select the sample structure and depth for the output signal See page 3 157 To select the sample structure and depth on the HD3G7 module 4 Select the test signal that you want to generate See page 3 158 To select the test signal on the HD3G7 module Table 3 25 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G level A 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 26 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level A 1280 x 720 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR A 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 27 HD3G7 module Generator mode 3G Level A 2K x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 3
426. ng figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select any of the channels in the Channel AUDIO GROUP submenu A Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000Hz 12000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500Hz 4800Hz 15000 Hz 50Hz 500Hz 1600Hz 5000Hz 16000 Hz HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 o gt 100Hz 600Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz Frequency 1000 Hz 150Hz 750Hz 2400Hz 8000Hz 200Hz 80Hz 3000Hz 9600Hz A Ti 250Hz 1000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS Amplitude 20 0 dBFS OFF HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 use Audo Click OFF Me 4sec Figure 3 109 HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 235 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module 3 236 Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the frequency The selection items are as follows Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected the audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the amplitude You can set the value fro
427. ng offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons simultaneously Relative To Sets the Zero Timing D to A compensation factor on or off for HD 1 485 Gb S formats only In the serial mode default the output timing does not include compensation for the delay through a nominal D to A converter Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the relative timing to either Serial 0H or Analog DAC TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 189 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output Use the up A TIMECODE submenu or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the MAIN menu Program lt gt Time of Day 2 HD3G7 x TIMECODE ANC VITC lt gt Enable Disable ATC VITC timecode Disable 4 Only available with no GPS7 module when a GPS7 module is installed the initial time set function is controlled from the GPS7 menu 2 Only available with GPS7 module 3 Non integer frame rates only 3036 044 Figure 3 90 HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu 3 190 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt
428. nition of single machine For programs permitting the Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution a separate license shall be required for each such machine with which the Program may be used or each concurrent user authorized under a floating user license Title to the Program and all copies thereof but not the media on which the Program or copies may reside shall be and remain with Tektronix or others for whom Tektronix has obtained a respective licensing right Customer shall pay when due all property taxes that may now or hereafter be imposed levied or assessed with respect to the possession or use of the Program or this license and shall file all reports required in connection with such taxes Any portion of the Program modified by Customer or merged with another program shall remain subject to these terms and conditions If the Program is acquired by or for an agency of the U S Government the Program shall be considered computer software developed at private expense and the license granted herein shall be interpreted as granting Customer restricted rights in the Program and related documentation as defined in the applicable acquisition regulation THE PROGRAM MAY NOT BE USED COPIED MODIFIED MERGED OR TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED BY THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS UPON TRANSFER OF ANY COPY MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE PROGRAM THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREIN IS AUTOMATICA
429. nloads b On the Downloads Finder Web page search by model number such as TG8000 and filter by software and software type to locate the firmware upgrade package for the instrument c Note the latest version number of the firmware upgrade package s Web site firmware version number If the latest firmware version at the Web site is the same as the version on your instrument you do not need to upgrade the firmware and no action is required If the latest firmware version at the Web site is newer than the version on your instrument you should upgrade the firmware Download the latest firmware version to your PC After the software package is downloaded click on the self extracting archive to extract the following files into the directory of your choice transfer exe and firmware pkg There may also be a readme txt file NOTE If the firmware upgrade package contains a readme txt file be sure to read the file before you attempt to upgrade the firmware on your instrument If you are performing the upgrade using a network connection the transfer exe and firmware pkg files must be located in the same directory on the PC TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics To perform the upgrade you can use either the USB upgrade procedure or the network upgrade procedure The time required to complete the upgrade is about 10 minutes CAUTION During the upgrade process once the instrume
430. nna information is not intended to cover all aspects of the antenna system design Important topics that were not covered include items like lightening protection and drip loops For information about the cable plant design in your system contact the appropriate person or group in your organization or contract with a qualified installer These numbers are a compendium of the GPS signal quality and the processes that occur as the instrument progresses through the states needed to lock on to the GPS signal The FOM provides a simple scale to evaluate the state of the GPS lock The FOM drives the external reference indicator LED on the front panel of the mainframe When in internal mode the external LED is off When in external mode and the FOM is gt 6 the LED is steady green When the FOM is lt 6 the LED is flashing green The FOM provides the scale by which you can set the signal warning threshold See page 3 145 GPS7 module GPO submenu You can see the description of the FOM in the GPS7 STATUS menu The following table lists the figures of merit and their descriptions Table 3 19 Figures of merit for signal quality Figure of merit FOM Indicator Description 0 No signal This means that no usable satellite signals are detected This is normal for a short time after the signal is applied but if it lasts more than a minute or so then it usually means one of the following that there is a problem in the antenna or cable the
431. nnectors Repeat steps 11 through 20 for the lower or upper output channels TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 21 Getting started AWVG7 module functional 1 22 check Use the following procedure to check that the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV waveform monitor E Three 75 Q BNC cables Three 75 Q terminators Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 main menu shown below appears AWVG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars 6 10 11 12 13 14 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a format then press the ENTER button Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal Use the 75 Q BNC cables to connect the upper or lower CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors to the CH A CH B and CH C inputs of the waveform monitor respectively Use the 75 Q terminators to terminate the other loop through connectors on the waveform monitor real panel Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor and set the w
432. nnel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module zone plate signals 3 262 Zone plate video test patterns or simply zone plates are important tools for the evaluation of video processing systems and techniques They are called zone plates because the classical circular pattern looks like an optical zone plate which uses the principles of Fresnel diffraction to focus and intensify light Today however the name has been applied to a wide variety of stationary and moving test patterns The following figure shows two enlarged optical zone plates The white areas are transparent and the black areas are opaque The precise spacing of the rings focuses and intensifies light that passes through the plate Figure 3 115 Optical zone plates enlarged The SDI7 module generates electronic zone plate signals and can be configured to provide a near infinite number of test patterns Six basic patterns are predefined Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine and Vertical Sweep for convenience These patterns all have an overall or pattern control parameter Pattern control parameters are unique to the specific predefined signals and are only found as the first item of the specific signal menu User created zone plate signals saved as Custom 1 or Custom 2 do not have pattern control parameters The dependent parameters are common to all of the zone plate signals and are found below the pattern con
433. ns in EG1 bars they have additional luminance to stay within RGB gamut The 2 patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0 black for XYZ formats SMPTE EG432 1 Color Accuracy 5 Step Staircase 10 Step Staircase Split screen color bars using values from SMPTE RP 431 2 2007 The upper half of the pattern is essentially the same as 100 color bars corresponding to the 1 set of colors defined in Table A 4 of the RP The lower half is a set of desaturated color bars corresponding to the 2 color patch values Series of vertical bars of equal steps on all three channels These patterns are color independent so they will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces Since the range of valid levels is not evenly divisible by 5 or 10 steps the first and last bars slightly exceed the valid range but are still well within legal limits For example the valid range for 10 bit YCbCr formats is from 64 940 for the Y channel 876 steps and from 64 960 for the Cb Cr channels 896 steps Therefore the level of the first bar is 62 and the level of the last bar is 942 962 which results in equal step sizes across the pattern Valid Ramp Y Valid Ramp B Y Valid Ramp R Y Valid Ramp The Valid Ramp is a matrix of three different ramps designed to test the video component channels for YCbCr and for gamut range testing in all color spaces These three ramps are also available as individual patterns that span the picture
434. nstrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 4 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced This menu is accessible only when the instrument is in factory mode From this menu you can access several special output signals and adjust the serial output levels The special signals are unscrambled and are synchronous with the clock out of the trigger BNC They are used to check performance or used when adjusting serial levels See the TG8000 Service Manual for information on adjustments and using factory mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 module factory default settings HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module The following table shows the factory default settings for the HD3G7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 39 HD3G7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings TEST SIGNAL 100 Color Bars FORMAT 1080 59 94p SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH YCbCr 4 2 2 10b OUTPUT MODE 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable AUDIO EMBEDDED Status Level A Group 1 4 Disable Status Level B Group 1 4 Link A Disable Group 1 4 Link B Disable Channel Status
435. nt has started to erase internal flash memory DO NOT remove power from the instrument If you do so the instrument flash memory will be corrupted The instrument will have to be sent to a Tektronix factory service center to have the system firmware restored If power to the instrument is lost before it begins erasing the internal flash memory you can restart the firmware upgrade after the instrument reboots To prevent loss of your user files be sure to use the Backup All User Data to USB option as instructed during the upgrade procedure To upgrade the firmware 1 Connect a USB drive to the PC that contains the latest TG8000 firmware using a USB drive 2 On the PC navigate to the USB drive 3 In the root directory of the USB drive create a directory named TgUpgrd CAUTION To prevent an upgrade failure the upgrade files must be located in a folder named TgUpgrd in the root directory of the USB drive The folder name is case sensitive 4 Open the TgUperd directory and copy the firmware pkg file from the extracted archive to the USB device The USB drive should have a directory path of TgUpgrd fi rmware pkg NOTE For a USB upgrade you do not need to copy the transfer exe file from the extracted archive to the USB drive 5 Safely remove the USB device from the PC and insert it into the USB port on the front panel of the instrument 6 Ifnecessary power on the instrument 7 Press the MODULE button
436. nu ALARM RESET Resets all of the mainframe alarms that have been triggered Press the ENTER button to clear the triggered alarms If the condition s that triggered the alarm s still exists the alarm s will come back immediately TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 31 Operating basics GPI ALARM OUTPUT Enables or disables the GPI interface from triggering a ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to enable or disable the GPI alarm output Use the GPI ALARM SELECT menu item to select which GPI alarms to enable GPI ALARM SELECT Selects which GPI alarms are enabled or disabled When the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled the GPI interface triggers a ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered Select GPI ALARM SELECT and then press the ENTER button to access the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu See page 2 40 GPI ALARM SELECT submenu AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT This menu item is available only when an AGL7 module is installed in the mainframe Enables or disables the AGL7 module from blanking one of the black outputs to trigger a downstream Electronic Change Over ECO unit when an enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to disable the AGL7 module alarm output or to select which AGL7 connector will output the alarm signal BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 Use the AGL7 ALARM SELECT menu item to select wh
437. nu Select TIMING in the main menu SDI x x TIMING aa Vertical 0 Line s lt gt Set the vertical timing SDI x x TIMING _ Horizontal 0 0000 usec lt gt Set the horizontal timing SDI7 x x TIMING O Relative To Serial OH d lt I gt Set tne retaive timing 7 1970 318 For HD 1 485 Gb s formats only Figure 3 132 SDI7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from to 4 frame in 1 line steps NOTE A line of timing refers to the timing as if it were a raster scanning a CRT This may not be the same as the time that a line of data is present on the serial link because of the way that Level B signals are interleaved Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons simultaneously Relative To Sets the Zero Timing D to A compensation factor on or off for HD 1 485 Gb s and SD 270 Mb s formats only In the serial mode default the output timing does not include compensation for the delay through a nominal D to A converter Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the relative t
438. nu and the second line shows the current selection if there is not a submenu If nothing is on the second line press the ENTER button to access the corresponding submenu You can adjust the contrast of the LCD display using the UTILITY submenu See page 2 27 UTILITY submenu MODULE button Use the MODULE button to select the mainframe or installed module to control Repeatedly pressing this button scrolls through the main menu which shows the mainframe and the installed modules Select the one you want to control TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 1 Operating basics FORMAT button Menu control buttons Test signal buttons FRONT PANEL ENABLE button USB port 2 2 When an ATG7 AVG7 AWVG7 DVG7 HD3G7 HDLG7 HDVG7 or SDI7 module is selected active use the FORMAT button to change the video format for the output signal Pressing this button displays the menu to allow you to select a format for the active module Use these buttons to control the menu display See page 2 22 Mainframe menus Arrow A Y lt 4 and gt Buttons Use these arrow buttons to scroll through the available menu items ENTER button Use the ENTER button to enable the selected menu item BACK button Use the BACK button to disable the selected menu item and return to the previous menu item Use these buttons to select the output test signals Each of these 10 buttons represents a signal set or group of the
439. o remotely control the module SDI7 module product description 3 244 The SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module can be operated as a signal generator to output two channels of 270 Mb s SD SDI 1 5 Gb s HD SDI and 3 Gb s SDI video test signals in a variety of formats including both Level A and Level B mapping structures for 3G SDI signals See page 3 249 To select an output signal on the SDI7 module The module provides the following features m Two serial digital channels each independently configurable for 270 Mb s 1 5 Gb s or 3 Gb s signals Two SDI outputs per channel for simultaneous test signal and test black signal output One clock frame line trigger output Generates test signals in many formats with both 3G SDI Level A and Level B mapping structures supported E Standard test signals including SMPTE color bars and SDI pathological test patterns Zone plate test signals with full control of all parameters Full frame picture display Overlay of circle or logo on the video signal m Text overlay with support for Latin Cryillic Greek and symbol character sets TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module m Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Up to 32 channels of 24 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz m AV Timing mode m Timing a
440. o 9 will result in the line waveform changing from DC to 9 c aph in the width equal to one active picture height As with Kx the ending frequency will depend on the aspect ratio of the active video format For example in a 16 9 format with a Kx of 9 0 a Kx coefficient of 9 0 will cause the waveform to increase to DC in one aph The frequency will continue to increase to approximately 7 0 c aph by the end of the line Use this formula to calculate Kx and Kx terms for a sweep with the DC point at mid screen Kx 4Raspect x Kx2 where Raspect is the aspect ratio width height of the active format The Horizontal Sweep zone plate H Sweep is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 117 Figure 3 117 A Kx2 only zone plate TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 269 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Kyy parameter Display name KXY V Ch H Freq Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kxy V Ch H Freq parameter sets the change in horizontal frequency as a function of the vertical position in the video frame To see the effects of this parameter set the waveform monitor to view one selected line only Then with Kxy set to approximately 25 all other coefficients left at 0 0 look at line waveforms from top to bottom of the frame The horizontal frequency increases slightly on each succeeding line reaching 25 c aph on the last line of active video
441. o see the effects of this parameter set it to a low number and adjust a waveform monitor to view one or two fields of the HD3G7 output The variation in the dc voltage level from line to line will give the field waveform the appearance of a sampled sine wave especially at a Ky of around 5 to 10 c aph the sinusoid can become difficult to discern at higher frequencies Note that in the Y vertical parameters the c aph units translate directly into visible cycles down the frame The Vertical Sine zone plate is a Ky only zone plate See Figure 3 80 Figure 3 80 A Ky only zone plate TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 173 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Ky parameter Display name KY 2 V Sweep Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Ky V Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in vertical frequency down the frame Ky compares to Kx as Ky compares to Kx Again a good way to see the effect of Ky is to view the field on a waveform monitor With KY set to 0 0 a Ky coefficient of 10 will result in the apparent vertical sine wave changing from DC to 10 c aph from the top of the picture to the bottom To center the DC point at mid screen set Ky to 2 times Ky The Vertical Sweep zone plate is a Ky2 only zone plate See Figure 3 81 Figure 3 81 A Ky2 only zone plate K parameter Display name K Phase Units cycles
442. odule TUNE This diagnostic displays the following Phase The phase between the GPS pulse per second and the internal master time A Tektronix Customer Service Representative may request these values for troubleshooting installation issues should they occur DAC The DAC code that is tuning the oscillator Useful for checking if a unit is getting close to the end of the oven oscillator tune range GPS lock indicator Displays the GPS lock state When Boot is displayed it means the function is still in special modes needed to get started When Coarse is displayed it means the function is still tracking significant changes in the timing When Fine is displayed it means the function has stabilized to the point that the loop only needs to make small changes VOLTAGE MON 1 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 2 This diagnostic measures a voltage divider between a positive and negative supply If this diagnostic result is outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced PHASE DET RAMPS This diagnostic monitors voltage ramps used in the phase detector If these voltage ramps are outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced NOTE The following diagnostics ADC BUS GENLOCK INPUT LTC
443. ol Packet ACP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Frame Frame without Frame Number and Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection 3 188 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu HD3G7 x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s HD3G7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 usec HD3G7 x TIMING re Relative To Serial 0H s gt Set the relative timing 1970 255 1 gt Set the vertical timing lt gt Set the horizontal timing d V Figure 3 89 HD3G7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 to 1 2 frame in 1 line steps NOTE A line of timing refers to the timing as if it were a raster scanning a CRT This may not be the same as the time that a line of data is present on the serial link because of the way that Level B signals are interleaved Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timi
444. om Disable OVERLAY LOGO Status Disable Source Tektronix_logo_500x125 bmp NOTE The default logo is the first file in the SDI7 LOGO directory as sorted by the date of the logo file oldest first If the factory provided logo files are installed the default logo is Tektronix_logo_500x125 bmp However if the user has removed the factory provided logo files and added their own custom files then the default logo will be the oldest file installed in the SDI7 LOGO directory X Position 5 APW Y Position 5 APH OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable Source User entered string X Position 5 0 APW Y Position 5 0 APH Font Size 8 0 APH 3 314 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 61 SDI7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APW Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 0 APH OVERLAY BURNT IN TIMECODE Mode Disable X Position 5 0 APW Y Position 5 0 APH OVERLAY BLINK Text Circle Blink Off OVERLAY BORDER Text Circle Border Enable AUDIO EMBEDDED Status Level A Group 1 4 Disable Status Level B Group 1 4 Link A Disable Group 1 4 Link B Disable Channel Status Active Frequency 1000 Amplitude 20 dBFS Audio Click OFF Channel Origin A1 1 through A4 4 Sam
445. on so the leap second menu allows the leap second to be deferred up to 24 hours Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the LEAP SECOND submenu Select LEAP SECOND menu in the main menu GPS7 x TIME SETUP LEAP SEC APPLY Use Scheduled Time GPS7 x TIME SETUP LEAP SEC SETUP A 7 Scheduled Time 00 00 00 lt gt Edit time lt Use Scheduled Time Use Current Time Immediately Figure 3 68 GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu APPLY Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select when a leap second will be scheduled Select Use Current Time Immediately to apply the leap second adjustment immediately when signalled by the GPS system at 23 59 60 UTC on June 30 or December 31 as appropriate regardless of the local time Select Use Scheduled Time to apply the leap second adjustment at a deferred time as entered in the SETUP menu below SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the schedule time to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE The LEAP SECOND menu is only available when GPS is the Reference source
446. on the AG7 module 0 ccc cece eee ence cence eee e eee neeeaeenee eed 2 7 Figure 2 5 AGL7 module connectors 0 2 ccece eee e cee ce ence ne eee eee ene ene eneeeeeeneneeteeeneenenneed 2 8 Figure 2 6 Location of J040 and J960 on the AGL7 module 0 ce cce cee ee ence eee eeeene ened 2 9 Figure 2 7 ATG7 module Connectors sce ceecc eee eee eee e nee de ene eee ea eens eneeeeeeaeneeneenaeeaeeas 2 10 Figure 2 8 AVG7 module connectors 0 eccecc cece cence ence detest eee e ene eneeeeeeaeneeneeteenaeeas 2 10 Figure 2 9 AWVG7 module connectors 2 2 0 6 ccc cece eee eee cnet nee eee nets eet betta e ene es 2 11 Figure 2 10 BG7 module COnnectors 0 ccc cece ence eee nce ene ene e eee een een n ee een ne eee tees 2 11 Figure 2 11 DVG7 module connectors Option BK c ccc ece cece eee e ence nese eae eneeeeaeennees 2 12 Figure 2 12 GPS7 module connectors 6 cece cece cece eee ene ence eens eee nee eee tees eae tees 2 12 Figure 2 13 HD3G7 module connectors 0 ec cece ence nee n ene eee eee eee cence eeeeeaeeeeneeeeeaeeas 2 15 Figure 2 14 HDLG7 module connectors 0 cece cee n ene te eee eee eee ene ene eeaeeaeeeeneeneenaeeas 2 16 Figure 2 15 HDVG7 module connectors Option BK cc ccc cece cece ence eee e eee ene eeaeennees 2 17 Figure 2 16 SDI7 module connectors 0 e cece cece cence nee de eee eee eae eeeeneeeeeeaeneeneeeee
447. onments the TG8000 might not be able to get the IP address automatically from a DHCP server In this case you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item Refer to your network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with your network server operating system OS for detailed information about DHCP server functions TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics IP ADDRESS Sets the IP address of the TG8000 When no value is set the default value is used If DHCP service is enabled the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address NOTE Ifyou enter blank characters for the IP address the network function of the TG8000 becomes invalid SUBNET MASK Sets the subnet address of the TG8000 When no value is set the default value is used If DHCP service is enabled the subnet address obtained from the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address GATEWAY ADDR Sets the gateway address of the TG8000 Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address Manually setting a network address Use the following procedure to manually enter a network address 1 Press the ENTER button to enter the edit mo
448. onnectors on the rear panel A brief discussion of each connector follows the illustration CAUTION If power is applied to the mainframe be sure to terminate any unused outputs on any of the modules using 75 Q terminators cola Module slots po amp LJ AN HDVG7 AS BG7 O FN ae Op lt ORRO CARO Do BLACK 2 BLACK 4 CK 2 BLACK 3 BLACK 1 Power cord connector Figure 2 2 TG8000 rear panel Power connector A 10 100 1000 BASE T port General Purpose Interface GPI port 2 6 3036 06 The TG8000 is designed to operate from a single phase power source with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground Only the line conductor is fused for over current protection A protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation WARNING Injury or death can occur as the result of electrical shock To avoid electrical shock do not connect power to the TG8000 when the top cover is off Dangerous potentials are present on the Power circuit board The TG8000 operates from an AC line frequency of 50 60 Hz over the range of 100 240 VAC 10 without the need for configuration See Table 1 4 on page 1 9 Use this port to connect to your local Ethernet network You can control the TG8000 mainframe and all installed modules remotely through the port Also you can upload and download various files such as
449. or Bar Over Red 40 Flat Field Convergence Pluge and Luma Reference CCIR 17 CCIR 18 3036 088 3 This menu item appears only when a non HD format is set as the signal format for the selected BLACK output With Option CB this menu item appears only for the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs 4 This menu item appears only for the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs and only for non HD formats D These test signals are available only when the format is set to NTSC OR NTSC J and Option CB is installed 6 These test signals are available only when the format is set to PAL NTSC J and Option CB is installed Figure 3 36 BG7 module BLACK submenu 3 66 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual BG7 Black Generator module FORMAT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the signal formats in the following table Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock will occur Table 3 13 BG7 module output signal formats Non integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 Integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 NTSC NTSC NTSC J NTSC J PAL PAL 1080 59 94i 1080 60i 1080 23 98sf 1080 50i 1080 29 97p 1080 24sf 1080 23 98p 1080 30p 720 59 94p 1080 25p 1080 24p 720 60p 720 50p 1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting non integer or integer which is set using the Select Output selec
450. or Level B only there are selections for 2xHD 1920 x 1080 and 2xHD 1280 x 720 formats The 2xHD mode produces two standard HD streams in the same format e g 1080 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams See page 3 281 SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH Option 3G only When the output mode is set to a non fast progressive format the SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH menu is available There are several sample structures to choose from Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow buttons to scroll through the available options When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b e YCbCr 444 10b RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB 444 12b NOTE For SD HD and 3G fast progressive formats the color space sample structure depth is always YCbCr 422 10 bit 3 278 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module ALPHA CHANNEL DATA This menu item appears only when the sample structure is set to A for 3G signal formats Selects the data to be placed on the alpha channel when a sample structure that includes an alph
451. or right P arrow button to select the genlock source and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following genlock sources Internal Uses the internal reference signal NTSC Burst Burst locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to the REF connector NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID Burst locks to an NTSC black burst with 10 Field ID signal applied to the REF connector PAL Burst Burst locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF connector m 525 SYNC Sync locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to the REF connector TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock module m 625 SYNC Sync locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF connector HD SYNC Locks to an HDTV trilevel signal applied to the REF connector m CW Locks to the 1 3 58 4 43 5 or 10 MHz continuous wave signal applied to the CW connector TIMING Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the TIMING submenu See page 3 14 LOCK LOSS ACTION Sets the way the AGL7 module reacts when a loss of genlock state occurs for example genlock source is absent or incompatible Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the action and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following actions
452. ore The time on the display should have reset to the default start time of 00 00 00 00 and now be counting again Genlock 1 Set the Reference Source to Internal a Use the up A or down arrow button to select REFERENCE b Press the ENTER button c Ifneeded use the up A or down arrow button to select SOURCE d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Internal e Press the ENTER button 2 Check that the INT indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC Burst 4 Press the ENTER button 5 Check that the INT indicator is not lit and the EXT indicator is flashing This shows that the is not locked to any reference signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started 6 Press the BACK button to exit the Reference Source menu 7 Connect the NTSC signal generator output to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector using a 75 Q BNC cable 8 Set the NTSC signal generator to output an NTSC signal 9 Check that the EXT indicator lights This shows that the instrument is using the external reference signal 10 Disconnect the test setup HD3G7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video check Generator module is functional Required equipment m HD SDI video signal generator 3 Gb s
453. ormats since the I and Q sections contain color components outside of the legal RGB gamut For the SD output mode this pattern is available only for the 525 line 59 94i format SMPTE RP219 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE RP 219 2002 This pattern is intended for 16x9 aspect ratio displays with additional elements as compared to EG1 bars The SDI7 implementation includes I and Q sections but unlike the similar sections in EG1 bars they have additional luminance to stay within RGB gamut The 2 patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0 black for XYZ formats For SD the color bars are the 4 3 aspect ratio version as if converted from the 16 9 image with a center cut TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 253 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 59 SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description SMPTE EG432 1 Color Accuracy LINEARITY 5 Step Staircase 10 Step Staircase Valid Ramp Y Valid Ramp B Y Valid Ramp R Y Valid Ramp Split screen color bars using values from SMPTE RP 431 2 2007 The upper half of the pattern is essentially the same as 100 color bars corresponding to the 1 set of colors defined in Table A 4 of the RP The lower half is a set of desaturated color bars corresponding to the 2 color patch values Series of vertical bars of equal steps on all three channels
454. orrespond to HD SDI video test signals Table 3 41 HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 12 LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase Ramp Valid Ramp 2 FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field 100 Flat Field MULTI BURST SWEEP MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 100 Green Field 75 Green Field 100 Blue Field 75 Blue Field Convergence PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T30 Pulse and Bar TIMING SDI Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Use this button to select the converter mode of operation and Embedded audio selection menu See page 3 214 To select the Converter mode on the HDLG7 module 1 SMPTE RP219 Color Bars refers to SMPTE RP219 Color Bar I Q Even 2 Not available in 2K format mode of operation TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to output projector test patterns The table also lists the native XYZ projector test patterns that corr
455. ou want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file 3 86 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on CIRCLE submenu the display Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu DVG x OVERLAY CIRCLE Disable Status Enable Enable DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE sates ae X Positio
456. output from the SIGNAL connector Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the ID TEXT submenu See page 3 25 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the SIGNAL output relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 26 APL Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the test signal output from the SIGNAL connector Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the APL submenu See page 3 27 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module ATG7 module Use this menu to set the video format signal and timing offset for the BLACK 1 SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 2 or BARS output You can also use this menu to set the ID text submenu Overlay for the BARS output The following figure shows the SELECT OUTPUT submenu Select SELECT OUTPUT in the main menu ATGT x SELECT FORMAT NTSG ENER To SELECT SIGNAL out xX o submenu E e e E BACK To TIMING submenu ATG7 x BLACK 1 TIMING To ID TEXT submenu ATG7 x BARS ID TEXT Available only when the BARS connector is selected l J 3036 014 Figure 3 11 ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu SELECT FORMAT Selects the video format for the selected output Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL N
457. own in the following figure Figure 3 137 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame Therefore for this AFD code set the data words as follows UDW 000 0x4C UDW 001 0x00 UDW 002 0x00 UDW 003 0x00 UDW 004 0x00 UDW 005 0x00 UDW 006 0x00 UDW 007 0x00 The AFD ancillary data packet should be located in the active line portion of the vertical ancillary space VANC but no earlier than the second line after the RP 168 switch point Line 9 with a sample offset of 0 first word of active video immediately after SAV is a suitable location The selected video channel should be Luma for most ancillary packets including AFD Finally set the ANC PAYLOAD Output mode to Continuous to start AFD insertion of the active test signal For this example the SMPTE RP 219 color bars are an effective test pattern because the center section of the 16 9 test signal contains the original 4 3 aspect ratio SMPTE pattern TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to select which SDI7 channel will be the trigger source and TRIGGER OUTPUT to Select line rate frame rate pixel clock or the system clock of the module submenu _ 0 trigger an external instrument The following figure shows the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu Select TRIGGER OUTPUT in the main menu SDI7 x TRIGGER OUTPUT SRC CH b gt eae Pixel Clock Frame Field Pul
458. p A or down V arrow button to select SELECT GPIO c Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Output 1 d Press the ENTER button e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Loss of lock f Press the ENTER button 4 Check that the voltage on the GPI 1 output measures between 4 5 V and 5 5 V 5 Disconnect the antenna input After 15 seconds check that the GPI 1 output is below 0 5 V 6 Repeat this procedure for the GPI 2 output TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 33 Getting started GPI input 1 Configure the GPS7 GPI input to reset the program time a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears Use the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT GPIO c Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Input 1 d Press the ENTER button e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Reset Program Time f Press the ENTER button g Press the BACK button to exit the Select GPIO menu 2 Press the up arrow to select the STATUS display 3 If needed use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to display Program Time 4 Write down the program time 5 Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module 6 Attach a 75 Q terminator to the GPI input for 2 seconds and then remove it 7 Look at the program time now and compare it to the program time you wrote down bef
459. patterns A colored zone plate pattern can be created by enabling or disabling individual channels When the XYZ color space is used the resultant patterns will show some chroma in all combinations of the X Y Z channel settings due to the inherent encoding of this color space Use the Waveform Shape parameter to set the waveform to a Sine Triangle or Square wave Use the T Reset parameter to reset the time coordinate t in the zone plate equation of the pattern to zero When the T Reset parameter is first set to Enable the time coordinate is reset to zero and there is no apparent motion in the zone plate even if any of the time coefficients Kxr Kyr Kr or Kr are non zero Enabling the T Reset parameter does not set the other parameters to zero If you then alter any of the K parameters the temporal t coordinate will be allowed to change to match Subsequent changes to K parameters will first reset the time coordinate t and then allow it to change with the K parameter Disable allows the zone plate time coordinate to increment continuously When T Reset is set to Disable resetting all of the time coefficients Kxr Kyr Kr and K to zero will stop the apparent zone plate motion but the temporal coordinate will remain where it is even if it has moved to an off screen position You must Enable the T Reset parameter to reset the temporal coordinate to zero To completely disable all motion and reset the pattern set all of
460. pears Press the up A arrow button to select UTILITY Press the ENTER button Press the up A arrow button to select CAL OVEN SELECT Press the ENTER button to access the Internal Frequency Calibration submenu Press the ENTER button to start the calibration The instrument will display the stored calibration value Press the ENTER button Press the BACK button to exit the calibration menu when the calibration is complete TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 101 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS antenna requirements 3 102 A GPS antenna system The GPS7 module requires an external antenna to receive signals from satellites You must set up an antenna system to provide the GPS signal as an input to the module You can configure the instrument to provide 3 3 V or 5 V DC power for the antenna WARNING Prevent risk of shock or fire by ensuring that the GPS antenna is protected from lightning strikes when it is mounted outside a building or facility The GPS7 module and TG8000 mainframe do not have isolation protection from lightning so the facility installation must provide suitable protection for the GPS antenna external to the TG8000 mainframe Failure to use appropriate precautions can result in injury or death CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage
461. pliances Equipment type Safety class xvi Meets the intent of Directive 2004 108 EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when it is used with the product s stated in the specifications table Refer to the EMC specification published for the stated products May not meet the intent of the directive if used with other products European contact Tektronix UK Ltd Western Peninsula Western Road Bracknell RG12 1RF United Kingdom 1 To ensure compliance with the EMC standards listed here high quality shielded interface cables should be used 2 Peak in rush current up to 3 A Complies with the EMC provision of the Radiocommunications Act per the following standard in accordance with ACMA E EN 55022 2006 Radiated and conducted emissions Class B in accordance with EN 55103 1 2009 Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EN 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL 61010 1 2004 274 Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment m CAN CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 2004 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 JEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Test and measuring equipment Class 1 grounde
462. pling Frame TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us Relative To Serial 0H TIMECODE Source Program Time 30 Drop Frame Enable ATC LTC OFF ATC VITC OFF TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 315 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Table 3 61 SDI7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings VIDEO Y ON Cb ON Cr ON Edge Filter Enable AV Timing Mode OFF EDH ON SD output mode only ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable Parity Automatic DID 0x101 SDID 0x200 DC 0x101 UDW 0x200 CS 0x200 Auto Calculate CS Enable Line 9 Field 1 Line 9 Field 2 Line 9 Start Sample 1928 Video Channel Luma Link Location Link A Stream Location HS Stream 1 SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable TRIGGER OUTPUT Clock System Clock Source CH1 SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index Index Symbols and Numbers 10 100 1000 BASE T port 2 6 A AC line voltage requirements 1 9 Accessories optional 1 3 standard 1 3 AG7 1 2 connector 2 7 3 4 connector 2 7 48 kHz CLOCK connector 2 7 5 6 connector 2 7 7 8 connector 2 7 AUDIO TIMING submenu 3 4 3 6 AUDIO VIDEO SYNC submenu 3 4 CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu 3 3 3 4 Factory default settings 3 6 Functional checks 1 15 Main menu 3 3 Operating procedure 3 2 product descr
463. r and K to zero will stop the apparent zone plate motion but the temporal coordinate will remain where it is even if it has moved to an off screen position You must Enable the T Reset parameter to reset the temporal coordinate to zero To completely disable all motion and reset the pattern set all of the time related K parameters to zero and set the T Reset parameter to Enable TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 273 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module How to use zone plate signals on the SDI7 module Here is an example of how you can use zone plate signals to simplify a common task One common task is measuring the horizontal frequency response of a system With a typical swept frequency generator you would apply a signal such as a 1 MHz to 30 MHz sweep with markers every 5 MHz Then you try to estimate the frequency of the 3 dB roll off point by interpolating the position of the 3 dB point between the markers The SDI7 generator module s adjustable zone plate signal provides a better way E The H Sweep Zoneplate pattern control parameter is the H Sweep Frequency which controls the upper frequency limit of the sweep the swept to frequency Simply adjust the H Sweep Frequency until the system roll off is at 3 dB Read the frequency directly from the instrument display m The H Sine Zoneplate which provides a constant frequency horizontal sine signal instead of a swept signal c
464. r internal manual LTC Input Selects the LTC time code input as the timecode reference This selection is only available when the function of the LTC connector is set to Input m GPS Signal If GPS Signal is selected the time from the GPS receiver is used to derive the time of day This selection is only available if GPS Signal is the selected Reference Source Mode When VITC or LTC is the Time of Day source Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the synchronization mode Follow The time of day follows the VITC or LTC on the input signal if the signal is stable for at least 100 consecutive frames m Synchronize Once The VITC or LTC on the input signal is continuously monitored until a stable signal is received at least 100 consecutive frames At that time the time of day synchronizes once to this reference m Synchronize Now The time of day attempts to synchronize with the VITC or LTC on the input signal when the ENTER button is pressed A total of ten attempts to synchronize are made After ten attempts no further attempts are made to synchronize regardless if synchronization occurred or failed A stable signal of at least 100 consecutive frames is needed Internal When the Time of Day source is set to Internal use this menu selection to manually enter the date and time and to activate the time of day change See page 3 132 How to set the time of day in Internal mode TG8000 Multiformat T
465. r any surface Handle modules as little as possible Do not touch module components or connector pins Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static charge in the work area where you remove install or handle modules Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work surface covering capable of generating a static charge Do not remove the module circuit board assembly from the shield The shield is an important stiffener which prevents damage to surface mount components TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started To installa module To install a module into an empty slot in the mainframe perform the following procedure 1 Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the rear panel of the mainframe 2 Use the following guidelines to select the slot where you will install the module The following figure shows a sample module configuration with the associated slot numbers For AGL7 and GPS7 modules only one of these modules can be installed in the TG8000 mainframe at a time and it must be installed only in slot 1 All other modules may be installed in any slot location NOTE When installing a GPS7 module into an existing TG8000 mainframe it is suggested that you calibrate the mainframe oscillator oven as part of the installation and qualification process See page 2 46 CAL OVEN submenu GPS7 module only Although the GPS7 module will operate only in slot
466. r network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with your network server operating system OS for detailed information about DHCP server functions Setting the parameters on a network without a DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server perform the following procedure to set the network parameters 1 Ifyou connect the TG8000 directly to a single PC a Set the IP ADDRESS parameter to be the same IP address as the PC s address except for the last number The last number must be different than the last number in the PC s IP address b Set the SUBNET MASK parameter to be the same net mask subnet mask used by the PC Do not enter a number if the PC does not have a net mask c You do not need to enter a GATEWAY ADDR if you are directly connected to a single PC 2 Ifyou connect the TG8000 to your local Ethernet network see the Caution note below CAUTION To prevent communication conflicts on your Ethernet network ask your local network administrator for the correct numbers to enter in the NETWORK PARAMETERS submenu if you connect the TG amp 000 to your local Ethernet network 3 Verify the Ethernet connection by using a ping command from the PC 2 48 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI Pin assignments of the GPI connector 123 6 _ GPI port 3036 075 Recallin
467. rameter The Circle Frequency parameter controls the maximum frequency of the circle You may alter the Circle Frequency at will and the system will adjust four other dependent parameters to maintain the pattern as a circle However if you alter the underlying dependent parameters individually the pattern may change to be something other than a circle After changes have been made you can save the new signal as a custom zone plate signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 165 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module To select a zone plate Perform the following steps to select a zone plate signal for output signal on the HD3G7 1 Press the SWEEP test signal button to enter the zone plate signal menu Once module you enter the zone plate signal menu the HD3G7 generator module will start to output the displayed zone plate signal The dot in front of the signal name on the second line of the display indicates the selected default signal 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine or Vertical Sweep or from the two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate The zone plate signal whose name is displayed will continue to be output until a different signal is selected even if you press the BACK button If you select a different signal su
468. re perform the following steps to install the instrument into an equipment rack WARNING To prevent injury during product installation use care not to pinch hands or fingers in the rails and slides 1 Insert the instrument left and right slides into the ends of the rack rails while tilting the long handle part of each lever upward See Figure 1 1 NOTE Make sure to insert the instrument slides inside the inner rack rails You may also need to tilt the rear of the instrument up or down at a slight angle to fit the slides into the rails 2 Push the instrument into the rack until it stops CAUTION To prevent damage to the instrument and rackmount do not force the instrument into the rack if it does not slide smoothly The rails assembly may need to be adjusted to resolve the problem 3 Retighten any loose screws and push the instrument all the way into the rack If the tracks do not slide smoothly readjust the rail assemblies 4 When adjusting is completed tighten all rail assembly 10 32 screws using 28 inch lbs of torque 5 If the instrument has knob screws on the front corners tighten them so that they are secured in the rack 6 To remove the instrument from the rack loosen the knob screws TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Getting started Inside Slide Outer rail 2746 008 Figure 1 1 Installing or removing the instrument into or from the rack To remove
469. reference to time of day from the GPS receiver internal source VITC on the reference input or to a program time counter for elapsed time timecode Simple Network Time Protocol NTP Server functionality to respond to time requests over the Ethernet interface 3 3 V or 5 V DC power output available for the GPS antenna One General Purpose Interface GPI input that allows you to remotely reset the program time reacquire the GPS position or to force a jam sync Two General Purpose Interface GPI outputs that allow you to send an alarm signal when the GPS signal quality falls below a user selectable level when there is a loss of lock on the GPS signal or incoming black signal with VITC or at a user selected time Ability to schedule GPS clock changes for Daylight Savings Time DST and for leap seconds Ability to configure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of lock to the GPS signal and how the instrument responds when the signal is recovered Ability to configure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of lock from the black signal input Ability to configure how the instrument synchronizes to an incoming VITC signal when VITC is selected as the time of day reference TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module How to operate the GPS7 module After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where
470. ress the ENTER button to confirm the selection Sampling Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Frame Frame without Frame Number or Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between 24 bits and 20 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection DVG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the embedded AUDIO CHANNEL audio signal for the selected audio channel Use the up A or down arrow submenu button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select any of the channels in the Channel AUDIO GROUP submenu Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000Hz 12000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500Hz 4800Hz 15000Hz 50 Hz 500 Hz 1600Hz 5000Hz 16000 Hz gt 100 Hz 600 Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz 150 Hz 750 Hz 2400 Hz 8000 Hz 200 Hz 800 Hz 3000Hz 9600 Hz 250 Hz 1000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz A DVG x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Frequency 1000 Hz DVG7 fx AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 i Amplitude 20 0 dBFS eee OFF DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Audio Click OFF ae cos J 4sec Figure 3 49 DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 89 DVG7 Digital Vi
471. ring the firmware upgrade process all files created or installed by the user are deleted The deleted files include presets signal files frame picture files logo files sequence files and for the SDI7 module can also include text and font files At the end of the upgrade process the standard set of factory installed signal files logo files and SDI7 module font files are restored After the upgrade is complete you can then restore the backed up data from the USB drive TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 51 Operating basics 2 52 Before you begin the upgrade You do not need to upgrade the firmware if your instrument has the latest firmware version already installed Perform the following steps to determine if the firmware on your instrument needs to be upgraded 1 2 Power on the instrument Verify the current firmware version installed on the instrument a Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET b Press the up A or down V arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button c Press the up A or down arrow button to select VERSION INFO F W d In the second line of the display readout note the version of the installed firmware Instrument firmware version number Verify the latest version of firmware at the Tektronix Web site a Use the Web browser on a PC to navigate to the following Tektronix Web site http www tektronix com dow
472. rmat See Table 3 20 mu Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the Genlock vertical offset in 1 line increments Horizontal Coarse Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the Genlock horizontal offset in 0 0185 usec increments Horizontal Fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the Genlock horizontal offset in 0 1 nsec increments NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 and right gt arrow buttons simultaneously If you are using the 50 59 94 or 60 Hz progressive sync as a genlock source as well as LTC as a time code source there are two possible alignments for the resulting system Alignment can be checked by looking at the LTC timing status screen If the timing is near zero then it is aligned If the timing is near a frame of offset then it is not aligned You will need to unlock and re lock the reference to achieve the desired alignment if this is important to the application you are using Alternatively you can use a lower frame rate video reference like NTSC PAL or 1080i tri level Table 3 20 Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 input signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 5556 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 10
473. rmat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 15 Getting started 10 11 12 13 14 Set the digital audio monitor to display the status for the audio data Check that any CRC error does not appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 1 2 connector to the 3 4 connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 3 4 connector to the 5 6 connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 5 6 connector to the 7 8 connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 7 8 connector to the SILENCE connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Connect the 48 kHz CLOCK connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input using the 75 Q BNC cable and 75 Q termination Check that the appropriate clock signal is displayed on the screen AGL7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AGL7 Analog Genlock module check _ is functional Required equipment TV signal generator m NTSC PAL waveform monitor HDTV waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable E 75 Q termination Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20
474. rough a system with the AV Timing mode on an appropriate Tektronix waveform monitor or rasterizer EDH SD output mode only Turns the insertion of EDH packets on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 301 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu 3 302 The ancillary data payload can carry non video information such as an Active Format Description AFD Closed Caption information or other metadata NOTE The ancillary inserter can place the data packet anywhere in the field and can overwrite any of the ancillary or video data with a few exceptions the inserter will not overwrite embedded audio or CRC Use care to not overwrite important information Use this menu to set the ancillary data payload structure The ancillary data payload can include information to supplement the video stream including the Data Identifier DID Secondary Data Identifier SDID Data Count DC User Data Words UDW and a Checksum CS The Data Identifier DID and Secondary Data Identifier SDID indicate the type of data contained in the packet The Data Count indicates the number of User Data Words to follow and the User Data Words UDW comprise the actual payload carried in the ancillary data The SDI7 module addresses User Data Words 000 t
475. rovides two channels of output The display indicates which SDI7 channel is selected For example a display of SDI7 3 1 indicates that the SDI7 module is installed in slot 3 and that channel 1 is selected A display of SDI7 3 2 indicates that channel 2 is selected Press the MODULE button to advance from channel 1 to channel 2 You can press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to switch between channels 1 and 2 of the selected SDI7 module when the STATUS menu is displayed as shown above 6 Press the down arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE and then use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the appropriate output mode for your SDI7 module as listed below When the desired output mode is displayed press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Option 3G enabled select the 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 output mode Option 3G not enabled select the HD 1080 59 94i output mode 7 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the appropriate format for your SDI7 module as listed below When the desired format is displayed press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Option 3G enabled select the 1080 50p format Option 3G not enabled select the 1080 50i format 8 Press the COLOR BAR button and select a signal to output 9 Press the BACK button to exit the COLOR BARS menu 10 Connect the SIGNAL 1A connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cab
476. rwriting Factory Default Use this preset to reset the mainframe and all of the installed modules to the factory default settings The following settings are not affected by the factory default LCD contrast front panel timeout and network parameters Select PRESET in the main menu TG8000 PRESET RECALL Power On Default Select a preset to recall ae PRESET SAVE f Power On Default Select a preset number to save instrument settings ENTER PRESET RENAME Select a preset to Egithe beseinam PRESET 1 rename _ a 7 TG8000 PRESET DELETE PRESET 1 Select a preset to delete 3036 004 Figure 2 18 PRESET submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 23 Operating basics RECALL Recalls instrument settings saved in the selected preset Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select a different preset and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection While the preset is loading into the instrument the name of the selected preset blinks When the loading is complete the blinking stops SAVE Saves the current instrument settings to one of the 14 available presets Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the destination preset and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection RENAME Renames the selected preset Perform the following steps to rename a preset 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to se
477. s DST Change Daylight Saving Time DST changes twice a year in many time zones but some locations do not observe daylight savings time The GPS7 has a user programmable DST adjustment to the time zone offset that is made by adding or subtracting a specified amount from the current time setting The scheduled date and time of the change must be programmed into the GPS7 There are two methods for scheduling the DST offset m Once In Once mode the DST offset is applied only once on the date and time you specify Set the DST offset to either add or subtract an hour from the time zone offset depending on whether DST is starting or ending in your location Recurring In Recurring mode the DST offset is applied when the DST START date and time that you specify occurs and is removed when the DST END date and time that you specify occurs The recurring DST offset can only be a positive number such as one hour The DST START END dates are formatted as the DST rules are written e g DST starts on the First Sunday in March at 02 00 For example to change to daylight savings time schedule the system to add one hour to the time zone offset at 02 00 00 local time on March 6 2011 To return to standard time schedule the system to remove the DST offset at 02 00 00 on November 6 2011 At the scheduled time and date the DST change is added to the time zone offset as seen from the instrument display You can then program the next scheduled DST c
478. s complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display a After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVG x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars 5 Select the signal format and the signal you want to output See page 3 31 To select an output signal on the AVG7 module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to AVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module To select an output signal on the AVG7 module To output a signal from the AVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe AVG7 module menu is not displayed press the front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVG x STATUS NTSC 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows AVG x SELECT FORMAT NTSC Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER but
479. same type of test signals You scroll through the test signals in a signal set by repeatedly pressing the test signal button You can change the signal assignment using the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu See page 2 36 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu Use this button to enable or disable the front panel buttons When pressing this button for about one second while the front panel buttons are enabled all of the front panel buttons are disabled If you have selected a timeout period in the FRONT PANEL DISABLE item in the UTILITY submenu and that period passes without a button push all of the front panel buttons are also disabled Press and hold this button for about three second to enable the front panel buttons The timeout counter is restarted if the timeout period is already set and the indicator next to the button lights to show that the front panel is enabled Refer to UTILITY Submenu for more information about the settings the period until the front panel times out See page 2 27 Use the USB port to upgrade the instrument firmware and to copy files such as presets and test signal files between instruments See page 2 51 How to upgrade the instrument firmware See page 2 65 How to transfer user files using FTP TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual LED indicators The front panel includes the following LED indicators Operating basics INT and EXT reference LED indicators The INT internal and EXT external
480. se Line Pulse Y SDI7 x TRIGGER OUTPUT SRC CH Apn CHI I oe Source CH x Figure 3 138 SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu Source Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select CH1 or CH2 as the trigger source and then press the ENTER button The signal format of the trigger output will be based on the signal format of the selected output channel System Clock The system clock is a low jitter clock signal which runs at the parallel clock rate for 3G formats or twice the parallel clock rate for HD formats For SD formats the clock rate is 148 5 MHz When this menu item is displayed use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a different clock Pixel Clock The pixel clock is an internal parallel rate clock a low frequency clock related to the pixel rate of the video signal When this menu item is displayed use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a different clock TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 309 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 310 The rate of the pixel clock depends on the format of the signal selected as the trigger source channel 1 or channel 2 27 MHz for SD formats E 74 25 or 74 18 MHz for HD formats and most 3G formats where 74 25 MHz is for integer frame rates and 74 18 MHz is for non integer frame rates such as 59 94 29 97 and 23 98 fps E 148 5 MHz or 14
481. ses the vertical frequency to increase by one c aph each second If KY is initially 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal will flip by 180 the frequency will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC in a repetitive cycle Kr parameter Display name KT T Freq Units cycles per second c s The Ky T Freq parameter if used alone does not create a pattern Rather the entire screen will cycle sinusoidally between white and black The effect will be similar on either line or field display of a waveform monitor Typically a small Ky coefficient is set to add apparent motion to a standard circle sine wave or sweep pattern To see the picture effects of this parameter select any of the standard zone plates and vary Kr Note that the Kr coefficient may be positive or negative the sign will determine the direction of the pattern s motion K parameter Display name KT 2 T Sweep Units cycles per second per second c s 2 The K7 T Sweep parameter sets the change in temporal frequency over time If Kx is initially 0 0 setting Ky 2 to 1 0 will result in an apparent K of 10 0 after ten seconds 20 0 after twenty seconds and so forth The temporal frequency will increase to maximum return to 0 0 and repeat
482. set any parameter to its default value If you adjust any one of the dependent parameters individually the pattern control parameter will become invalid and you will see this message 1970 246 The zone plate dependent parameters are discussed here in the order in which they appear below the pattern control parameter when using the down V arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu The Custom 1 and Custom 2 signal selections do not have pattern control parameters and start with the Zone Plate Amplitude Parameter Display name ZP Amplitude Units mV Use this parameter to adjust the zone plate signal amplitude from 0 0 mV to 798 0 mV in 0 5 mV increments The default value is 700 mV TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Kx parameter Display name KX H Freq Units cycles active picture height c aph Kx denotes the initial constant horizontal frequency of the pattern To see the effects of changing this coefficient set a waveform monitor to view the video lines Note that the units are cycles per active picture height The number of cycles in a line will depend on the width to height aspect ratio of the active format For example Kx 9 0 will result in approximately 12 cycles per line ina format with a 4 3 aspect ratio the same setting will yield about 16 cycles per line when the ratio is 16 9 To estimate the equivalent absolute frequency of
483. set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output OVERLAY submenu test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu Logo eves To LOGO submenu lt gt gt Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle BACK To CIRCLE submenu A V 3036 025 DVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK OFF OFF lt I ian Figure 3 44 DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where yo
484. signals See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module Black to White 1 Black to White 2 Black to White 3 Black to White 4 Black to White 5 Black to White 6 Black to White 7 Black to White 8 Black to White 9 Black to White 10 Black to Gray 1 Black to Gray 2 Black to Gray 3 Black to Gray 4 Black to Gray 5 Black to Gray 6 Black to Gray 7 Black to Gray 8 Black to Gray 9 Black to Gray 10 Full frame monochrome flat fields representing the individual steps in the SMPTE EG 432 1 step scale patterns available under the MONITOR button These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module Red 1 Field Red 2 Field Green 1 Field Green 2 Field Blue 1 Field Blue 2 Field Cyan 1 Field Cyan 2 Field Magenta 1 Field Magenta 2 Field Yellow 1 Field Yellow 2 Field Full frame color flat fields representing the individual colors in the SMPTE EG 432 1 color accuracy patterns available under the COLOR BAR button These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 260 To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 255 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Tab
485. sition to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 41 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 3 42 Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and to set its position on the display Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Enable AVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE X Position 0 0 APH Disabl lt I gt enable lt gt Set the horizontal position AVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE 1 gt Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position AVG x OVERLAY CIRCLE lt lt gt Set the diameter of the circle Diameter 10 0 APH Figure 3 22 AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the cir
486. so includes an 11 step crossed grayscale section and a center section with 0 black and 100 white patches SMPTE 303M Color Reference Color reference chart per SMPTE 303M also known as the GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart Note that cyan patch 18 cannot be reproduced properly in the RGB and XYZ color spaces because the red component lies at approximately 14 which exceeds legal limits for RGB formats This patch will appear as a cyan and black checkerboard pattern where the cyan patches are of a different hue than the full cyan patch as seen in YCbCr formats because the red component is clipped at 0 The color values used from SMPTE 303M are those with respect to the Des illuminant TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 161 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Table 3 37 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description Black White Step Scale Gray scale patterns per 6 9 of SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 A series Black Dark Gray Step Scale of ten different monochrome patches at increasing luminance values is centered on a gray background to verify gray scale tracking The ten steps of the black to white scale are normalized gamma corrected values of 1 10 to 1 and the ten steps of the black to dark gray scale are 1 31 to 10 31 Pluge and Luma Reference Includes two elements to assist in black and white balance The left side of the
487. ssical circular pattern looks like an optical zone plate which uses the principles of Fresnel diffraction to focus and intensify light Today however the name has been applied to a wide variety of stationary and moving test patterns The following figure shows two enlarged optical zone plates The white areas are transparent and the black areas are opaque The precise spacing of the rings focuses and intensifies light that passes through the plate Figure 3 77 Optical zone plates enlarged The HD3G7 module generates electronic zone plate signals and can be configured to provide a near infinite number of test patterns Six basic patterns are predefined Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine and Vertical Sweep for convenience These patterns all have an overall or pattern control parameter Pattern control parameters are unique to the specific predefined signals and are only found as the first item of the specific signal menu User created zone plate signals saved as Custom 1 or Custom 2 do not have pattern control parameters The dependent parameters are common to all of the zone plate signals and are found below the pattern control parameter in the menu for each zone plate signal Altering the pattern control parameter will make changes to the test signal while maintaining the basic pattern For example the pattern control parameter for the Circle zone plate signal is the Circle Frequency pa
488. ssigned to the test signal buttons cece eene eens 3 20 Table 3 6 Test signals in the ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu 000eee eee 3 24 Table 3 7 ATG7 module factory default settingS 00 cece cece cece eee cence nee en eens eee e ene e es 3 28 Table 3 8 AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons 0 ccece eens eee e es 3 32 Table 3 9 AVG7 module factory default settings 00 cece ce ccc c ee ee eee eee e eee eee ene e sean ene e es 3 47 Table 3 10 AWVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ceeeeee ees 3 51 Table 3 11 Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals e ce eee ee ees 3 60 Table 3 12 AWVG7 module factory default settings 00 cece ccc ence ee een ee ee eee e ene eeaeees 3 62 Table 3 13 BG7 module output signal formats 0 ccce cece cece cece eee eee ee tenet nee eee enna ees 3 67 Table 3 14 BG7 module Option CB test signals BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs only 3 68 Table 3 15 Timing adjustment ranges for BG7 output signals cecceeee cece eee tenet enee es 3 70 Table 3 16 BG7 module factory default settings ccc cece cece ence ee eee eee eee nent ene eea 3 74 Table 3 17 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cccceeeee eee e es 3 78 Table 3 18 DVG7 module factory default settings
489. st Signal Generator User Manual 071 3036 xx English Japanese and Russian language versions are available in PDF format on the product DVD TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Software Library 063 4440 xx and Product Documentation DVD Rackmounting hardware 351 1137 00 Power cord Varies by See page 1 4 International power cord options option Blank rear panel 614 1051 00 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 3 Getting started Options and upgrades Mainframe and module The following table lists the options that can be ordered with the options TG8000 mainframe and modules Table 1 2 Instrument and module options Option Description Instrument module 3G When you order Option 3G an option key is SDI7 provided which enables 3G SDI signal generation on the module for which the option is specified D1 When you order Option D1 a Calibration Test TG8000 mainframe Data Report is provided with the instrument AG7 AGL7 ATG7 AVG7 and or module for which the option is specified AWVG7 GPS7 HD3G7 HDLG7 HDVG7 SDI7 BK When you order Option BK two serial digital DVG7 HDVG7 black signal outputs are added to the module CB When you order Option CB 10 field ID and BG7 NTSC PAL color bars signals can be output from the BLACK3 and BLACK4 outputs International power cord All of the available power cord options listed below include a lock mechanism options except as otherwise note
490. st Signal Generator User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module GPS7 module Use this menu to select which alarm will trigger a signal output on the selected GPO submenu GPI output The output is an open collector with a weak pull up so when it is asserted the output will be low The following figure shows the GPO submenu Selection by the MODULE button NONE GPS Signal Warning 0 No Signal GPS7 x GPO OUTPUT X ALARM SELECT i gt p 7 ane a a arm lime UU NONE Near Loss of Genlock REF IN 102a No Genlock Detected only Figure 3 74 GPS7 module GPO submenu Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select from the following settings NONE Disables the selected GPI output m GPS Signal Warning lt Figure of Merit level gt Output goes high when the GPS signal quality reaches the warning level set in the GPS SETUP submenu See page 3 128 Refer to GPS Signal Quality Figure of Merit for more information about GPS signal quality levels See page 3 104 Loss of Lock Output goes low when a GPS or genlock loss of lock occurs A loss of lock alarm is triggered when the GPS signal falls below the user defined threshold after the delay time has been exceeded m Alarm Time A time of day or counter alarm is triggered for one second when the specified time is reached on the specified counter Near Loss of Genlock Output goes low when the genlock frequency is near the end of the
491. st signal buttons When the ATG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output on the SIGNAL connector See Figure 3 9 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons SS TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL voou ey Enter ears inean Fuarrio murersr sweer cate Q 0 Monitor PULSE TiMINe so omer ll 1 3036 023 Figure 3 9 Front panel test signal buttons TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 19 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module 3 20 The following table lists the ATG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 5 ATG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step 10 Step
492. stall custom picture test signals use FTP to copy the BMP picture file s you files BMP format created to the SDI7 PICTURE directory on the TG8000 The instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 After the BMP files are downloaded to the TG8000 press the MODULE button to select the desired SDI7 module and then press the OTHER button to select the desired BMP file NOTE Picture displays work best with uncompressed BMP images 24 bits and 32 bits true color Picture displays do not work with RLES or RLE4 BMP compression About SDI7 picture file generation When generating signals from frame pictures the SDI7 does not filter the video signal except at the left and right borders of the raster The unfiltered signal allows users to control exactly what is generated and to create stressful patterns The SDI7 allows picture files to be used at resolutions larger and smaller than the native size of the picture file If the picture image is larger than needed it will be truncated and only the upper left corner of the image will be displayed If the picture file resolution is smaller than the output raster then the image will be displayed in the upper left corner of the output and black will be shown in the rest of the image The combination of not filtering and the use of nonnative image sizes has the potential to cause problems in several areas m If the vid
493. stic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 4 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced SDI7 module This menu is accessible only when the instrument is in factory mode From CALIBRATION submenu this menu you can access several special output signals and adjust the serial output levels The special signals are unscrambled and are synchronous with the clock out of the trigger BNC They are used to check performance or used when adjusting serial levels See the TGS amp 000 Service Manual for information on adjustments and using factory mode TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 313 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module factory default settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the SDI7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 61 SDI7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings TEST SIGNAL 100 Color Bars FORMAT 1080 59 94i SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH YCbCr 4 2 2 10b OUTPUT MODE HD 1920 x 1080 MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Rand
494. stomer must include a reproduction of any copyright notice or restrictive rights legend appearing in or on the copy of the Program as received from Tektronix Customer may not 1 Use the Program on more than one machine at any one time unless covered by a floating user license or separate site license 2 Transfer the Program to any person or organization outside of Customer or the corporation of which Customer is a part without the prior written consent of Tektronix except in connection with the transfer of the equipment within which the programs are encoded or incorporated 3 Export or re export directly or indirectly the program any associated documentation or the direct product thereof to any country to which such export or re export is restricted by law or regulation of the United States or any foreign government having jurisdiction without the prior authorization if required of the Office of Export Administration Department of Commerce Washington D C and the corresponding agency of such foreign government 4 For object code Programs only reverse compile or disassemble the Program for any purpose or 5 Copy the documentation accompanying the Program For Programs designed to reside on a single machine and support one or more additional machines either locally or remotely without permitting the Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution the additional machines shall be considered within the defi
495. submenu See page 2 36 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD display Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to decrease or increase the display contrast BEEPER CONTROL Enables or disables the beeper function in the instrument When enabled the beeper alerts the user when a fan fault condition has been detected Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to enable or disable the beeper FRONT PANEL DISABLE Sets the time out period until the front panel buttons are disabled Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the following choices Disable Immediately 1 Minute 10 Minutes 30 Minutes and 1 Hour Press the ENTER button to enable the selection When you select any of these time out periods except Disable the front panel buttons are disabled when that time passes without a button push If this happens press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button for about 1 second to restart the time out counter and enable the front panel buttons The FRONT PANEL ENABLE button is illuminated when the front panel buttons are enabled TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics NETWORK Displays the current network parameters of the mainframe or sets the network parameters for the 10 100 1000 BASE T port on the mainframe Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to toggle between Information and Setup When you select Information and press the ENTER button
496. sync and composite blanking signals NTSC with or without setup and PAL subcarrier signals H V drive signals and other video signals Individual format and timing control for each output Full remote control using Ethernet interface NOTE PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 17 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module How to operate the ATG7 module After the ATG7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display i After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG8000 PRESET 3036 008 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 module main menu appears as shown below ATG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars Select the signal format and the test signal that you want to output from the SIGNAL connector See page 3 19 To select an output signal on the ATG7 module pi gt Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select it
497. t NOTE You can store overlay functions including text in the mainframe presets so that the overlay is restored on power up Displaying Text To display a text overlay using the ID TEXT submenu you need to either enter a text string or create a text file txt and download it to the SDI7 TEXT folder using FTP The instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual See page 2 65 When the string is entered from the front panel it is limited to 30 characters in length and may contain only standard ASCII characters When a text file is used any Unicode character supported by the default font can be displayed The text file can be encoded as plain 7 bit ASCII text or UTF 8 encoding when extended Unicode characters are used The text file can also include embedded newline characters to create text overlays spanning multiple lines Font Files The SDI7 module uses a TrueType font to render text overlays the default typeface is Deja Vu Sans The font file is named default ttf and is stored in the SDI7 directory of the TG8000 mainframe memory The SDI7 module supports Latin Cryillic Greek and symbol character sets for use with the text overlay Using FTP you can download an alternate TrueType font file Make sure that the font file is renamed to default ttf and that the TG8000 is rebooted for the new font to take effect The instructions for using FTP are located i
498. t arrow button to set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to set the value from to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module SDI7 module Use this menu to select an item logo ID text circle or burnt in timecode to OVERLAY submenu overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up 4 or down arrow button to scroll through the menu NOTE You can store overlay functions including text in the mainframe presets so that the overlay is restored on power up The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu SDI x x OVERLAY LOGO Press ENTER for menu el A W SDI x x OVERLAY ID TEXT Press ENTER for menu ed Disable SDI x x OVERLAY BLINK lt gt Fast m Text Circle Blink Disable Slow SDI x x O
499. t lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 1 then press the ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears AGL 1 BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC 17 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select NTSC or PAL for your waveform monitor and then press the ENTER button AGL 1 BLACK 1 NTSC Black Burst TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 17 Getting started ATG7 module functional check 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black Burst then press the ENTER button Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the BACK button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 2 then press the ENTER button Repeat steps 17 and 18 Connect the BLACK 2 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the BACK button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select BLACK 3 and then press the ENTER button This displays the SELECT FOR
500. t TIMING on the LTC submenu GPS7 x LTC x TIMING 30FPS DROP lt gt Edtdaliin Delay 0 00 msec i 1970 207 Figure 3 72 GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu Use this menu to select the function that will be performed when a signal is received on the GPI input The signal is normally pulled high by an internal resistor and will trigger the selected function when pulled low The following figure shows the GPI submenu Select GPIO INPUT 1 in the maine menu NONE GPS7 x GPI INPUT 1 TRIGGER SELECT lt gt gt Reset Program Time NONE i Reacquire Position JAM Sync 1970 208 Figure 3 73 GPS7 module GPI submenu Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the following settings NONE Disables the GPI input Reset Program Time Resets the Program Time counter Reacquire Position Reacquires the GPS signal At least 60 readings from four satellites are required to establish and save a new averaged position Jam Syne When in GPS mode performs an immediate jam sync which can also be done from the JAM SYNC submenu See page 3 137 When in VITC time mode performs an immediate jam sync and sets the instrument time from the input timecode Both actions require that the input timecode has been valid for 100 continuous frames In VITC mode this input is equivalent to executing set commands from both the Jam Sync menu and the Time of Day synchronize function TG8000 Multiformat Te
501. t starting point 3 213 HDTV Digital Video Generator See HDVG7 Index 4 HDVG7 AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 3 235 AUDIO GROUP submenu 3 234 BLACK 1 connector 2 17 BLACK 2 connector 2 17 BLACK submenu Option BK only 3 240 CIRCLE submenu 3 233 Embedded audio 3 222 3 234 Factory default settings 3 242 Functional checks 1 39 ID TEXT submenu 3 231 LOGO submenu 3 230 Main menu 3 225 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 228 Operating procedure 3 222 OVERLAY submenu 3 229 Product description 3 221 Rear panel connectors 2 17 SIGNAL 1 connector 2 17 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 17 TIMECODE submenu 3 238 TIMING submenu 3 237 VIDEO submenu 3 239 Initial product inspection 1 5 Inspection 2 67 Exterior 2 67 Installation mainframe 1 5 module 1 10 rackmounting 1 6 INT LED indicator 2 3 K Key features 1 1 L LCD display 2 1 LED indicators 2 3 Mainframe main menu 2 22 Manual description xix Manuals related xx Memory how much is available 2 33 Menu control buttons 2 2 Module installation 1 10 removal 1 10 MODULE button 2 1 Module compatibility TG700 and TG8000 mainframes 1 3 Modules AG7 Audio Generator 3 1 AGL7 Analog Genlock 3 7 ATG7 Analog Test Generator 3 17 AVG7 Analog Video Generator 3 29 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 48 BG7 Black Generator 3 63 DVG7 Digital Video Generator 3 75 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 97 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI
502. t the emphasis status bits sampling alignment status bits and sample bits of the selected audio group Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the AUDIO GROUP submenu Select any of the audio groups in the AUDIO EMBEDDED main menu DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 Disable Status Enable Enable DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 ee 7 x 2 Channel 1 3 To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 4 BACK DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 os EMPHASIS Emphasis NO EMPHASIS CCITT Frame ata acne 1 Frame without Frame Number Asynchronous DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 24 bits Resolution 24 bits 20 bits 3036 026 Figure 3 48 DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu Status Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1 2 3 or 4 Select any audio channel and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu See page 3 89 3 88 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Emphasis Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NO EMPHASIS CD or CCITT P
503. te the AGL7 module 00 ccc cece cece eee ene n dene eet nee ene nee ens 3 8 AGL7 module main MENU ss j125 iccsaariscnaddensdetensdudivel iadancunted a iian a Mans 3 9 AGL7 module factory default settings c ccc ccc eee e eee ene nesr rsrsr rsr ena e ene e snes eneeenaes 3 16 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module 0 ccc cece cece cece eee ence eee ence eens enna ene enaeene eas 3 17 ATG7 module product description ccc cece cece cece eee e ee ee nee eee eee en ee snes ne enaeenneenaes 3 17 How to operate the ATG7 module 00 ccc cece cece eee ene ene nee enn e nee tenet nee ed 3 18 To select an output signal on the ATG7 module cece cece ec ee eee e ene eee ee ee ene e eee enee es 3 19 ATG7 module main menu s ssiiires irre sas cudeeds be ces aadseelleeedag peasaecadaa td pasedeasavannreneaanes 3 21 ATG7 module factory default settingS 0 cece cece eee e eee e eee ee ence eee ee eens enaeenneenaes 3 28 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module 00 ccc cece eee e cece eee e eee ee enna eens eee eneenaeenneenaes 3 29 AVG7 module product description cc cece cece cece eee e ee ee eee ee eee eens seas ene enaeenaeenaes 3 29 How to operate the AVG7 module 0 ccc cece cece ee nee eee e nen een ene n ee eee nee es 3 30 To select an output signal on the AVG7 module cc ccc cece eee e cece eee e ee ee ee ene tenn enee es 3 31 AVG7 module main Menu
504. te the diagnostic routines be sure to save the current instrument settings to a preset After the diagnostics are completed reboot the instrument and then recall the saved settings You do not need to reboot the instrument if you run the diagnostics while the instrument is in normal mode Press the ENTER button to execute the diagnostic routines The GPS7 module has its own diagnostics submenu running the mainframe diagnostics here does not run the GPS7 diagnostics See page 3 146 GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu If all of the diagnostic routines are completed without any errors the instrument will display Pass If a diagnostic error is displayed contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative NOTE The front panel buttons are disabled until the diagnostic routines are completed TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 45 Operating basics CAL OVEN submenu GPS7 module only 2 46 Use this menu to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator This may be done without removing the instrument from service allowing you to compensate for oven drift while the instrument is in its operating environment This menu only appears when there is a GPS7 module installed The mainframe oscillator is calibrated by storing the current frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS or a reference video signal This stored frequency value is used when the instrument boots up
505. ted all four groups are available in both Link A and Link B for a total of eight groups TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal This allows you to adjust the timing of this module relative to another module or to an external reference such as Genlock or GPS Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 297 SDI7 module TIMING submenu TIMECODE Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 298 SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu VIDEO Enables or disables the individual components of the output serial stream such as YCbCr RGB or XYZ and allows the edge shaping filter to be enabled or disabled on the video Also allows the A V timing mode to be invoked For SD formats Error Detection and Handling EDH packets can be enabled or disabled Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 300 SDI7 module VIDEO submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 279 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module ANC PAYLOAD Use this menu to define and control the user defined ancillary data payload insertion Press the ENTER button to access the ANC Payload submenu See page 3 302 SDI7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Use the left
506. tem logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu Logo ENTER To LOGO submenu lt gt ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle BACK To CIRCLE submenu 3036 018 OFF lt 1 gt gt Fast Slow Figure 3 29 AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu 3 54 OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 55 E ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 56 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 58 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals E Slow Sets the
507. tential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Power disconnect The power cord disconnects the product from the power source Do not block the power cord it must remain accessible to the user at all times Do not operate without covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do not operate with suspected failures If you suspect that there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Avoid exposed circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do not operate in wet damp conditions Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere Keep product surfaces clean and dry Provide proper ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation xii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual General safety summary Terms in this manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Symbols and terms onthe These terms may appear on the product product m DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediat
508. terior should not have any scratches or impact marks NOTE Save the shipping carton and packaging materials for instrument repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary 3 Verify that the shipping carton contains the basic instrument all modules you ordered the standard accessories and any optional accessories that you ordered listed in the table See Table 1 1 Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative if there is a problem with your instrument or if your shipment is incomplete To install the mainframe This section provides installation information for the TG8000 mainframe Module installation The TG8000 mainframe is shipped with the generator modules that you ordered already installed and configured You can add or remove modules as necessary for your application See page 1 10 Module installation and removal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 5 Getting started Rackmount installation A WARNING Personal injury or damage to the instrument can occur if the instrument is not properly secured in the equipment rack The TG8000 is configured at shipment for use in an equipment rack Refer to the Rackmount Slides and Rails Kit Instructions Tektronix part number 071 2746 XX that was supplied with the instrument for instructions on how to install the rackmounting hardware To install the instrument into an equipment rack After you have installed the rackmounting hardwa
509. test signal buttons 3 213 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats 0cceceeeee eee eeenes 3 217 HDLG7 module factory default settingS c cece cece cece eee eee rsrsrsrsrs 3 220 HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cceeeeeeeee 3 224 HDVG7 module output signal formats 00 cece cece cece cece eee n eens eeeeeeneeenaes 3 241 HDVG7 module factory default settings ccc cece cece ne cece e eee eserse sesen 3 242 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 ccc cece cece cece ees 3 249 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 1280 x 720 cccce ccc e cece eee ee eens 3 249 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level A 2K x 1080 c sce c cece eee eee eee ees 3 249 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 cece ecee eee e eens 3 250 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2K x 1080 cece ee cece eee e ees 3 250 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2XHD 1080 cece eee eee ees 3 250 SDI7 module Option 3G only 3G Level B 2XHD 720 0 cece cece eee e ee ene ees 3 250 SDI7 module HD SDI 1920 x 1080 yiiceduceiataaniswcysannsseneraeteretessdgundedwedas 3 250 SDI7 module HD SDI 1280 x 720 bezss scan tose tasioneadnaday viccte un eehinseneadiy condone 3 250 SDI7 module SD 525 720 x 486 vvie sie diondetes vnnipanengeneneddokp
510. the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the AVG7 module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the AVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 8 AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Shallow Ramp Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst Black Burst with Field ref 0 Flat Field NTSC only 10 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep 100 Sweep Chroma Frequency Response MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Gray Window 100 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 75 Red Field Monitor Setup White Window Safe Area PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator module
511. the cycle as long as the value of Kr remains greater than zero TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 175 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 176 Y G X parameter Cb B Y parameter Cr R Z parameter Waveform Shape parameter T Reset parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components the Y component for a YC C sample structure the G component for a GBR sample structure or the X component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YC C sample structure the B component for a GBR sample structure or the Y component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YC C sample structure the R component for a GBR sample structure or the Z component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF NOTE When the sampling structure for the current format uses the YCbCr color space the default settings enable only the Y channel This results in the familiar black to white zone plate patterns When the RGB color space is used the default settings enable all three channels also resulting in the black to white zone plate
512. the display changes to HD3G x ZONE PLATE CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency x c aph 1970 245 which shows the zone plate signal CIRCLE SWEEP and the pattern control parameter Circle Frequency As mentioned earlier each of the standard zone plate signals have a pattern control parameter that is unique to that signal Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Circle Circle frequency x c aph 1 Diagonal Diag Frequency x c aph H Sine Horiz Frequency x MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency x MHz V Sine Vert Frequency x c aph 1 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency x c aph 1 1 c aph cycles per active picture height 4 While the pattern control parameter is displayed you can use the left lt or right arrow button to modify it This will modify the signal while maintaining the basic pattern NOTE Press the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to reset any parameter 5 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the parameters menu which for the predefined signals starts with it s unique pattern control parameter as shown in the table above and then continues through the list of dependent parameters At each parameter whether it s a pattern control parameter or a dependent parameter you can use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to modify it 6 When you are done altering parameters scroll to the Save As selection at the bottom of the m
513. the instrument from an equipment rack Perform the following steps to remove an instrument that is installed in an equipment rack WARNING To prevent injury when removing the product from the rack do not forcefully and abruptly pull the product from the rack Pull with the minimum force required to move the instrument with a consistent even motion 1 Loosen the knob screws if present that attach the front of the instrument to the rack 2 Gently pull the instrument toward you until you can reach the levers at the rear of the instrument 3 Tilt both lever handles upward simultaneously to allow them to clear the stops See Figure 1 1 4 Pull the instrument past the stops and out of the rack TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 7 Getting started Environmental operating requirements A Check that the location of your installation has the proper operating environment as listed in the following table See Table 1 3 CAUTION Damage to the instrument can occur if this instrument is powered on at temperatures outside the specified temperature range Table 1 3 TG8000 environmental requirements Parameter Description Temperature Operating 0 C to 50 C Nonoperating 20 C to 60 C Relative Operating 20 to 80 No condensation Maximum wet bulb Humidity temperature 29 4 C Nonoperating 5 to 90 No condensation Maximum wet bulb temperature 40 0 C Altitude Oper
514. the next ramp Color Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of ramps across the colors available in the valid RGB gamut Each set of ramps transitions between adjacent hues red yellow green cyan magenta blue red From the top of the pattern the first three rows of ramps are at 25 50 and 75 saturation The fourth row of ramps includes fully saturated colors at 100 value The next three rows of ramps are at 75 50 and 25 value The bottom row of ramps is monochrome FLAT FIELD 3 160 0 Flat Field Black 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field White Full frame monochrome flat fields The factory installed patterns include 0 black 50 and 100 white You can install extended signal sets which include additional patterns for the remaining 10 increments See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets 100 Red Field 100 Green Field 100 Blue Field 100 Cyan Field 100 Magenta Field 100 Yellow Field Full frame color flat fields The factory installed patterns include each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and yellow at 100 value You can install enhanced signal sets which include additional patterns for these six colors at 75 value See page 3 164 To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field Full frame monochrome flat fields availab
515. the outputs of several diagnostics shows operation parameters for the module and allows you to clear the counts of CRC errors that are detected in the input signal This menu provides status information only and does not affect operating behavior Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 310 SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu CALIBRATION Provides a variety of special signals to help measure amplitude and rise time and allows you to adjust serial output amplitude This menu is accessible in factory mode only See page 3 313 SDI7 module CALIBRATION submenu 3 280 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 module STATUS menu SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Displays the output signal format and output sample structure The following figure shows an example STATUS display with Option 3G enabled SDI x x STATUS 100 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 308 Figure 3 122 SDI7 module STATUS menu in Generator mode 100 Color Bars Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated 3G A Indicates the 3 Gb s signal and the level currently being generated 1080 59 94p Indicates the output format YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure Select SD or HD mode or set the 3G SDI serial link mult
516. the serial digital audio signal data Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are 24 bits or 20 bits Press the ENTER button to enable the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 3 AG7 Audio Generator module AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Selects the frame reset signal that is synchronized with the digital audio signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to make the selection The selection items are Free Run Frame Reset 1 and Frame Reset 2 For Free Run the audio signal is not synchronized with any of the frame reset signals Press the ENTER button to enable the selection NOTE If the frame reset signal used by the audio signals is reset by the change of the video format the audio signal timing is also reset AUDIO TIMING Sets the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO TIMING submenu See page 3 6 AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu AG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the selected audio CHANNEL PARAMETERS channel Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu submenu items The following figure shows the CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu From CHANNEL PARAMETERS in the main menu Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000Hz 42000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500 Hz 4800 Hz 15000 Hz
517. the sine wave i e to convert from c aph to c s or Hz use the formula fea x Kx x Riav x Raspect x Niines x J frame where Raspect the aspect ratio width height Niines the number of lines per frame frame the frame rate Riav the ratio of line length to the length of the active video The maximum frequency is half of the active format s sampling frequency In formats that use a 74 25 MHz clock for example the maximum value of KX will correspond to a sine frequency of 37 1 MHz The Horizontal Sine zone plate for example is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 78 Figure 3 78 A K only zone plate TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 171 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module 3 172 Kx2 parameter Display name KX 2 H Sweep Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kx H Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in the horizontal frequency as a function of position along the video line When Kx alone is applied the result resembles a common sweep test signal Again use a waveform monitor to look at all the video lines to see the effects of Kx2 When Kx is 0 0 setting Kx to 9 will result in the line waveform changing from DC to 9 c aph in the width equal to one active picture height As with Kx the ending frequency will depend on the aspect ratio of the active video format For example in a 16 9 format with a Kx of 9 0 a Kx coeffic
518. the time related K parameters to zero and set the T Reset parameter to Enable TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module How to use zone plate signals on the HD3G7 module Here is an example of how you can use zone plate signals to simplify a common task One common task is measuring the horizontal frequency response of a system With a typical swept frequency generator you would apply a signal such as a 1 MHz to 30 MHz sweep with markers every 5 MHz Then you try to estimate the frequency of the 3 dB roll off point by interpolating the position of the 3 dB point between the markers The HD3G7 generator module s adjustable zone plate signal provides a better way The H Sweep Zoneplate pattern control parameter is the H Sweep Frequency which controls the upper frequency limit of the sweep the swept to frequency Simply adjust the H Sweep Frequency until the system roll off is at 3 dB Read the frequency directly from the instrument display Em The H Sine Zoneplate which provides a constant frequency horizontal sine signal instead of a swept signal can be used to reduce error in measuring attenuation at a given frequency Set the Horz Frequency parameter to a low value and measure the amplitude of the entire line Next calculate the 3 dB point 0 707 x the low frequency amplitude Finally increase the Horz Frequency parameter until the system respons
519. tical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 55 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 3 56 Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable Disabl lt I gt Erve AWVG7 X Po x OVERLAY TEXT sition 0 0 APH 1 gt Set the horizontal position AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT EDIT AWVG7 C OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 31 AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 1 gt Set the vertical position A 1 gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file
520. tings 3 220 The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDLG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu NOTE The factory default settings put the HDLG7 module in the Generator mode Table 3 44 HDLG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 94i GBR 4 4 4 12 bits SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel LINK OFFSET 0 0000 ms 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HD Test Signal MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable Converter mode Normal Converter embedded audio LINK A 2K Horizontal Vertical Gradient offset Horizontal Gradient offset 16 Vertical Gradient offset 16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module This section describes the module specific functions of the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module HDVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 17 HDVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 39 TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Re
521. tion 1 5 Connectors Rear panel 2 6 Crossover Ethernet cable 2 47 D Description product overview 1 1 Diagnostic routines mainframe 2 42 DIAGNOSTICS submenu mainframe 2 42 Digital Video Generator See DVG7 DVG7 AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 3 89 Audio click 3 90 3 236 AUDIO GROUP submenu 3 88 BLACK 1 connector 2 12 BLACK 2 connector 2 12 BLACK submenu Option BK only 3 94 CIRCLE submenu 3 87 EDH insertion 3 93 Embedded audio 3 75 3 88 Factory default settings 3 95 Functional checks 1 24 ID TEXT submenu 3 85 LOGO submenu 3 84 Main menu 3 79 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 82 Operating procedure 3 76 OVERLAY submenu 3 83 Product description 3 75 Rear panel connectors 2 12 SIGNAL 1 connector 2 12 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 12 TIMING submenu 3 91 VIDEO submenu 3 92 E Environmental operating requirements 1 8 EXT LED indicator 2 3 External reference indicator 3 104 F Factory default settings HD3G7 3 205 SDI7 3 314 Fan fault beeper control 2 30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Fan fault alarm 2 21 FAULT LED indicator 2 5 Features 1 1 Figures Of Merit FOM 3 104 File transfer using FTP 2 65 Flash memory 2 33 Font file installation 3 289 FORMAT button 2 2 FRAME RESET 1 2 20 FRAME RESET 2 2 20 FRAME RESET 3 2 20 Frame reset signals 2 20 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu 2 26 Front panel disable 2 30 Operation 2 1 FRONT PANEL ENABLE button 2 2 FTP
522. tion as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Avoid the use of high pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the interior of this instrument High pressure air can cause electrostatic discharge ESD Instead use low pressure compressed air about 9 psi Exterior inspection Using the following table as a guide inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts You should thoroughly check instruments that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and performance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument Table 2 7 External inspection check list Item Inspect for Repair action Cabinet and front panel Cracks scratches deformations Replace defective module damaged hardware Front panel buttons Missing or damaged Repair or replace missing or defective buttons Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation Replace defective modules clear or wash deformed contacts and dirt in connectors out dirt Accessories Missing items or parts of items bent pins Replace damaged or missing items broken or frayed cables and damaged frayed cables and defective modules connectors TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 67 Operating basics Exterior cleaning Perform the following steps when you clean the exterior of the instrument WARNING To avoid injury or death unplug the pow
523. tion in the BG7 module main menu See page 3 65 BG7 module main menu FIELD REFERENCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to Enable or Disable the field reference in the output signal Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The Field Reference menu item is available only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output With Option CB this menu item appears only for the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 67 BG7 Black Generator module 3 68 TEST SIGNAL Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the desired test signal Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The available signals depend on the selected format NTSC NTSC J or PAL NOTE The Test Signal menu item appears only with Option CB only for the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs and only when a non HD format is set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output Table 3 14 BG7 module Option CB test signals BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs only NTSC or NTSC J format PAL format Black Burst Black Burst No Field Reference Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst Black Burst with 10 Field ID 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 White SMPTE EG1 Color Bar 40 Flat Field Convergence 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 White 100 Color Bar Over Red 75 Color Bar Over Red 40 Flat Field Convergence
524. tive product Parts modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance All replaced parts modules and products become the property of Tektronix In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other produ
525. to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal MOVING PICTURE up down or left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to submenu _ Scroll through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu A Set the sample number to be scrolled Set the line number to be scrolled Set the frame period to be scrolled Random Disable Enable V Figure 3 100 HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 219 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection HDLG7 module factory default set
526. to transfer user files using FTP When the TG8000 generator is connected to an Ethernet network you can use an FTP client to drag and drop user files to or from the generator Perform the following steps to transfer files to or from the instrument using FTP 1 Connect the TG8000 generator to your local Ethernet network See page 2 47 How to connect the generator to a network 2 Ona computer connected to the same network as the TG8000 generator open an FTP client such as Windows Explorer 3 Inthe Windows Explorer command box enter ftp IP address where IP address is the network address assigned to the TG8000 generator NOTE Some FTP clients may ask for login credentials In this case login with a user name of anonymous and no password TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 65 Operating basics 4 The Windows Explorer window should immediately connect to the instrument and show the directory structure as shown below T Eles LP gt Thelntemet p Ei gt 4 Search P Organize E FY Favorites HE Desktop Th Downloads SE Recent Places AGT File folder AGLT File folder ATGT File folder ANGI File folder Libraries E Documents a Music E Pictures E Videos AWVG7 File folder BG7 File folder CPU File folder DvG7 File folder GPST File folder HD3G7 File falder jE Computer osisk C HDLG7 File folder H
527. ton to confirm the selection NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs gt If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the following message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press BACK press the BACK button TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 31 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the AVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 16 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A C D TEST SIGNAL SELECT FRONT PANEL MODULE ENTER _sars_ LINEAR Farro muurarst sweep Q 0 Monor PuLse TIMING so omer Y use FORMAT Cmr ExT TME FAULT Figure 3 16 Front panel test signal buttons You can download a frame picture file created by
528. trol parameter in the menu for each zone plate signal Altering the pattern control parameter will make changes to the test signal while maintaining the basic pattern For example the pattern control parameter for the Circle zone plate signal is the Circle Frequency parameter The Circle Frequency parameter controls the maximum frequency of the circle You may alter the Circle Frequency at will and the system will adjust four other dependent parameters to maintain the pattern as a circle However if you alter the underlying dependent parameters individually the pattern may change to be something other than a circle After changes have been made you can save the new signal as a custom zone plate signal TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module To select a zone plate Perform the following steps to select a zone plate signal for output signal on the SDI7 module 1 Press the SWEEP test signal button to enter the zone plate signal menu Once you enter the zone plate signal menu the SDI7 generator module will start to output the displayed zone plate signal The dot in front of the signal name on the second line of the display indicates the selected default signal 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine or Vertical Swe
529. trument Insert a USB drive into the USB port on the front panel of the instrument Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 PRESET M YS Press the up A or down 7 arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY and then press the ENTER button 7 Verify the status of the USB drive a Press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB lt status gt b Verify that the USB status is Mounted c Ifthe status is Not Mounted press the ENTER button to mount the USB drive TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2 57 Operating basics 2 58 8 Back up the user created files a Press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE b Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Backup All User Data to USB and then press the ENTER button to start the backup process c A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation d During the first stage of the copy process the display shows the names of the files as they are copied Depending on the size of the files being copied this may take a couple of minutes e When all of the files have been copied the message Finishing copy is displayed while the file system buffers are emptied This message may appear for a couple of minutes f When the backup operation is complete the
530. ts cycles per second per second c s 2 The Kr T Sweep parameter sets the change in temporal frequency over time If Kx is initially 0 0 setting Ky 2 to 1 0 will result in an apparent K of 10 0 after ten seconds 20 0 after twenty seconds and so forth The temporal frequency will increase to maximum return to 0 0 and repeat the cycle as long as the value of Ky remains greater than zero TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module Y G X parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components the Y component for a YC C sample structure the G component for a GBR sample structure or the X component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF Cb B Y parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YC C sample structure the B component for a GBR sample structure or the Y component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF Cr R Z parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YCC sample structure the R component for a GBR sample structure or the Z component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF NOTE When the sampling structure for the current format
531. ty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period If Tektronix is unable to provide a replacement that is free from defects in materials and workmanship within a reasonable time thereafter Customer may terminate the license for the Program and return the Program and any associated materials for credit or refund THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PROGRAM IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPLACE DEFECTIVE MEDIA OR REFUND CUSTOMER S PAYMENT IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL TEKTRONIX OR OTHERS FROM WHOM TEKTRONIX HAS OBTAINED A LICENSING RIGHT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR CONNECTED WITH CUSTOMER S POSSESSION OR USE OF THE PROGRAM EVEN IF TEKTRONIX OR SUCH OTHERS HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIRD PARTY DISCLAIMER Except as expressly agreed otherwise third parties from whom Tektronix may have obtained a licensing right do not warrant the program do not assume any liability with respect to its use and do not undertake to furnish any support or information relating thereto GENERAL This Agreement contains the entire agreement between t
532. u To OVERLAY submenu Group 1 lt 1 gt Group 2 ENIER To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 3 Group 4 BACK To TIMING submenu To TIMECODE submenu To VIDEO submenu ENER To BLACK submenu HDVG7 x HD RATE Non integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 1 gt Integer 60 50 30 25 24 HDVG7 x OVERLAY HDVG7 x AUDIO EMBEDDED Group 1 GPS7 module only l Option BK only m Non integer 59 94 29 97 23 98 3036 090 Figure 3 102 HDVG7 module main menu 3 226 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 228 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle that is overlaid on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 285 AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the output test signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 234 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signa
533. u can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 84 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 85 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 87 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay E Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 83 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module DVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the LOGO submenu display position of the logo Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG8000 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu DVG7 x OVERLA
534. u to verify the operation Press the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics 9 Monitor the progress of the file copy operation a During the first stage of the copy process the display shows the names of the files as they are copied Depending on the size of the files being copied this may take a couple of minutes b When all of the files have been copied the message Finishing copy is displayed while the file system buffers are emptied This message may appear for a couple of minutes c When the backup or restore operation is complete the message Backup completed successfully or Restore completed successfully is displayed before the menu display returns to normal NOTE If the USB drive or the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the backup or restore operation completes an error message is displayed Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message See page 2 64 Memory requirements 10 After the backup or restore operation is complete press the up A or down Y arrow button to select TG8000 UTILITY USB Mounted 11 Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive After the message You may now safely remove the USB drive is displayed the menu readout should change to TG8000 UTILITY USB Not mounted 12 Remove the USB drive from the instrument How
535. ugh 13 for the lower LINK A and LINK B connectors Converter function 17 18 19 20 21 22 Set the HDTV digital video generator as indicated below Output signal 100 Color Bars Format 1080 59 94i Connect the output connector on the HDTV digital video generator to the HD SDI IN connector on the HDLG7 using the 75 Q BNC cable Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 59 94p and then press the ENTER button Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 23 24 25 26 27 Getting started Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK A connector to the upper LINK A connector Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK B connector to the upper LINK B connector Repeat steps 21 through 24 for the upper LINK A and LINK B connectors HDVG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video check Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV waveform monitor m 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power
536. ule is installed in the mainframe The following table shows the states of the TIME LED for the different mainframe timecode signal configurations Table 2 2 States of the TIME timecode LED indicator GPS7 module installed No GPS7 module installed Timecode Selected timecode source Timecode status TIME LED state Status TIME LED state Internal GPS7 installed Off NA Off Internal Program Time Off NA Off selected External GPS VITC or LTC Time of Day selected Solid green NA Off External LTC only SMPTE standard Solid green A Off External LTC only Outside SMPTE Solid yellow A Off standard External GPS VITC or LTC Missing discontinuous Solid red NA Off badly timed wrong FPS in External Time source 2 4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Operating basics FAULT LED indicator The FAULT LED illuminates when there is a problem with the instrument hardware The following table shows the states of the FAULT LED for hardware failures Table 2 3 States of the FAULT LED indicator Instrument condition Example s FAULT LED state User actions A fault condition exists that has the potential to damage the instrument hardware The fan has stopped turning The internal temperature of the instrument is too high Blinking red 1 A flashing FAN FAULT message appears on the LCD display Press the ENABLE button to dismiss the fault message 2 Check
537. uses the YCbCr color space the default settings enable only the Y channel This results in the familiar black to white zone plate patterns When the RGB color space is used the default settings enable all three channels also resulting in the black to white zone plate patterns A colored zone plate pattern can be created by enabling or disabling individual channels When the XYZ color space is used the resultant patterns will show some chroma in all combinations of the X Y Z channel settings due to the inherent encoding of this color space Waveform Shape Use the Waveform Shape parameter to set the waveform to a Sine Triangle parameter or Square wave T Reset parameter Use the T Reset parameter to reset the time coordinate t in the zone plate equation of the pattern to zero When the T Reset parameter is first set to Enable the time coordinate is reset to zero and there is no apparent motion in the zone plate even if any of the time coefficients Kxr Kyr Kr or Kr are non zero Enabling the T Reset parameter does not set the other parameters to zero If you then alter any of the K parameters the temporal t coordinate will be allowed to change to match Subsequent changes to K parameters will first reset the time coordinate t and then allow it to change with the K parameter Disable allows the zone plate time coordinate to increment continuously When T Reset is set to Disable resetting all of the time coefficients Kxrt Kyr K
538. ust the offset Press the ENTER button to confirm the offset This selection is available only when a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument 30 DROP Use this menu to enable or disable the Drop Frame mode for the 30 frame per second timecode format Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Enable 30 Drop Frame and Disable 30 Drop Frame Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only when the frame or field rate for the current format is 29 97 30 59 94 or 60 ATC LTC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Linear Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection ATC VITC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Vertical Interval Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 299 SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module 3 300 SDI7 module VIDEO submenu Use this menu to modify the video output signal You can enable or disable individual video components enable or disable edge filtering on each video line enable or disable Error Detection and Handling EDH packet insertion SD formats only and enable or display the AV Timing mode Use the
539. utton to save them to the signal file Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu or SELECT OUTPUT submenu ATG x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s lt ie Set the vertical timing V ATG x TIMING NTSC Horizontal 0 0000 msec lt gt Set the horizontal timing Figure 3 14 ATG7 module TIMING submenu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator module Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 color frame to 1 2 color frame in 1 line steps Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to adjust the timing offset You can set the value from 1 line to 1 line in one clock steps 18 5 ns NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously The ATG7 horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments You can match the AGL7 or GPS7 module timing to the ATG7 module by adjusting the fine timing controls on the AGL7 or GPS7 module ATG7 module Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce features for t
540. vertical ancillary space VANC but no earlier than the second line after the RP 168 switch point Line 9 with a sample offset of 0 first word of active video immediately after SAV is a suitable location The selected video channel should be Luma for most ancillary packets including AFD Finally set the ANC PAYLOAD Output mode to Continuous to start AFD insertion of the active test signal For this example the SMPTE RP 219 color bars are an effective test pattern because the center section of the 16 9 test signal contains the original 4 3 aspect ratio SMPTE pattern TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module Use this menu to select line rate frame rate or the system clock of the module TRIGGER OUTPUT to trigger an external instrument The following figure shows the TRIGGER submenu OUTPUT submenu System Clock HD3G7 x TRIGGER OUTPUT lt Pixel Clock Frame Pulse Line Pulse 1970 301 Figure 3 95 HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu System Clock The system clock is a low jitter clock signal which runs at the parallel clock rate for 3G formats or twice the parallel clock rate for HD formats Pixel Clock The pixel clock is an internal parallel rate clock a low frequency clock related to the pixel rate of the video signal Frame Field Pulse The trigger pulse is produced at the field or frame rate of the video signal In interlaced and segmented fr
541. waveform monitor Two 1m 3 ft BNC to BNC high bandwidth cables Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe See page 1 10 2 Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display Generator function 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown below appears HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 5 Press the down arrow button to select Output Mode and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the desired output mode When the desired output mode is displayed press the Enter button to confirm it This example will use the 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 output mode 6 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select 1080 50p then press ENTER 7 Press the COLOR BAR button and select a signal to output 8 Press the BACK button to exit the COLOR BARS menu TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1 35 Getting started 9 Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable 10 Press the up A arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu 11 Press the ENTER button 12 Press the right arrow to scroll through the Diagnostics readouts 13 Check that the PLL Status Flex1 reading and the DDS Status DDS1 P
542. when an SDI7 module is installed 3036 094a Figure 2 21 UTILITY submenu 2 28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual EF a Operating basics From previous page MV TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM OUTPUT Disable el TG8000 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT To GPI ALARM SELECT submenu Press ENTER for menu Disable lt gt Enable Disable TG8000 UTILITY AGL ALARM OUTPUT Black 1 E Disable lt gt Black 2 Black 3 TG8000 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT Press ENTER for menu el To AGL ALARM SELECT submenu ENTER TG8000 UTILITY FIRMWARE UPGRADE USB Upgrade To USB Upgrade procedure or USB Upgrade lt gt Network Upgrade To Network Upgrade procedure BACK TG8000 UTILITY USB Not Connected oR 168000 UTILITY USB Mounted ENTER _ Safely remove No USB Drive Detected Unmount USB Drive the USB drive lA v Backup Presets to USB TG8000 UTILITY BACKUP RESTORE lt gt Backup All User Data to USB Backup Presets to USB el Restore Presets from USB Restore All User Data from USB TG8000 UTILITY FLASH MEMORY Total 100663296 Free 28254208 Y TG8000 UTILITY DIAGNOSTICS To DIAGNOSTICS submenu Press ENTER for menu TG8000 UTILITY CAL OVEN SELECT a To CAL OVEN submenu Internal Frequeny Calibration BACK 2 Only available when an AGL7 module is installed 3 Only available when a GPS7 module is installed
543. wn arrow button to navigate to the sample structure depth Option 3G only selection shown below SDI7 x x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH RGB 444 12b d 1970 309 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow buttons to scroll through the available sample structures When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b e YCbCr 444 10b RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB 444 12b 3 252 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual To select the test signal on the SDI7 module SDI7 Dual Channel SD HD 3G SDI Video Generator module All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons See Table 3 59 When the SDI7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 114 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A
544. word You can set the Secondary ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Secondary ID and exit Secondary ID editing DC Press the ENTER button to edit the Data Count word to show the number of User Data Words to follow You can set the Data Count from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down Y arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data Count and exit Data Count editing UDW Use this menu selection to set a User Data Word Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select the User Data Word you wish to edit from word 000 through word 254 and then press the ENTER button to edit that User Data Word You can set the User Data Word from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up 4 and down F arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the User Data Word and exit User Data Word editing for that word NOTE To make this process easier you can us
545. ximately two complete frequency sweeps across the picture V Sine Vertical Frequency c aph The vertical frequency is actually the Ky coefficient The maximum frequency c aph corresponds to the number of active video lines in a field of the active video standard For example when an 1125 line system is output which has 1080 active lines Ky can be any value between 540 and 540 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency maximum c aph or multiple TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual The vertical sweep frequency is actually the Ky 2 coefficient For numbers greater than maximum dividing the displayed value by that maximum will give twice the number of complete DC max DC sweeps per field sweeps Ky2 Ky 2 For example in a standard with 1080 lines per field a vertical sweep frequency of 2160 c aph2 would result in one complete frequency sweep down the picture 3 169 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters Zone plate amplitude 3 170 parameter Below the pattern control parameter in each of the parameter menus are the dependent parameters The dependent parameters are the same for all the zone plate patterns Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu If desired use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the parameter NOTE Press the left 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to re
546. y category descriptions designations The installation categories are m Measurement Category IV For measurements performed at the source of low voltage installation m Measurement Category III For measurements performed in the building installation Measurement Category II For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation Measurement Category I For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS Overvoltage category Overvoltage Category II as defined in IEC 61010 1 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xvii Compliance information Environmental considerations Product end of life handling Restriction of hazardous xviii substances This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component Equipment recycling Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product s end of life In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately This symbol indicates that this product compl
547. y position of the text Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu _ Disable SJL Enable DVG x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 0 0 APH gt gt Set the horizontal position DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH L V DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT EDIT DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 46 DVG7 module ID TEXT submenu Set the vertical position A lt d gt Edit text V ENTER ENTER Save the text to the signal file Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3 85 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module EDIT Edits the text y
548. yload example 3 199 AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 3 186 CALIBRATION submenu 3 204 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 202 Factory default settings 3 205 Functional checks 1 35 HD SDIIN connector 2 15 Installing enhanced signal sets 3 164 Main menu 3 178 Modifying a Zone Plate Signal 3 166 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 185 Operating procedure 3 152 OUTPUT MODE submenu 3 184 Product description 3 151 Rear panel connectors 2 15 SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu 3 201 Select sample structure and depth 3 157 Select the output mode 3 156 Select the signal format 3 157 Select the test signal 3 158 Selecting a Zone Plate Signal 3 166 Selecting an output signal 3 153 Selecting converter mode 3 155 Selecting generator mode 3 153 Index 3 Index SIGNAL 1 connector 2 15 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 15 TIMECODE submenu 3 190 TIMING submenu 3 189 TRIG OUT connector 2 15 TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu 3 201 Using Zone Plate signals 3 177 VIDEO submenu 3 192 Zone Plate Control parameters 3 168 Zone Plate Dependent parameters 3 170 Zone Plate Signals 3 165 HDLG7 Embedded audio selection 3 215 Factory default settings 3 220 Functional checks 1 37 HD SDIIN connector 2 16 LINK A connectors 2 16 LINK B connectors 2 16 LINK OFFSET submenu 3 219 Main menu 3 216 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 219 Operating procedure 3 208 Product description 3 207 Rear panel connectors 2 16 Selecting the converter mode 3 214 Setting the gradien
549. you will access the NETWORK INFORMATION submenu See page 2 37 When you select Setup and press the ENTER button you will access the NETWORK SETUP submenu See page 2 38 ALARM STATUS Displays the name of the highest severity mainframe alarm currently in effect When no alarm is active the message No Alarm is displayed Alarms must be enabled in the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu or the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu when an AGL7 module is installed before they will appear in the Alarm Status display after an alarm has been triggered If multiple alarms have been triggered only the name of the highest severity alarm is displayed From low 1 to high 5 severity the following alarm names may appear 1 No Alarm No errors have been detected 2 Genlock Near Loss of Lock The frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference signal have shifted considerably and the TG8000 is near loss of lock If this message appears check the frequency of the genlock signal or the internal reference signal of the TG8000 3 Genlock Loss of Lock The TG8000 cannot lock to the genlock signal 4 Genlock No Signal A genlock signal is not connected 5 Fan Fault The fan on the rear panel has stopped operating properly NOTE The ALARM STATUS submenu does not update after you enter the UTILITY menu Therefore if a new alarm occurs while you are looking at this submenu you will not see the new alarm until you exit and reenter the UTILITY me

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents